2013 Outlander

00-1
GROUP 00
GENERAL
CONTENTS
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL. . . . . . 00-2 SPACIOUS CABIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-6

ACTIVE SAFETY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-7
TARGETS OF DEVELOPMENT . . . . 00-2 PASSIVE SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-8
COMFORTABLE EQUIPMENTS . . . . . . . . 00-8
PRODUCT FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . 00-2 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION . . . . . . . 00-9
TECHNICAL FEATURES. . . . . . . . . . 00-3 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION . . . . . . . . 00-9

EXTERIOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-3 MODELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-9
INTERIOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-5
MAJOR SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . 00-12
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

00-2 GENERAL
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

M2000029001706
MODEL INDICATIONS A/T:Indicates the automatic transmission, or models

The following abbreviations are used in this manual equipped with the automatic transmission.
for identification of model types. CVT: Indicates the continuously variable transmis-
2000:Indicates models equipped with the 1,998 mL sion.
<4B11, 4J11> petrol engine. DOHC: Indicates an engine with the double over-
2200:Indicates models equipped with the 2,268 mL head camshaft.
<4N14> diesel engine. INVECS:Indicates the intelligent and innovative vehi-
2400:Indicates models equipped with the 2,360 mL cles electronic control system.
<4B12> petrol engine. MIVEC:Indicates the Mitsubishi innovative valve tim-
2WD:Indicates the 2-wheel drive vehicles. ing electronic control system.
4WD:Indicates the 4-wheel drive vehicles. MPI:Indicates the multipoint injection.
A/C:Indicates the air conditioner. M/T:Indicates the manual transmission, or models
equipped with the manual transmission.
SOHC:Indicates the single overhead camshaft.
TARGETS OF DEVELOPMENT
M2000004002315
Global demand for car production is expected to MAIN CONCEPT: WELL BALACNED ECO
recover and increase further in the future. Due to this SUV
trend, the demand for SUV will also increase stably.
Enhancement of actual fuel consumption & Per-
A middle-size segment still accounts for 40% of all
ceived Quality to get well balanced SUV
SUVs. Furthermore, emerging markets are also
• Eco friendliness boasting of top class low fuel
expected to expand drastically. By considering these
consumption and CO2 emission
market trends, Mitsubishi Motors launches "NEW
• Excellent safety performance
OUTLANDER", which leads with its innovations in
• High-quality and convenient interior and comfort
the areas of fuel consumption and environmental
equipment
protection (low CO2 emission level), in all the mar-
kets (including major advanced and emerging coun-
tries).
PRODUCT FEATURES
M2000005001207
EVOLVED ORTHODOXY SUV Enhancement of field of vision

• Wide front and side views by optimized A-pillar
UPPER CLASS QUALITY & CRAFTSMAN-
shape & component layout, low wiper rest posi-
SHIP tion and washer nozzle mounted under the rear
Perceived quality edge of the hood.
• The interior has been designed that customers
can feel PERCEIVED QUALITY when they open
LONG CARGO SPACE WITH EASY SEAT
the door and get in the car. ARRANGEMENT
Quietness and comfortable cabin Long cargo space with convenient luggage box
• Pendulum mount structure for New OUTLANDER • Best length in class at cargo space.
to reduce the engine vibration and the noise. • Convenient luggage box is available for Instyle
• NEW low acoustic noise tyre is available. and Ultimate.
• Enhancement of noise isolation performance. Long and flat cargo space
• Special treatment to reduce wind noise at A-pillar, • Easy double action folding 2nd seats.
door mirror and weatherstrip moulding.

GENERAL 00-3
TECHNICAL FEATURES
• Long and flat cargo space (with luggage box) + Mode type Explanation
335 mm in comparison with current model.
4WD ECO 2WD at normal situation for fuel
ENHANCEMENT OF ACTUAL FUEL economy and turns to 4WD due to
CONSUMPTION road condition automatically.
4WD AUTO Same as current.
Effective major items to enhance fuel economy &
CO2 emission 4WD LOCK Same as current.
• Low-resistance tyre used (Rolling resistance
-10%). Advanced equipment
• Enhancement of aerodynamics Cd: 0.33 (current • Electric power tailgate.
OUTLANDER: 0.36). • Dual-zone air conditioner.
• Weight reduction (- 85 kg from current OUT- • New-generation navigation system.
LANDER). • Display audio with rear view camera.
• OSS (One-push Start Switch) & KOS (Keyless
Advanced Electric AWC control Operation System).
• NEW "4WD ECO" mode enhances fuel economy • Tilt & telescopic steering wheel.
with dynamic stability.
TECHNICAL FEATURES
EXTERIOR • "Environment Initiative Design" matching new
M2000017001884 era.
DESIGN FEATURES • "Quality Design" providing good presence and
Design theme: Next generation environmental higher class.
friendly SUV, connecting people and nature. • "Advanced Design" showing a sense of high
practicality and high safety performance.

00-4 GENERAL
TECHNICAL FEATURES
MAIN FEATURES
ACB05806
3
2
ACC00047AC
1. FRONT DESIGN • Lighter body due to rich tensioned surfaces

• Wide and stable image due to the combina- which helps to attain rigidity. (The form itself
tion of horizontal graphic and trapezoid grille. create rigidity.)
2. SIDE DESIGN • Bold and grand image due to main character
• Decent shape (boxy silhouette) shows relia- line stretched from front to rear makes the car
ble and practical image. look bigger than actual size.
• Aerodynamic body shape due to tuned roof- • Dynamic and going-forward image due to
line, narrowed-down side surface of cabin and wedged character line.
edge characters on corners. 3. REAR DESIGN
• Wide and nimble image due to high-posi-
tioned horizontal graphic.

GENERAL 00-5
TECHNICAL FEATURES
INTERIOR
M2000018002103
MAIN FEATURES
2
2
1
3 3
3
ACC00822AC
1. INSTRUMENT PANEL • Good haptic quality with soft upper pad on

• Simple and clear image with few parting lines. front doors.
• Good haptic quality with soft upper pad. • Wide haptic due to horizontal large decoration
• Functional layout due to central panel which panel on front doors.
inclines. • Moderate accent of combination of horizontal
• Gently to driver. graphic and dynamic shape of trim insert
• Advanced image due to gloss black finish (Including armrest).
centre panel. 3. SEAT
• Sporty image due to silver carbon decoration • Simple and sustainable image due to moder-
panel. ate seam line character.
2. DOOR TRIMS • High quality image with double stitch for
leather seats.

00-6 GENERAL
TECHNICAL FEATURES
SPACIOUS CABIN
M2000000400456
COMFORT
9 10 11
13 14
12
5
15 16
17
6
2 3 4 8
1 7
18
ACC00826AB
No. Item Dimension mm

1 Overall length 4,655
2 Front overhang 955
3 Wheelbase 2,670
4 Rear overhang 1,030
5 Overall height (unladen) 1,680
6 Ground clearance (unladen) 215
7 Overall width 1,800
8 Front track 1,540
Rear track 1,540
9 Front leg space 870
10 Rear leg space 875
11 Third leg space 655
12 Head room Front seat 921
13 Second seat 871
14 Third seat 805
15 Hip-point height Front seat 346
16 Second seat 395
17 Third seat 225
18 Cargo room length 1,685

GENERAL 00-7
TECHNICAL FEATURES
AERODYNAMICS
2
1
4 4
Front under cover <4N1> Rear under cover
ACC00050AC
• NEW OUTLANDER achieved a drag coefficient • ABS (Anti-skid Braking System) with EBD (Elec-
of CD=0.33, 7-percent reduction as compared to tronic Brake-force Distribution)
the current model, the cutting-edge computer (Refer to GROUP 35B − Anti-skid Braking System
simulation technology and with the numerous P.35B-2.)
wind tunnel experiments. Optimized body form of • ASC (Active Stability Control system)
bumper side, roof, C pillar, and effective aerody- (Refer to GROUP 35C − Active Stability Control sys-
namic items such as air dams, under covers, rear tem P.35C-2.)
spoiler also reduce aerodynamic drag and lift • HSA ( Hill Start Assist system)
force. [Refer to GROUP 35C − Hill Start Assist (HSA) sys-
• These aerodynamic treatments contribute fuel tem P.35C-9.]
economy, low Co2 emission and the high speed • ESS (Emergency Stop Signal system)
stability. [Refer to GROUP 35C − ESS FUNCTION P.35C-9.]
1. Optimized bumper makes the side flow very • Security alarm
smooth. (Refer to GROUP 54A − Security Alarm P.54A-59.)
2. Tapered body shape makes the wake stable and • ACC (Adaptive Cruise Control system)
small. (Refer to GROUP 17 − Adaptive Cruise Control sys-
tem P.17-8.)
3. Stream-lined roof shape is even more optimized.
• FCM (Forward Collision Mitigation)
4. Air resistance is reduced by optimally arranged (Refer to GROUP 35C − Forward Collision Mitigation
aerodynamic items such as air dams, under cov-
P.35C-24.)
ers. These items reduce front and rear lift force,
• LDW (Lane Departure Warning system)
too.
(Refer to GROUP 54A − Lane Departure Warning
ACTIVE SAFETY system P.54A-64.)
M2000031001606
The following safety equipment/systems are used:

00-8 GENERAL
TECHNICAL FEATURES
PASSIVE SAFETY MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY

M2000032001654
The following safety equipment/systems are used: <Standard meter>
• RISE Body (Reinforced Impact Safety Evolution
body) Multi-information display
• Driver's and front passenger's SRS (Supplemen-
tal Restraint System) air bag
• Curtain air bag and Side-airbag
• Driver's knee air bags
• Front seat belt retractor with pre-tensioner and
force-limiter function.
• Three-point rear seat belt with ELR/ALR (child ACC00056AB
seat fixing mechanism)

• Immobilizer function <High contrast meter>
COMFORTABLE EQUIPMENTS
M2000026000986
STEERING SYSTEM WITH TILT AND TEL-

ESCOPIC MECHANISMS
The tilt and telescopic mechanisms allow the driver
to adjust the steering wheel position precisely
depending on his/her wish and body size.
Multi-information display ACC00057AB
ELECTRIC TAIL GATE The multi-information display can display the follow-
Tail gate is adopted mechanism which opened and ing items: various warnings, odometer and trip meter,
closed automatically by electric according to the illumination control, service reminder information,
switch operation. The open movement automatically engine coolant temperature, remaining fuel amount,
by Tail Gate Open Switch. Tail gate is adopted cus- selector lever position, average and instantaneous
tomize function which manually opening or automati- fuel consumption, possible cruising distance, aver-
cally opening by OPEN SWITCH can be selected. age vehicle speed, and others. Displayed contents
(Refer to GROUP 42A − Electric Tail Gate P.42A-17) can be switched by operating the multi-information
meter switch. Also, the displayed language or unit on
KEYLESS OPERATION SYSTEM (KOS) the multi-information display can be changed from
The door entry function has been employed, that the function setting screen. (Refer to GROUP 54A −
enables the driver to lock or unlock all the doors Combination Meter P.54A-22)
(including tailgate) without taking the key out from
his/her pocket or bag by operating the lock/unlock AUDIO AND NAVIGATION SYSTEM
switches on the front door <Driver's side> or tailgate A NEW GENERATION WIDE 2-DIN CD
whenever the driver carries the keyless operation • A "Wide 2-DIN" size system has been
key with him/her. [Refer to GROUP 42B − Keyless adopted.
Operation System (KOS) P.42B-2] • Gloss black paint and silver decorations offer
premium image.
ONE-TOUCH START SYSTEM (OSS) • Supports USB/iPod control functions
For vehicles equipped with the keyless operation NEWLY DEVELOPED DISPLAY AUDIO
system (KOS), the push-type engine start switch has • Gloss black paint and silver decorations offer
been employed. [Refer to GROUP 42B − One-touch premium image.
Start System (OSS) P.42B-18] • Features 6.1 inch QVGA (Quarter Video
Graphics Array) full-colour display and touch
screen.
• Supports USB/iPod control functions
• Rear view camera image with reference lines
NEWLY DEVELOPED NAVIGATION − MITSUBISHI
MULTI COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (MMCS)

GENERAL 00-9
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
• SD card is used as data storage instead of The "dual zone A/C" mode allows separate stratifica-
HDD. tion control selections for the right and left outlets,
• High-definition display [VGA (Video Graphics depending on individual passenger's wishes (Refer
Array) instead of QVGA (Quarter Video to GROUP 55 − Heater, Air Conditioner and Ventila-
Graphics Array)] tion P.55-2).
• Dual display function such as navigation and
AV (Audio Visual)/Vehicle information, etc. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
• Supports USB/i-Pod control functions and SD M2000027000945
Mitsubishi Motors Corporation has given careful con-
audio files
sideration to protection of natural resources and the
environment. Environmentally friendly features are
A/C SYSTEM shown below.
There are two modes for the air conditioner system;
full auto A/C and newly developed dual zone A/C.
Classification Parts Name Features
Adoption of easy Bumper, Radiator grille, Instrument panel, Adoption of thermoplastic resin
recycling material Interior door trims
Expansion of recycled Bumper, Radiator grille, Instrument panel, Re-use of material discarded in plant
material Interior door trims
Sound absorbing materials in dash panel Re-use of discarded material in other
and headlining, Oil level gauge industry
Reduction of Fuel tank, Radiator, Heater core, Balance Adoption of lead free material
hazardous substances weight for wheel, Glass ceramics print,
Electrode position paint, bearing metal,
valve sheet
Discharge headlamp, combination meter, Adoption of mercury free material
Navigation system
MODELS
M2000001101514
VEHICLES FOR EUROPE

<2000>
Model code Seating Engine model Transmission model Fuel supply
capacity system
GF7W XNSXL6 5-persons 4J11 (1,998 mL) F5MBB (Front wheel MPI
SOHC MIVEC petrol drive 2WD, 5M/T)
XTXXL6 7-persons engine, Auto Stop & Go F1CJA (Front wheel
(AS&G) <Clear Tec drive 2WD, INVECS-III
XTHXL6 5-persons AS&G> CVT with sport mode)
XTHXZL6 W1CJA (Electronic
XTXXZL6 7-persons control 4WD, INVECS-III
CVT with sport mode)

00-10 GENERAL
<2200>
capacity system
GF6W XJHXR6 5-persons 4N14 (2,268 mL) F6MBA (Front wheel Electrical fuel
XJHXL6 DOHC Direct drive 2WD, 6M/T) injection
injection-diesel with (Direct
XJXXL6 7-persons intercooled turbocharger injection-Diesel
engine, Auto Stop & Go engine control
(AS&G) <Clear Tec system)
AS&G>
XLHFZL6 5-persons 4N14 (2,268 mL) W6AJA (Electronic
XLXFZL6 7-persons DOHC Direct control 4WD, INVECS-II
injection-diesel with 6A/T with sport mode)
XLXFZR6 intercooled turbocharger
engine
XJSXZL6 5-persons 4N14 (2,268 mL) W6MBA (Electronic
XJSXZR6 DOHC Direct control 4WD, 6M/T)
injection-diesel with
XJXXZL6 7-persons intercooled turbocharger
XJXXZR6 engine, Auto Stop & Go
(AS&G) <Clear Tec
AS&G>
VEHICLES FOR RUSSIA (EASTERN EUROPE COUNTRIES)

<2000>
capacity system
GF2W XTSHL6Z 5-persons 4B11 (1,998 mL) DOHC F1CJA (Front wheel MPI
MIVEC petrol engine drive 2WD, INVECS-III
XTSHZL6Z W1CJA (Electronic
control 4WD, INVECS-III
<2400>
capacity system
GF3W XTHHZL6Z 5-persons 4B12 (2,360 mL) DOHC W1CJA (Electronic MPI
MIVEC petrol engine control 4WD, INVECS-III
MODEL CODE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
ACB04331AB
No. Item Content

1 Development GF OUTLANDER

GENERAL 00-11
No. Item Content

2 Engine type 2 2.0L MPI (4B11) MIVEC
3 2.4L MPI (4B12) MIVEC
6 2.2L Diesel (4N14)
7 2.0L MPI (4J11) Smart MIVEC
3 Vehicle type W Station wagon
4 Body style X 4-door with tailgate
5 Transmission type J 6M/T
L 6A/T
N 5M/T
T CVT
6 Trim level (Price class) H Vehicles for Europe: H-line <5-seating>
Vehicles for Russia: INVITE <2000>, INSTYLE <2400>
S Vehicles for Europe: M-line
Vehicles for Russia: INFORM
X Vehicles for Europe: H-line <7-seating>
7 Engine specification F Intercooled turbocharger (DOHC)
H MIVEC (DOHC)
X Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) <Clear Tec AS&G>
8 Special feature None 2WD
Z 4WD
9 Steering wheel location L Left handle
R Right handle
10 Destination 6 Vehicles for Europe
6Z Vehicles for Russia

00-12 GENERAL
MAJOR SPECIFICATIONS
M2000030003278
VEHICLES FOR EUROPE
1 7 3 4 5 9
2 6
ACB04339AB
<2000>
Item GF7W
XNSXL6 XTXXL6
Vehicle Front track 1 1,540 1,540
dimension mm Overall width 2 1,800 1,800
Front overhang 3 955 955
Wheelbase 4 2,670 2,670
Rear overhang 5 1,030 1,030
Overall length 6 4,655 4,655
Ground clearance (unladen) 7 215 215
Overall height (unladen) 8 1,680 1,680
Rear track 9 1,540 1,540
Vehicle weight Kerb weight Without full optional parts 1,380 1,450
kg With full optional parts 1,469 1,534
Gross vehicle weight 1,985 2,170
Gross axle weight rating-front 1,150 1,150
Gross axle weight rating-rear 1,250 1,250
Gross combination weight 3,665 3,850
Seating capacity 5 7
Engine Model No. 4J11 4J11
Type SOHC MIVEC petrol SOHC MIVEC petrol
engine, Auto Stop & Go engine, Auto Stop & Go
Total displacement mL 1,998 1,998
Max. output <EEC> kW/rpm 110/6,000 110/6,000
Max. torque <EEC> N⋅m/rpm 195/4,100 − 4,200 195/4,100 − 4,200
Fuel system Fuel supply system MPI MPI
Transmission Model code F5MBB F1CJA
Type Front wheel drive 2WD, Front wheel drive 2WD,
5M/T INVECS-III CVT with
sport mode

GENERAL 00-13
Item GF7W
XNSXL6 XTXXL6
Turning radius Body 5.73 5.73
m Wheel 5.3 5.3
Item GF7W
XTHXL6 XTHXZL6
Wheelbase 4 2,670 2,670
Rear track 9 1,540 1,540
Engine Model No. 4J11 4J11
Type SOHC MIVEC petrol SOHC MIVEC petrol
engine, Auto Stop & Go engine, Auto Stop & Go
Transmission Model code F1CJA W1CJA
Type Front wheel drive 2WD, Electronic control 4WD,
INVECS-III CVT with INVECS-III CVT with
sport mode sport mode
m Wheel 5.3 5.3

00-14 GENERAL
Item GF7W
XTXXZL6
Vehicle Front track 1 1,540
dimension mm Overall width 2 1,800
Front overhang 3 955
Wheelbase 4 2,670
Rear overhang 5 1,030
Overall length 6 4,655
Ground clearance (unladen) 7 215
Overall height (unladen) 8 1,680
Rear track 9 1,540
Vehicle weight Kerb weight Without full optional parts 1,515
kg With full optional parts 1,599
Gross vehicle weight 2,170
Gross axle weight rating-front 1,150
Gross axle weight rating-rear 1,250
Gross combination weight 3,850
Seating capacity 7
Engine Model No. 4J11
Type SOHC MIVEC petrol
engine, Auto Stop & Go
Total displacement mL 1,998
Max. output <EEC> kW/rpm 110/6,000
Max. torque <EEC> N⋅m/rpm 195/4,100 − 4,200
Fuel system Fuel supply system MPI
Transmission Model code W1CJA
Type Electronic control 4WD,
INVECS-III CVT with
sport mode
Turning radius Body 5.73
m Wheel 5.3

GENERAL 00-15
<2200>
Item GF6W
XJHXL6/XJHXR6 XJXXL6
Wheelbase 4 2,670 2,670
Rear track 9 1,540 1,540
Engine Model No. 4N14 4N14
Type DOHC Direct DOHC Direct
injection-diesel with injection-diesel with
intercooled intercooled
turbocharger engine, turbocharger engine,
Auto Stop & Go Auto Stop & Go
Fuel system Fuel supply system Electrical fuel injection Electrical fuel injection
(Direct injection-Diesel (Direct injection-Diesel
engine control system) engine control system)
Transmission Model code F6MBA F6MBA
Type Front wheel drive 2WD, Front wheel drive 2WD,
6M/T 6M/T
m Wheel 5.3 5.3

00-16 GENERAL
Item GF6W
XLHFZL6 XLXFZL6/XLXFZR6
Wheelbase 4 2,670 2,670
Rear track 9 1,540 1,540
turbocharger engine turbocharger engine
Transmission Model code W6AJA W6AJA
Type Electronic control 4WD, Electronic control 4WD,
INVECS-II 6A/T with INVECS-II 6A/T with
m Wheel 5.3 5.3

GENERAL 00-17
Item GF6W
XJXXZL6/XJXXZR6 XJSXZL6/XJSXZR6
Wheelbase 4 2,670 2,670
Rear track 9 1,540 1,540
turbocharger engine, turbocharger engine,
Auto Stop & Go Auto Stop & Go
Transmission Model code W6MBA W6MBA
Type Electronic control 4WD, Electronic control 4WD,
6M/T 6M/T
m Wheel 5.3 5.3

00-18 GENERAL
Item GF6W
XJSXZL6/XJSXZR6
Wheelbase 4 2,670
Rear track 9 1,540
Seating capacity 5
Engine Model No. 4N14
Type DOHC Direct
injection-diesel with
intercooled
turbocharger engine,
Auto Stop & Go
Max. torque <EEC> N⋅m/rpm 380/2,000
Fuel system Fuel supply system Electrical fuel injection
(Direct injection-Diesel
engine control system)
Transmission Model code W6MBA
6M/T
m Wheel 5.3

GENERAL 00-19
VEHICLES FOR RUSSIA
1 7 3 4 5 9
2 6
ACB04339AB
<2000>
Item GF2W
XTSHL6Z XTSHZL6Z
Wheelbase 4 2,670 2,670
Rear track 9 1,540 1,540
Engine Model No. 4B11 4B11
Type DOHC MIVEC DOHC MIVEC
Max. torque <EEC> N⋅m/rpm 196/4,200 196/4,200
Transmission Model code F1CJA W1CJA
Type Front wheel drive 2WD, Electronic control 4WD,
INVECS-III CVT with INVECS-III CVT with
m Wheel 5.3 5.3

00-20 GENERAL
<2400>
Item GF3W
XTHHZL6Z
Wheelbase 4 2,670
Rear track 9 1,540
Seating capacity 5
Engine Model No. 4B12
Type DOHC MIVEC
Max. torque <EEC> N⋅m/rpm 222/4,100
Fuel system Fuel supply system MPI
Transmission Model code W1CJA
INVECS-III CVT with
sport mode
m Wheel 5.3

11-1
GROUP 11
ENGINE
MECHANICAL
CONTENTS
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . 11-2 BASE ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3

11-2 ENGINE MECHANICAL
GENERAL INFORMATION
GENERAL INFORMATION
M2112000102444
Two types of engines are available; 4B11 (1,998 cc) • Cylinder block made of an aluminium alloy
and 4B12 (2,360 cc). • Valve train with direct-acting valve tappets
These engines have adopted the following features: • Silent timing chain
• MIVEC (Mitsubishi Innovative Valve timing Elec- • Unit type balancer<4B12>
tronic Control system) for the intake valves
MAIN SPECIFICATIONS
Item Specification
Engine model 4B11 4B12
Total displacement cc 1,998 2,360
Bore × stroke mm 86 × 86 88 × 97
Compression ratio 10.0 10.5
Combustion chamber Pentroof type
Valve timing Intake opening 28° BTDC − 3° BTDC 40° BTDC − 0° BTDC
Intake closing 45° ABDC − 20° ABDC 64° ABDC − 24° ABDC
Exhaust opening BBDC 39° BBDC 39°
Exhaust closing ATDC 5° ATDC 5°
Maximum output (EEC net) kW / r/min 107 / 6,000 123 / 6,000
Maximum torque (EEC net) N⋅m / r/min 196 / 4,200 222 / 4,100
Fuel injection system Electronically controlled multipoint fuel injection
Ignition system Electronically controlled 4-coil

ENGINE MECHANICAL 11-3
BASE ENGINE
BASE ENGINE
M2112001002194
CYLINDER HEAD RELATION
Cylinder head cover
PCV valve
Front camshaft
bearing cap
Valve guide
Camshaft bearing cap
Cylinder head
Camshaft Camshaft position
bearing sensor
Valve seat
Cylinder head gasket
Oil feeder control valve Oil hole
Oil feeder control

valve filter
Water hole
Water hole
AKB00849 AB
1. CYLINDER HEAD COVER • The cylinder head is made of aluminium alloy,

• A Plastic cylinder head cover has been adopted. which is lightweight and has an excellent cooling
2. PCV VALVE efficiency. The intake and exhaust ports are
arranged in a cross-flow construction. Each cylin-
3. FRONT CAMSHAFT BEARING CAP
der has a pair of intake ports on one side and a
• On each camshaft, the thrust load is supported
pair of exhaust ports on the other side.
by No. 4 bearing. The No. 1 bearings for the
intake and exhaust camshafts have a common 9. CYLINDER HEAD GASKET
bearing cap. • A dual-layer, metal type cylinder head gasket that
excels in heat resistance and sealing perform-
4. CAMSHAFT BEARING CAP
ance has been adopted.
• Each of the intake and exhaust camshafts is sup-
ported by five bearings. 10.VALVE GUIDE
• Valve guides that are common to both the inlet
5. CAMSHAFT BEARING
and exhaust have been adopted.
6. OIL FEEDER CONTROL VALVE
11.VALVE SEAT
7. OIL FEEDER CONTROL VALVE FILTER • Sintered alloy valve seats have been adopted.
8. CYLINDER HEAD 12.CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR

BASE ENGINE
CYLINDER BLOCK
Crankshaft bearing cap

Cylinder block
Crankshaft oil seal
Ladder frame
AKB00850 AB
A cylinder block made of an aluminium alloy has Item 4B11 4B12

been adopted for weight reduction.
Five bearings are provided for the crankshaft jour- Overall height 230.1 240.1
nals and the No. 3 bearing sustains the thrust load of mm
the crankshaft. Bore mm 86 88
The water jacket is the full Siamese type. Bore pitch mm 96 96
1. CYLINDER BLOCK
Stroke mm 86 97
• The cylinder block is made of lightweight alumin-
ium alloy. 2. CRANKSHAFT BEARING CAP
The water jacket is of a full-seamless design. • The crankshaft journal is supported by four bear-
ings. The crankshaft thrust load is supported by
No. 3 bearing.
3. LADDERFRAME

BASE ENGINE
PISTON RELATION
Piston ring No.1 Piston ring No.2
Piston ring No.1

Piston
Piston pin
Maker mark
Connecting Piston ring No.2
rod <4B11>
Oil ring
<4B12>
Oil ring
Rail
Spacer
Connecting rod bearing
AKB00851AB
1. PISTON • The connecting rod is made of highly rigid, forged

• The pistons are made of a special aluminium carbon steel. The rod portion has an H-shaped
alloy. Their weight has been reduced by lowering cross section. The connecting rod big end bear-
their overall height and increasing the depression ing is lubricated through an oil passage running
at each end of the piston pin. The piston pin hole from the main journal to the crankshaft pin.
centre is offset 0.8 mm towards the thrust side of 4. PISTON RING
the piston centre. The skirt portion along the • Each piston is provided with No. 1 and No. 2
perimeter of the piston is finished with streaks compression rings and an oil ring.
that excel in oil retention and seizure resistance. 5. CONNECTING ROD BEARING
2. PISTON PIN • The upper and lower connecting rod bearing
• The piston pin is of a semi-floating type, press-fit- halves are identical. The connecting rod bearing
ted into the connecting rod small end while capa- is equipped with back metal. While the bearing
ble of floating relative to the piston. itself is made of aluminium alloy, the back metal
3. CONNECTING ROD is normally made of steel sheet. The connecting
rod bearing is narrower than the bearing cap, this
is to minimize wear.

BASE ENGINE
CRANKSHAFT RELATION
Adapter plate
Thrust bearing
Oil
Upper crankshaft groove
bearing
Drive plate
Crankshaft Crankshaft
Crankshaft sensing ring
sprocket
Crankshaft
pulley
Lower crankshaft
bearing
Balance weight
Crankshaft
sprocket
Crankshaft
Oil hole Balance weight
Balance weight
AKB00852 AB
1. CRANK SHAFT 4. CRANKSHAFT PULLEY

• A casted crankshaft is used for the crankshaft. • The crankshaft pulley is made of cast-iron and
The crankshaft consists of five main bearings and rubber. The pulley has grooves to engage with a
eight balance weights. The crankshaft pins are V-ribbed belt (six ribs), which drives an alternator
arranged at 180° intervals. The oil hole supplies and a water pump and an A/C compressor. An
lubrication oil from the journal to the crank pin. A ignition timing mark (notch) is stamped on the
crankshaft sprocket and an oil pump drive gear flange of the pulley. The crankshaft pulley is
shaft are shrink-fitted onto the front of the crank- equipped with a torsional damper to minimize the
shaft. torsional vibration of the crankshaft as well as
2. CRANKSHAFT BEARING substantially reduce noise and vibration at the
• The upper crankshaft bearing (with oil groove) is high speed range.
located on the cylinder block side while the lower 5. CRANKSHAFT SENSING RING
bearing (without oil groove) is held by the bearing The crankshaft is also fitted with a crankshaft
cap.The crankshaft bearing is equipped with back sensing ring.
metal. While the bearing itself is made of alumin-
6. DRIVE PLATE
ium alloy, the back metal is made of steel sheet.
• A cast iron ring gear is a shrink fit in the steel
3. THRUST BEARING plate of the drive plate. The drive plate is installed
• A thrust bearing is installed on both sides of the by tightening six bolts.
No. 3 crankshaft bearing.

BASE ENGINE
TIMING CHAIN RELATION
Inlet V.V.T. sprocket

Exhaust camshaft sprocket
Timing chain
Tensioner lever
assembly
Timing chain mark Timing mark

link plate (blue) Timing chain mark
link plate (blue)
Chain guide
Timing chain
tensioner V.V.T. sprocket
Camshaft sprocket timing mark
timing mark
Oil seal
Timing chain
case
Crankshaft sprocket
Timing mark
Timing chain mark
link plate (blue)
AKB00853 AB
1. OIL SEAL 4. TIMING CHAIN TENSIONER

• A front crankshaft oil seal is press-fit into the • The plunger in the timing chain tensioner directly
case. pushes the tension lever, and the pressure auto-
2. TIMING CHAIN CASE matically adjusts the timing chain tension. A cam
• The engine support bracket, the oil pump and the is provided to lock the plunger in place after the
relief valve are integrated as well as water cham- engine stops. This helps prevent the timing chain
ber of the water pump. from wobbling just after the engine starts. With
3. TIMING CHAIN the timing chain tensioner installed, do not crank
• The two camshafts are driven by the timing chain the engine in the reverse direction. This will force
via the respective sprockets. The timing chain, the plunger to overcome the cam, or even cause
consisting of 180 links, is an endless chain, con- other problems.
necting the crankshaft sprocket with the camshaft 5. TENSIOR LEVER ASSEMBLY
and V.V.T. sprockets. The timing chain is 6. CHAIN GUIDE ASSEMBLY
equipped with three mark link plates (blue) to cor- 7. CAMSHAFT SPROCKET EXHAUST
rectly time the two sprockets with each other. The 8. V.V.T. CAMSHAFT SPROCKET
timing chain is tensioned by the timing chain ten-
sioner, which has a built-in plunger with plunger
springs.

BASE ENGINE
VALVE RELATION
Valve tappet
Inlet camshaft
Valve spring
Exhaust camshaft
Valve stem seal

Inlet valve
Exhaust valve
AK502499 AJ
The valve mechanism is based on a 4-valve DOHC 3. VALVE

(Double Over Head Camshaft) design having the • The valves have heat-resistance. The entire
camshaft on the upper valve. Each cylinder has two valve surface is treated with nitriding.
intake valves and two exhaust valves, arranged in a 4. VALVE STEM SEAL
V-shape pattern. • The valve stem seals are integrated with the
Camshaft rotation is transmitted via valve tappets to valve spring seats.
the respective valves which open and close accord- • The valve stem seal portion excels in sealing per-
ingly. formance and is equipped with a spring to pre-
1. CAMSHAFT vent oil from descending.
2. VALVE TAPPET 5. VALVE SPRING
• Valve tappets are available in 47 thicknesses, at • The valve spring has a dual pitch spring to pre-
0.015 mm intervals between 3.000 mm and 3.690 vent surging in the high speed range.
mm, to ensure correct valve clearance.

BASE ENGINE
MIVEC (MITSUBISHI INNOVATIVE VALVE TIMING ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM)

RELATION
A
V.V.T. camshaft
sprocket (Inlet )
Oil feeder
control valve
Cylinder head
Oil feeder control
valve filter
Cylinder block
A
Section A-A
AKB00854AB
MIVEC (Mitsubishi Innovative Valve timing Electronic The intake valve timing is optimally controlled (con-
Control system) consists of the components illus- tinuously variable) under the changing driving condi-
trated above. tions to improve performance in the entire speed
range.
V.V.T. SPROCKET (VARIABLE VALVE TIMING SPROCKET)
Inlet V.V.T. sprocket
Timing mark Valve housing Stopper pin
Valve rotor
Advance oil Vance bushing
chamber
V.V.T. sprocket
bolt
Sprocket Retard oil chamber
AKB00855 AB
Oil from the oil feeder control valve is sent to the

V.V.T. sprocket, moving the vane rotor and thus regu-
lating the valve timing.

BASE ENGINE
CAMSHAFT
Cam position
sensing cam
Inlet camshaft
Advance
Retard oil channel
oil channel
Dowel pin
Hollow section Sealing cap
Exhaust camshaft
AK502506 AH
The lightweight camshaft is achieved by the hollow A cam position sensing ring is press-fitted onto the
design. rear portion of the intake camshaft.
Oil channels run through the intake camshaft,
through which oil is sent from the oil feeder control
valve to the V.V.T. sprocket.
OIL FEEDER CONTROL VALVE (OCV)
Insulation collar
Default Bobbin
Pressure pressure Shaft
Valve sleeve chamber chamber
Yoke
Terminal
Spring guide
Guide cap
Plunger
Spool Drain Drain Stator
Pump O-ring Enamelled copper wire
Bracket
AKB00856AB
The oil feeder control valve is essentially a solenoid

valve, regulated by the engine-ECU signals to feed
oil to the V.V.T. sprocket assembly to move the vane
rotor.

BASE ENGINE
BALANCER RELATION<4B12>
Crank shaft
sprocket
Balancer shaft
Counter balancer shaft module assembly
Balancer chain
guide Timing mark Balancer
link plate tensioner
lever
Crankshaft sprocket
Balancer timing timing mark
chain
Crank shaft
Balancer tensioner sprocket
lever
Balancer shaft module Balancer

Balancer timing assembly
chain tensioner chain guide
Balancer timing
Timing mark chain tensioner
link plate Balancer module
sprocket timing mark AKB00857 AB
1. BALANCER TIMING CHAIN 3. BALANCER TIMING CHAIN TENSIONER

• The balancer chain is a silent, endless type, con- 4. BALANCER CHAIN GUIDE
sisting of 72 links. It is installed around the bal- 5. BALANCER TENSIONER LEVER
ancer module sprocket and the crankshaft
6. BALANCER SHAFT MODULE ASSEMBLY
sprocket. Two mark link plates (orange and blue)
• The counter balancer shaft is located inside the
are installed on the balancer chain to locate the
oil pan to achieve a compact engine. The bal-
sprockets. When the balancer chain drives the
ancer shaft module assembly integrates an oil
balancer module sprocket, the balancer gear
pump and a balancer unit to realise a compact
causes the right and left balancer shafts to rotate.
and lightweight package. The balancer shaft
2. CRANKSHAFT SPROCKET module assembly cannot be disassembled.

NOTES

12-1
GROUP 12
ENGINE
LUBRICATION
CONTENTS
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . 12-2 OIL PASSAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3

12-2 ENGINE LUBRICATION
GENERAL INFORMATION
GENERAL INFORMATION
M2120000100465
The lubrication system is the full-flow, filter pumping After the oil is pumped to the individual crankshaft
system. journals, it passes through a passage in the crank-
The engine oil that accumulates in the oil pan is shaft and is fed to the pins. After the oil is pumped to
drawn and discharged by the oil pump. After its pres- the cylinder head, it flows to the camshaft journals
sure is regulated by the relief valve, the oil passes and the oil feeder control valves.
through the oil filter. Then, it flows from the oil pas-
sage in the cylinder block to the individual crankshaft
journals and the cylinder head.
LUBRICATION RELATION
Oil filler cap
Oil level gauge

Oil filter
Oil pump chain

guide
Oil pump tensioner lever
Crank shaft
sprocket Drain plug
Oil pump assembly

Oil pump sprocket
Oil pump chain

AKB00885 AB
1. OIL FILLER CAP NOTE: FIPG is the abbreviation for Formed-In-Place

2. OIL LEVEL GAUGE Gasket.
3. DRAIN PLUG 5. OIL FILTER
• The oil filter is installed on the left side of the cyl-
4. OIL PAN
inder block.
• The oil pan is made of sheet metal and contains
an oil sump in the forward area of the engine. 6. OIL PUMP <4B11>
FIPG (Formed-In-Place Gasket) is used to seal • The oil screen is integrated into the oil pump case
between the oil pan and the ladder frame. to be compact and lightweight.

ENGINE LUBRICATION 12-3
OIL PASSAGE
The oil pump case, which is installed to the bottom of Item Specification
the ladder flame, is driven by the oil pump chain
through the oil pump sprocket installed to the Displacement L/min(6,000 r/min.) 70
front of the oil pump case.
OIL PASSAGE
M2120000200741
Oil screen
Balancer shaft<4B12>
Relief valve Oil pump
Cylinder block
oil passage
Oil filter bracket
Oil filter
Cylinder block
Oil pressure switch oil passage
(main gallery)
Cylinder head
Oil feeder control valve oil passage Crankshaft journal
V.V.T. camshaft sprocket Camshaft journal Crankshaft pin
Oil pan
AK502548AE

NOTES

13-1
GROUP 13
FUEL
CONTENTS
MULTIPOINT FUEL INJECTION (MPI). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13A
FUEL SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13B

NOTES

13A-1
GROUP 13A
MULTIPOINT FUEL
INJECTION (MPI)
CONTENTS
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . 13A-2 ENGINE CONTROL RELAY

CONTROL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13A-36
CONTROL UNIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13A-5
FUEL PUMP RELAY CONTROL . . . . 13A-37
SENSOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13A-7
STARTER RELAY CONTROL . . . . . . 13A-38
ACTUATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13A-20
OXYGEN SENSOR HEATER
FUEL INJECTION CONTROL . . . . . . 13A-24 CONTROL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13A-39
IGNITION TIMING AND CONTROL A/C COMPRESSOR RELAY

FOR CURRENT CARRYING TIME . . 13A-30 CONTROL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13A-40
THROTTLE VALVE OPENING ANGLE ALTERNATOR CONTROL . . . . . . . . . 13A-41

CONTROL AND IDLE SPEED
CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13A-32 PURGE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13A-41
MIVEC (Mitsubishi Innovative Valve CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK

Timing Electronic Control (CAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13A-41
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13A-34
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM. . . . . . . . . . . . . 13A-41

13A-2 MULTIPOINT FUEL INJECTION (MPI)
GENERAL INFORMATION
GENERAL INFORMATION
M2132000102640
The following points of the 4B1 engine introduced to
the previous OUTLANDER have been changed:
Improvement / Additions Remark
The variable valve timing control (V.V.T.) system has Due to this, the exhaust oil control valve and the
been discontinued at the engine exhaust side. exhaust camshaft position sensor have been
discontinued.
An electric power steering has been adopted. Due to this, the power steering fluid pressure switch
terminal has been deleted from the engine-ECU.
The air flow sensor has been changed. The engine-ECU delivers a sensor reference voltage
to the air flow sensor.
The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve has been Weight saving due to simpler structure
discontinued.

MULTIPOINT FUEL INJECTION (MPI) 13A-3
GENERAL INFORMATION
System Block Diagram
Engine-ECU No.1 injector

Air flow sensor Barometric pressure sensor
No.2 injector
Intake air temperature sensor
Engine control unit No.3 injector
Manifold absolute pressure
sensor [1] Fuel injection control No.4 injector
Engine coolant temperature
sensor [2] Throttle valve opening control No.1 ignition coil
and idle speed control
Throttle position sensor (main)
No.2 ignition coil
[3] Ignition timing and control for
Throttle position sensor (sub) current carrying time
No.3 ignition coil
Accelerator pedal position
sensor (main) [4] MIVEC (Mitsubishi Innovative
Valve timing Electronic No.4 ignition coil
Control system)
Accelerator pedal position
sensor (sub) Throttle valve control servo
[5] Purge control
Crank angle sensor Oxygen sensor (front) heater
[6] Oxygen sensor heater
Inlet camshaft position sensor control
Oxygen sensor (rear) heater
Oxygen sensor (front)
[7] Engine control relay control
Inlet oil feeder control valve
Oxygen sensor (rear)
[8] Throttle valve control servo
relay control Purge control solenoid valve
Detonation sensor
Engine control relay
Alternator FR terminal [9] Fuel pump relay control
Alternator L terminal Throttle valve control servo relay

[10] Starter relay control
Ignition switch-IG Fuel pump relay

[11] A/C compressor relay control
Ignition switch-ST
Starter relay
[12] Alternator control
Oil pressure switch
A/C compressor relay
Power supply [13] Diagnostic output
Alternator G terminal
CAN communication
(input signal) [14] RAM data transmission
CAN communication
(output signal)
AKB00747AB

GENERAL INFORMATION
Control System Diagram
1 Air flow sensor Power supply Engine- 1 Injector Ignition coil

2 Intake air temperature Ignition switch-IG ECU 2 Inlet oil feeder Engine control relay
sensor Ignition switch-ST control valve Fuel pump relay
Barometric
3 Throttle position sensor Accelerator pedal pressure 3 Throttle valve control Starter relay
(main) position sensor servo Throttle valve control
4 Throttle position sensor sensor (main) 4 Purge control solenoid servo relay
(sub) Accelerator pedal valve A/C compressor relay
5 Manifold absolute position Alternator G terminal
pressure sensor sensor (sub) Oxygen sensor (front)
6 Inlet camshaft position Engine oil pressure heater
sensor switch Oxygen sensor (rear)
7 Engine coolant Alternator FR terminal heater
temperature sensor Alternator L terminal CAN communication
8 Detonation sensor CAN communication (input signal)
9 Crank angle sensor (input signal)
10 Oxygen sensor (front)
11 Oxygen sensor (rear)
3 Throttle position sensor (main)

4 Purge control solenoid valve 4 Throttle position sensor (sub)
3 Throttle valve control servo

Canister
5 Manifold absolute pressure
sensor
Air
1 Air flow sensor

2 Intake air
2 Inlet oil feeder control valve temperature
sensor
6 Inlet camshaft
position sensor
From fuel pump
1 Injector
7 Engine coolant
temperature sensor
Catalytic 8 Detonation sensor

converter
9 Crank angle sensor
Catalytic 11 Oxygen sensor (rear)

converter
10 Oxygen sensor (front)
AKB00748AB

CONTROL UNIT
CONTROL UNIT
M2132021500960
ENGINE-ECU
Engine-ECU
Microprocessor
Input Input Output Output

sensor interface interface actuator
RAM ROM
AK602218AD
Engine-ECU is installed in the engine room. Input /Output interface. Engine-ECU uses
Engine-ECU judges (calculates) the optimum control flash-memory ROM that allows re-writing of data so
to deal with the constant minute changes in driving that change and correction of control data is possible
conditions based on information input from the sen- using special tools. It also uses Electrically Erasable
sors and drives the actuator. Engine-ECU is com- Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM) so
posed of 32-bit microprocessor and Random Access that studied compensation data is not deleted even if
Memory (RAM), Read Only Memory (ROM) and battery terminals are disconnected.
ENGINE-ECU CONNECTOR INPUT/OUTPUT PIN ARRANGEMENT

71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
95
96
97
98
99
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
AK602565 AB
Terminal Terminal Terminal name Terminal Terminal Terminal name

No. code No. code
1 OCVI Inlet oil feeder control valve 2 INJ1 No. 1 injector
3 INJ2 No. 2 injector 4 CIL1 No. 1 ignition coil
5 CIL2 No. 2 ignition coil 6 NTSW Starter active signal
8 SGT Crank angle sensor 9 5V Sensor supplied voltage
10 TPSM Throttle position sensor 11 TPSS Throttle position sensor (sub)
(main)

CONTROL UNIT

No. code No. code
12 TPS5 Power supply voltage 13 TPSE Throttle position sensor earth
applied to throttle position
sensor
14 CPI Inlet camshaft position 15 ETV+ Throttle valve control servo (+)
sensor
16 ETV− Throttle valve control servo 18 INJ3 No. 3 injector
(−)
19 INJ4 No. 4 injector 20 CIL3 No. 3 ignition coil
21 CIL4 No. 4 ignition coil 24 SGTE Crank angle sensor earth
25 K/S Detonation sensor (+) 26 WTS Engine coolant temperature
sensor
27 WTSE Engine coolant temperature 30 CPIE Inlet camshaft position sensor
sensor earth earth
34 OHFL Oxygen sensor (front) heater 35 OHRL Oxygen sensor (rear) heater
36 OPSW Oil pressure switch 37 PURG Purge control solenoid valve
38 O2FL Oxygen sensor (front) 39 OFLE Oxygen sensor (front) offset
voltage
40 O2RL Oxygen sensor (rear) 41 ORLE Oxygen sensor (rear) offset
voltage
42 K/SE Detonation sensor (−) 44 MAP5 Power supply voltage applied
to manifold absolute pressure
sensor
45 MAP Manifold absolute pressure 46 MAPE Manifold absolute pressure
sensor sensor earth
60 ALTG Alternator G terminal 61 ALTF Alternator FR terminal
62 ALTL Alternator L terminal 71 RSG Throttle valve control servo
earth
72 RSB Power supply voltage 73 C/R Engine control relay
applied to throttle valve
control servo
74 APSM Accelerator pedal position 75 APS5 Power supply voltage applied
sensor (main) to accelerator pedal position
sensor (main)
76 APSE Accelerator pedal position 77 APSS Accelerator pedal position
sensor (main) earth sensor (sub)
78 5VV Power supply voltage 79 EV Accelerator pedal position
applied to accelerator pedal sensor (sub) earth
position sensor (sub)
81 GNDE Engine-ECU earth 82 BAT1 Power source
83 RSH Throttle valve control servo 84 C/RL Throttle valve control servo
earth relay
87 AFS Air flow sensor 88 AFSE Air flow sensor earth
89 ATS Intake air temperature 90 CANH CAN interface (high)
sensor

SENSOR

No. code No. code
91 CANL CAN interface (low) 92 IGN Ignition switch-IG
93 GNDE Engine-ECU earth 96 FP/R Fuel pump relay
97 AFS5 Air flow sensor reference 102 AC/R A/C compressor relay
voltage
103 FMB Flash EP-ROM data 104 BACK Backup power source
rewriting power source
105 ST Ignition switch-ST 106 STRL Starter relay
108 BRK Brake switch
SENSOR
M2132001001472
AIR FLOW SENSOR constant temperature to the intake air temperature.

When the air mass flow rate increases, the air flow
Silicon substrate speed is higher and also the amount of heat transfer
from the heat sensing resistor to the air increased.
Therefore, the air flow sensor increases the amount
Sensing area
Heat sensing of electric current to the heat sensing resistor. Thus,
resistor the amount of electric current increases in accord-
Intake air ance with the air mass flow rate. The air flow sensor
IN measures the air mass flow rate by detecting the
amount of electric current. The air flow sensor ampli-
OUT Diaphragm fies the detected electric current amount and outputs
AKB00749AB
it into the engine-ECU. Engine-ECU uses this output
Air flow sensor is installed in the air intake hose. Air current and engine speed to calculate and decide
flow sensor is composed of an extremely small heat- basic fuel injection time. Sensor properties are as
sensing resistor. The air flow sensor controls the shown in the figure.
amount of electric current flowing into the heat sens-
ing resistor to keep the heat sensing resistor at a
From engine control relay
Output current (mA)

5V
Mass flow (g/s)
Air flow sensor Engine-ECU
AKB00757AB

SENSOR
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR Intake air temperature sensor is built in to the air flow
sensor. Intake air temperature sensor detects intake
air temperature through thermistor's resistance
change and outputs the voltage according to intake
air temperature to engine-ECU. Engine-ECU uses
this output voltage to compensate fuel injection con-
trol and ignition timing control. Sensor properties are
as shown in the figure.
Sensory part
(thermistor) AKB00750 AB
Engine-ECU Output voltage (V)

Intake air temperature 5V
sensor (thermistor)
Resistance (kΩ)
Intake air Intake air

temperature (˚C) temperature (˚C)
AK602207AN
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE The manifold absolute pressure sensor is installed in

SENSOR the inlet manifold. Manifold absolute pressure sensor
uses a piezo resistive semiconductor to output the
Manifold absolute voltage according to manifold absolute pressure to
pressure sensor engine-ECU. Engine-ECU uses this output voltage to
compensate fuel injection volume according to mani-
fold absolute pressure. Sensor properties are as
shown in the figure.
Pressure AKC00061AB

SENSOR
Output voltage (V)
Manifold absolute Engine-ECU

pressure sensor
Power source 5V
5V
Output signal
Earth
0 101
Pressure (kPa)
AK602206AF
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE The engine coolant temperature sensor is installed in

SENSOR the thermostat housing. Engine coolant temperature
sensor uses thermistor's resistance change to detect
coolant temperature and output the voltage accord-
ing to coolant temperature to engine-ECU.
Engine-ECU uses this output voltage to appropriately
control fuel injection volume, idle speed and ignition
timing when the engine is cold. Sensor properties are
as shown in the figure.
Sensory part
(thermistor)
AK602255AB
Engine-ECU Output voltage (V)

Engine coolant
temperature sensor 5V
(thermistor)
Resistance (kΩ)
Engine coolant Engine coolant

temperature (˚C) temperature (˚C)
AK602208AK

SENSOR
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR STRUCTURE AND SYSTEM

Throttle position sensor is composed of a permanent
Throttle body magnet fixed on the throttle shaft, Hall IC that outputs
voltage according to magnetic flux density and a sta-
tor that efficiently introduces magnetic flux from the
permanent magnet to Hall IC.
Magnetic flux density at Hall IC is proportional to the
output voltage.
Throttle
position Throttle position sensor has 2 output systems − throt-
sensor tle position sensor (main) and throttle position sensor
(sub), and the output voltage is output to
engine-ECU. When throttle valve turns, output volt-
AKC00062AB age of throttle position sensor (main) and throttle
The throttle position sensor is installed in the throttle position sensor (sub) changes. This allows
body. Throttle position sensor outputs voltage to engine-ECU to detect actual throttle opening angle.
engine-ECU based on the throttle shaft rotation Engine-ECU uses this output voltage for throttle
angle. Engine-ECU uses this signal to detect the valve control servo feedback control. The relation-
throttle valve opening angle to perform throttle valve ship between throttle opening angle and output volt-
control servo feedback control. This throttle position age of the throttle position sensor (main) and throttle
sensor uses Hall IC and is a non-contact type. position sensor (sub) is as shown in the figure below.
Throttle position sensor

Throttle position Throttle position
sensor (main) sensor (sub)
Hall IC Hall IC
Output voltage (V)

5
Throttle position
4.5 sensor (main)
2.5
Throttle position
sensor (sub)
0.5
5V 5V 0
Throttle valve opening angle
Fully Fully
Engine-ECU closed opened
AK602222AG

SENSOR
When abnormality is detected
Restrict or shut off

the operating
Throttle valve
control servo
Main
Throttle
position Fuel cut
sensor
Sub Engine-ECU Injector
Sub
Accelerator
pedal position
sensor
Main
AKB00593 AB
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION

Engine-ECU compares output voltage of the throttle SENSOR
position sensor (main) and throttle position sensor
(sub) to check for abnormality in the throttle position
sensor. If the engine-ECU detects the abnormality,
the emergency should be prevented by performing
the fuel-safe control. Accelerator pedal position
• When 1-system malfunctions sensor connector
The engine ECU should perform the throttle valve
position control by only using the signal hav-
ing no malfunctions. Depressing the accelera-
tor pedal half way can perform the control.
Performing the fuel cut can increase the
engine rotation speed. Accelerator pedal arm
• When 2-system malfunctions
The engine ECU should cut the energization of
the throttle valve control servo. At that time,
the spring built in the throttle valve can slightly
open the throttle valve. This allows the engine
ECU to control the engine output.
AK602569AB

SENSOR
Accelerator pedal position sensor is integrated with Magnetic flux density at Hall IC is proportional to the
accelerator pedal, and detects accelerator opening output voltage.
angle. Engine-ECU uses the output voltage of this The accelerator pedal position sensor has 2 output
sensor to control appropriate throttle valve opening systems − accelerator pedal position sensor (main)
angle and fuel injection volume. This accelerator and accelerator pedal position sensor (sub), and the
pedal position sensor uses Hall IC and is a non-con- output voltage is output to engine-ECU. According to
tact type. depression of the accelerator pedal, output voltage
of the accelerator pedal position sensor (main) and
STRUCTURE AND SYSTEM accelerator pedal position sensor (sub) changes.
This allows engine-ECU to detect the actual acceler-
ator pedal depression amount. Engine-ECU uses
Magnet
accelerator pedal position sensor (main) output volt-
Hall IC age for appropriate throttle valve opening angle con-
trol and fuel injection volume control. Also,
engine-ECU compares output voltage of the acceler-
ator pedal position sensor (main) and accelerator
pedal position sensor (sub) to check for abnormality
Pedal shaft in sensor. The relationship between accelerator
opening angle and output voltage of the accelerator
AK602570AB pedal position sensor (main) and accelerator pedal
Accelerator pedal position sensor is composed of a position sensor (sub) is as shown in the figure below.
permanent magnet fixed on the magnet carrier of the
pedal shaft, Hall IC outputs voltage according to
magnetic flux density and a stator that efficiently
introduces magnetic flux from the permanent magnet
to Hall IC.
Accelerator pedal position sensor
Accelerator pedal Accelerator pedal

position sensor (main) position sensor (sub)
Hall IC Hall IC
Output voltage (V)

Accelerator pedal
5 position sensor (main)
2
Accelerator pedal
1 position sensor (sub)
5V 5V
0
Accelerator Full throttle
Engine-ECU point
pedal stroke
AK602211AD

SENSOR
When abnormality is detected
Restrict or shut off

the operating
Throttle valve
control servo
Main
Throttle
position Fuel cut
sensor
Sub Engine-ECU Injector
Sub
Accelerator
pedal position
sensor
Main
AKB00595 AB
OXYGEN SENSOR
Engine-ECU compares output voltage of the acceler-
Front Rear
ator pedal position sensor (main) and accelerator
pedal position sensor (sub) to check for abnormality
in sensor. If the engine-ECU detects the abnormality,
the emergency should be prevented by performing
Sensing Sensing
the fuel-safe control. area area
• When 1-system malfunctions
The engine-ECU should detect the amount of
accelerator pedal depressed by only using the
signal having no malfunctions. Depressing
AKB00751AB
the accelerator pedal half way can perform
the control. Performing the fuel cut can The oxygen sensor (front) is installed in the exhaust
increase the engine rotation speed. manifold. The oxygen sensor (rear) is installed in the
• When 2-system malfunctions exhaust front pipe.
The engine-ECU should cut the energization of Oxygen sensor has a built-in heater to help early
the throttle valve control servo. At that time, activation of the sensor. This allows feedback control
the spring built in the throttle valve can slightly of air-fuel ratio soon after engine start.
open the throttle valve. This allows the
engine-ECU to control the engine output. This sensor uses the oxygen concentration cell prin-
ciple of solid electrolyte (zirconia) and displays the
property of sudden change in output voltage near
theoretical air-fuel ratio. This property is used to
detect oxygen density in exhaust gas. Feedback to
engine-ECU allows it to judge whether air-fuel ratio is
rich or lean compared to theoretical air-fuel ratio.
This allows engine-ECU precise feedback control to
get theoretical air-fuel ratio with best cleaning effi-
ciency of 3-way catalytic converter.

SENSOR
Oxygen sensor
Heater
Engine-ECU
Zirconia element
0.5V
AK602576AB
CRANK ANGLE SENSOR

(36 teeth including 3 missing teeth)
Magnet flux
Crank angle Vane

sensor
Magnetic resistance element
AK602737AE Crankshaft sensing ring
A crank angle sensor is installed on the exhaust side

of the cylinder block. The crank angle sensor moni- Magnet flux
tors rotation of crankshaft sensing ring (36 teeth
including 3 missing teeth) installed on the crankshaft Vane
and converts to voltage (pulse signal) that is output
to engine-ECU. Engine-ECU uses crank angle sen-
sor's output pulse to detect crankshaft position.
AK602265AD
The crank angle sensor uses a magnetic resistance

element. When the vane of the crankshaft-sensing
ring passes the front surface of the magnetic resist-
ance element, the flux from the magnet passes the
magnetic resistance element. Thus, resistance of the
magnetic resistance element increases. When the
vane of the crankshaft-sensing ring does not pass
the front surface of the magnetic resistance element,

SENSOR
the flux from the magnet does not pass the magnetic
resistance element and the resistance decreases.
The crank angle sensor converts this change in
resistance of the magnetic resistance element to a 5
V pulse signal and outputs it to engine-ECU.
Engine-ECU
Crank angle sensor
5V
5V
Output signal
AK602285AB
INLET CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR

Camshaft position sensing portion
Camshaft position sensor
Magnet flux
Sensing portion
Camshaft
AK602738AB Camshaft position sensing portion

Magnet flux
The inlet camshaft position sensor is installed on the
inlet side of the cylinder head. The inlet camshaft
position sensor monitors shape of the half-moon
sensing portion and converts to voltage (pulse sig-
nal) that is output to engine-ECU. Upon receiving this
output voltage, the engine-ECU effects feedback
control to optimize the phase of the inlet camshaft.
Also, engine-ECU uses a combination of the cam-
shaft position sensor output pulse signal and crank- Magnetic resistance element
shaft position sensor output pulse signal to identify AK602574AE
cylinders in the compression process. The inlet camshaft position sensor uses a magnetic
resistance element. When the camshaft position
sensing portion passes the front surface of the mag-
netic resistance element, the flux from the magnet
passes the magnetic resistance element. Thus,
resistance of the magnetic resistance element
increases. When the camshaft position sensing por-
tion does not pass the front surface of the magnetic
resistance element, the flux from the magnet does

SENSOR
not pass the magnetic resistance element and the

resistance decreases. The inlet camshaft position
sensor converts this change in resistance of the
magnetic resistance element to a 5 V pulse signal
and outputs it to engine-ECU.
Engine-ECU
Camshaft position sensor
5V
5V
Output signal
AK602287AB
A detonation sensor is installed on the inlet side of

the cylinder block. Detonation sensor uses the piezo-
DETONATION SENSOR electric element to convert the vibration of the cylin-
der block generated when engine is in operation to
minute voltage that is output to engine-ECU.
Engine-ECU uses the minute output voltage from the
detonation sensor filtered through the cylinder
block's natural frequency to detect knocking, and
compensates the ignition timing lag according to the
strength of the knocking.
Piezoelectric element
AK604903AC
Engine-ECU
5V
Detonation sensor
Piezoelectric element
AK602226AC

SENSOR
BAROMETRIC PRESSURE SENSOR OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
Barometric pressure sensor

(built in engine-ECU)
Oil
pressure
Contact switch
AK602575AB AK602587AB
A barometric pressure sensor is built into The oil pressure switch is installed on the inlet side of
engine-ECU. The barometric pressure sensor is a the cylinder block. The oil pressure switch detects
semiconductor diffused pressure element which out- whether the oil pressure is high or low using the con-
puts voltage to engine-ECU according to atmos- tact switch. When the oil pressure becomes higher
pheric pressure. Engine-ECU uses this output than the specified value after the engine starts, the
voltage to sense the altitude of the vehicle and com- contact point of the oil pressure switch opens.
pensates fuel injection volume to achieve the appro- This allows the engine-ECU to detect the oil pressure
priate air-fuel ratio for that altitude. is higher than the specified value. The engine-ECU
outputs the OFF signal to the combination meter
through the CAN and then turns off the oil pressure
warning lamp.
Engine-ECU
Engine-ECU Operating pressure

terminal voltage (V)
Oil pressure: high
OFF
12
Oil pressure:low
ON
0
Oil pressure switch Oil pressure (kPa)

ON
OFF
AK602228 AF
ALTERNATOR FR TERMINAL duty) is output from alternator FR terminal to

Alternator turns ON/OFF the power transistor in the engine-ECU. Engine-ECU uses this signal to detect
voltage regulator to adjust current flow in the field coil alternator output current and drives throttle valve
according to alternator output current. In this way control servo according to output current (electric
alternator output voltage is kept adjusted (to about load). This prevents change in idle speed due to
14.4 V). The ratio of power transistor ON time (ON electric load and helps maintain stable idle speed.

SENSOR
Battery
B S
Engine-ECU
FR
Field coil
Voltage regulator
Alternator
AK604998AB
ALTERNATOR L TERMINAL tion diode. After the electric generation begins, the
After turning on the ignition switch, the current is current is supplied to the field coil from this circuit. In
input by the engine-ECU to the alternator L terminal. addition, the generated voltage is output from the
This allows the voltage regulator to be on and the alternator L terminal to the engine-ECU. This allows
field coil to be excited. When the alternator rotates in the engine-ECU to detect that the electric generation
this situation, the voltage is excited in the stator coil begins. The engine-ECU outputs the ON signal to
and the current is output from B-terminal through the the combination meter through the CAN and then
commutation diode. Also the generated voltage is turns off the charge lamp.
input to the voltage regulator through the commuta-

SENSOR
Battery
B S Engine-ECU
CAN
communication
Field coil Charge

warning
lamp
Combination meter
Voltage regulator
Alternator
AK604999 AB

ACTUATOR
ACTUATOR
M2132002001129
INJECTOR An injector is an injection nozzle with the electromag-

netic valve that injects fuel based on the injection sig-
Fuel nal sent by engine-ECU. 1 injector is installed in the
inlet manifold of each cylinder and fixed to the deliv-
ery pipe. When electricity flows through the solenoid
Connector
coil, the needle gets sucked in. The needle gets
pulled till the fully open position so that the injection
hole is fully open and the fuel gets injected.
Filter
Solenoid coil
Needle
Plate
AK800561 AE

ACTUATOR
From battery
Engine control relay

ON
OFF
No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4
Injectors
Engine-ECU
AKB00844 AB
Voltage from the battery gets applied from the injec- A throttle valve control servo is installed in throttle
tor relay to the injector and up to the engine-ECU. body. The throttle valve control servo performs the
Engine-ECU turns ON its power transistor and pre- Open/Close of the throttle valve through the reduc-
pares the injector's earth circuit. Thus, current flows tion gear. Engine-ECU changes current direction
through the injector while power transistor is ON and according to the Open/Close direction and also
the injector injects fuel. changes current to the motor coil to control the throt-
tle valve control servo.
THROTTLE VALVE CONTROL SERVO Throttle valve control servo is composed of a good
response, low energy, and small DC motor with
Throttle body brush and can generate rotation force corresponding
to the current applied on the coil. When there is no
current passing through the throttle valve control
servo, the throttle valve remains at a prescribed
opening angle. So, even if current stops because of
a fault in the system, a minimum level of running
remains possible.
Throttle valve control servo AKC00062AC

ACTUATOR
From battery
Throttle valve Engine control relay

control servo ON
OFF
To engine-ECU
Throttle valve
ON control servo relay
OFF
Power source Engine-ECU
AK602231 AF
IGNITION COIL The inlet oil feeder control valve is installed on the
Refer to GROUP 16 − Ignition System − Ignition Coil inlet side of the cylinder head. Receiving the duty
P.16-2. signal from the engine-ECU, the inlet oil feeder con-
trol valve operates the spool valve position and
PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE divides the oil pressure from the cylinder block into
the advanced chamber and the retarded chamber of
Refer to GROUP 17 − Emission Control <MPI> −
the V.V.T. sprocket as well as continually changes
Evaporative Emission Control System P.17-16.
the inlet camshaft phase. The spring makes spool
valve stop at the position where the inlet camshaft is
INLET OIL FEEDER CONTROL VALVE at the most retarded angle when the engine is
stopped. The engine-ECU operates the spool valve
Spool valve movement position by increasing and decreasing ON duty ratio
of the inlet oil feeder control valve and allows the
Advance Retard inlet camshaft to be at the target phase angle. When
chamber chamber the duty ratio increases, the V.V.T. sprocket makes
Spring phase of inlet camshaft advanced angle side. When
the duty ratio degreases, the V.V.T. sprocket makes
phase of inlet camshaft retarded angle side. When
the medium duty ratio, at which the spool valve is at
the medium position, is achieved, all the oil passages
Coil Plunger
are closed. This allows the phase angle to be kept
Drain Drain constant. The engine-ECU changes and controls the
Oil pressure AK604740AE duty ratio in accordance with the engine operation to
get the optimum phase angle.

ACTUATOR

Engine-ECU
Inlet oil feeder

control valve
AK700721 AB
ALTERNATOR G TERMINAL adjusted to about 14.4 V. When alternator output

Engine-ECU uses ON/OFF of alternator G terminal voltage is about 14.4 V, alternator outputs current to
to control alternator output voltage. When the power produce electricity. In case electric load is generated
transistor in the engine-ECU turns ON, output volt- suddenly, engine-ECU controls alternator G termi-
age gets adjusted to about 12.8 V. When alternator nal's On-duty to limit the sudden increase in alterna-
output voltage drops to 12.8 V it becomes lower than tor load due to generation and thus prevents change
voltage of the charged battery and almost no current in idle speed.
is output from the alternator. When the power transis-
tor in the engine-ECU turns OFF, output voltage gets

FUEL INJECTION CONTROL
Battery
B S
Engine-ECU
Field coil
Voltage regulator
Alternator
AK605000 AB

M2132003001876
Fuel injection volume is regulated to obtain the opti- intake air volume. Engine-ECU adds prescribed
mum air-fuel ratio in accordance with the constant compensations to this basic drive time according to
minute changes in engine driving conditions. Fuel conditions such as the intake air temperature and
injection volume is controlled by injector drive time engine coolant temperature to decide injection time.
(injection time). There is a prescribed basic drive Fuel injection is done separately for each cylinder
time that varies according to the engine speed and and is done once in two engine rotations.

System Configuration Diagram
Air flow sensor

Manifold absolute
pressure sensor
Barometric pressure sensor
Engine coolant
temperature sensor
Injector
Engine- Throttle position sensor
ECU Accelerator pedal position sensor
Detonation sensor
Inlet camshaft position sensor
Crank angle sensor
Ignition switch-ST
Oxygen sensor
Vehicle speed signal (CAN)
AKB00752AB
1. INJECTOR ACTUATION (FUEL INJEC-

TION) TIMING
Injector drive time in case of multipoint fuel injection
(MPI) is controlled as follows according to driving
conditions.

Fuel Injection During Cranking and Normal Operation
<No. 2 TDC> <No.1 TDC> <No. 3 TDC> <No. 4 TDC> <No. 2 TDC>
Crank angle H
sensor signal L
Inlet camshaft H
position sensor
signal L
Cylinder stroke : Fuel injection
No. 1 Cylinder Compression Combustion Exhaust Intake

No. 3 Cylinder Intake Compression Combustion Exhaust
No. 4 Cylinder Exhaust Intake Compression Combustion
No. 2 Cylinder Combustion Exhaust Intake Compression
AKB00753 AB
Fuel injection to each cylinder is done by driving the

injector at optimum timing while it is in exhaust proc-
ess based on the crankshaft position sensor signal.
Engine-ECU compares the crankshaft position sen-
sor output pulse signal and inlet camshaft position
sensor output pulse signal to identify the cylinder.
Using this as a base, it performs sequential injection
in the sequence of cylinders 1, 3, 4, 2.
Additional Fuel Injection During Acceleration

Crank angle H
sensor signal
L
Increase injection for acceleration
Cylinder stroke

AK704439 AB
In addition to the synchronizing fuel injection with tion, the volume of fuel is injected according to the
crankshaft position sensor signal during accelera- extent of the acceleration.

signal (engine rotation signal). This basic drive time

2. Fuel injection volume (injector drive is compensated according to signals from various
sensors and optimum injector drive time (fuel injec-
time) control
tion volume) is calculated according to driving condi-
Under normal operating conditions, the figure shows tions.
the flow chart of calculating the injection amount dur-
ing the injector driving time. Basic drive time is
decided based on the air flow sensor signal (intake
air volume signal) and crankshaft position sensor

Fuel Injection Volume Control Block Diagram (Normal Operation)
Air fuel ratio

compensation
(Predetermined
Air flow sensor compensation)
Basic fuel
injection time
determination
Crank angle sensor
Oxygen sensor
feedback
compensation
Oxygen sensor
Engine coolant
Engine coolant
temperature sensor temperature
compensation
Acceleration-
deceleration
compensation
Barometric pressure
sensor
Fuel pressure
compensation
Manifold absolute
pressure sensor
Battery voltage Battery voltage

compensation
Injector
AK602278AB
[Injector basic drive time] the pressure difference (injected fuel pressure)
Fuel injection is performed once per cycle for each between manifold pressure and fuel pressure (con-
cylinder. Basic drive time refers to fuel injection vol- stant). So, injected fuel pressure compensation is
ume (injector drive time) to achieve theoretical made to injector drive time for theoretical air-fuel
air-fuel ratio for the intake air volume of 1 cycle of 1 ratio to arrive at basic drive time.
cylinder. Fuel injection volume changes according to
Basic fuel Intake air amount per cycle per cylinder

Fuel injection pressure compensation
injection time Theoretical air-fuel ratio
AK602279AB

Intake air volume of each cycle of 1 cylinder is calcu- [Injector drive time compensation]
lated by engine-ECU based on the airflow sensor After calculating the injector basic drive time, the
signal and crank angle sensor signal. Also, during engine-ECU makes the following compensations to
engine start, the map value prescribed by the coolant control the optimum fuel injection volume according
temperature sensor signal is used as basic drive to driving conditions.
time.
List of main compensations for fuel injection control

Compensations Content
Oxygen sensor feedback compensation The Oxygen sensor signal is used for making the
compensation to get air-fuel ratio with best cleaning
efficiency of the 3-way catalytic converter. This
compensation might not be made sometimes in
order to improve drivability, depending on driving
conditions. (Air-fuel ratio compensation is made.)
The engine-ECU compensates the output signal of
the oxygen sensor (front) using the output signal of
the oxygen sensor (rear). This allows the deviation
of the output signal, caused by the deterioration of
the oxygen sensor (front), to be solved, then the
highly accurate exhaust gas control is performed.
Air-fuel ratio compensation Under driving conditions where oxygen sensor
feedback compensation is not performed,
compensation is made based on pre-set map
values that vary according to engine speed and
intake air volume.
Engine coolant temperature compensation Compensation is made according to the engine
coolant temperature. The lower the engine coolant
temperature, the greater the fuel injection volume.
Acceleration/ Deceleration compensation Compensation is made according to change in
intake air volume. During acceleration, fuel injection
volume is increased. Also, during deceleration, fuel
injection volume is decreased.
Fuel injection compensation Compensation is made according to the pressure
difference between atmospheric pressure and
manifold absolute pressure. The greater the
difference in pressure, the shorter the injector drive
time.
Battery voltage compensation Compensation is made depending on battery
voltage. The lower the battery voltage, the greater
the injector drive signal time.
Learning value for fuel compensation Compensation amount is learned to compensate
feedback of oxygen sensor. This allows system to
compensate in accordance with engine
characteristics.
[Fuel limit control during deceleration] [Fuel-cut control when over-run]
Engine-ECU limits fuel when decelerating downhill to When engine speed exceeds a prescribed limit
prevent excessive rise of catalytic converter temper- (6,600 r/min), engine-ECU cuts fuel supply to pre-
ature and to improve fuel efficiency. vent overrunning and thus protect the engine.

IGNITION TIMING AND CONTROL FOR CURRENT CARRYING TIME
IGNITION TIMING AND CONTROL FOR CURRENT

CARRYING TIME
M2132027100573
Ignition timing is pre-set according to engine driving
conditions. Compensations are made according to
pre-set values depending on conditions such as
engine coolant temperature, battery voltage etc. to
decide optimum ignition timing. Primary current con-
nect/disconnect signal is sent to the power transistor
to control ignition timing. Ignition is done in sequence
of cylinders 1, 3, 4, 2.

Engine control relay Battery
Air flow sensor
Manifold absolute
pressure sensor
Engine coolant
temperature sensor
Engine-
ECU Inlet camshaft position sensor
Crank angle sensor

Ignition coil
Detonation sensor
Ignition switch-ST
Spark plug
Cylinder No. 1 2 3 4
AK502722 AN
1. Ignition power control

Based on the crankshaft position sensor signal and
camshaft position sensor signal, engine-ECU
decides the ignition cylinder, calculates the ignition
timing and sends the ignition coil primary current
connect/disconnect signal to the power transistor of
each cylinder in the ignition sequence.

IGNITION TIMING AND CONTROL FOR CURRENT CARRYING TIME
Crank angle H
sensor signal L
Inlet camshaft H
position sensor
signal L
Cylinder stroke Ignition

AK604969AC
2. Spark-advance control and current car- [During normal operation]

rying time control After determining the basic spark-advance based on
the intake air volume and engine speed, engine-ECU
[During start]
makes compensations based on input from various
Engine-ECU initiates ignition at fixed ignition timing sensors to control the optimum spark-advance and
(5° BTDC) synchronized with the crankshaft position current carrying time.
sensor signal.
List of main compensations for spark-advance control and current carrying time control
Intake air temperature compensation Compensation is made according to intake air
temperature. The higher the intake air temperature
the greater the delay in ignition timing.
Engine coolant temperature compensation Compensation is made according to engine coolant
temperature. The lower the engine coolant
temperature the greater the advance in ignition
timing.
Knocking compensation Compensation is made according to generation of
knocking. The greater the knocking the greater the
delay in ignition timing.
Stable idle compensation Compensation is made according to change in idle
speed. In case engine speed becomes lower than
target speed, ignition timing is advanced.
Delay compensation when changing shift During change of shift, sparking is delayed
compared to normal ignition timing to reduce
engine output torque and absorb the shock of the
shift change.

THROTTLE VALVE OPENING ANGLE CONTROL AND IDLE SPEED CONTROL
Battery voltage compensation Compensation is made depending on battery
voltage. The lower the battery voltage the greater
the current carrying time and when battery voltage
is high current carrying time is shortened.
[Control for checking ignition timing]

During basic ignition timing set mode for M.U.T.-III
actuator test function, sparking is done with fixed
ignition timing (5° BTDC) synchronized with crank-
shaft position sensor signal.
THROTTLE VALVE OPENING ANGLE CONTROL AND IDLE

SPEED CONTROL
M2132003501053
Engine-ECU detects the amount of accelerator pedal
depression (as per operator's intention) through the
accelerator pedal position sensor. Based on pre-set
basic target opening angles it adds various compen-
sations and controls the throttle valve opening angle
according to the target opening angle.
Motor drive power source
(From throttle valve control
servo relay)
Throttle valve Engine coolant

control servo Motor drive circuit temperature sensor
Intake air temperature
Throttle sensor
Main
position
sensor Crank angle sensor
Sub A/C switch (CAN)
Control unit A/C load signal (CAN)
Accelerator Sub Alternator FR terminal

pedal position
sensor Inhibitor switch (CAN)
Main
Barometric pressure
sensor
Engine-ECU
AK602236AQ
While starting mum for starting.

Engine-ECU adds various compensations to the tar-
get opening angle that are set based on the engine
coolant temperature, so that the air volume is opti-

THROTTLE VALVE OPENING ANGLE CONTROL AND IDLE SPEED CONTROL
While idling While driving

Engine-ECU controls the throttle valve to achieve the Compensations are made to the target opening
target opening angle that are set based on the angle set according to the accelerator pedal opening
engine coolant temperature. In this way best idle angle and engine speed to control the throttle valve
operation is achieved when engine is cold and when opening angle.
it is hot. Also, the following compensations ensure
optimum control.
List of main compensations for throttle valve opening angle and idle speed control
Stable idle compensation (immediately after start) In order to stabilize idle speed immediately after
start, target opening angle is kept big and then
gradually reduced. Compensation values are set
based on the engine coolant temperature.
Rotation speed feedback compensation (while In case there is a difference between the target idle
idling) speed and actual engine speed, engine-ECU
compensates the throttle valve opening angle
based on that difference.
Atmospheric pressure compensation At high altitudes atmospheric pressure is less and
the intake air density is low. So, the target opening
angle is compensated based on atmospheric
pressure.
Engine coolant temperature compensation Compensation is made according to the engine
coolant temperature. The lower the engine coolant
temperature the greater the throttle valve opening
angle.
Electric load compensation Throttle opening angle is compensated according
to electric load. The greater the electric load, the
greater the throttle valve opening angle.
Compensation when shift is in D range When transmission is changed from P or N range
to some other range, throttle valve opening angle is
increased to prevent reduction in engine speed.
Compensation when A/C is functioning Throttle opening angle is compensated according
to functioning of A/C compressor. While A/C
compressor is being driven, the throttle valve
opening angle is increased.
Initialize control
After ignition switch turns OFF, engine-ECU drives Engine protection control
the throttle valve from fully closed position to fully When the racing is continued during the vehicle
open position and records the fully closed/open stud- stopped period (no-load period) for more than the
ied value of the throttle position sensor (main and specified time, the engine-ECU closes the throttle
sub) output signals. The recorded studied values are valve and restricts the engine speed to protect the
used as studied value compensation for compensat- engine.
ing basic target opening angle when the engine is
started next.

MIVEC (Mitsubishi Innovative Valve Timing Electronic Control System)
MIVEC (Mitsubishi Innovative Valve Timing Electronic

Control System)
M2132023500911
The MIVEC system effects a continuously variable
control on the inlet valve timing. The valve operating
angle is not change. MIVEC enables valve timing
control that is optimal for the operating conditions of
the engine. Thus, it stabilizes the idle and improves
power output and torque in all driving ranges.
Inlet oil feeder

control valve
Retard direction
Crankshaft position sensor
Air flow sensor Spool valve movement
Throttle position sensor Spool valve

Engine-ECU
Advance direction
Engine coolant temperature
sensor To oil pan
Retard chamber
Inlet camshaft position Oil pressure
sensor Advance chamber
To oil pan
Spring
AKB00755 AB
• The engine-ECU assesses the driving conditions • By varying the position of the spool valve, the oil
of the engine by way of the signals input by sen- pressure can be applied either to the retard or
sors. advance chamber, thus continuously changing
• Based on the assessed information, the the phases of the inlet camshaft.
engine-ECU outputs duty cycle signals to the inlet
oil feeder control valve in order to control the
position of the spool valve.

MIVEC (Mitsubishi Innovative Valve Timing Electronic Control System)
<No.2TDC> <No.1TDC> <No.3TDC> <No.4TDC> <No.2TDC>

Crank angle H
sensor signal L
Inlet camshaft H
position sensor
signal L
: Phase angle
AKB00756AB
The engine-ECU calculates the detected phase

angle by using the signal from the inlet camshaft
position sensor and the crank angle sensor.
Operation Conceptual Diagram
Valve lift
Inlet camshaft
phase angle
Exhaust valve lift curve
At most
advanced angle
Inlet valve lift curve

(at most retarded angle)
Overlap
AK800138 AB
The engine-ECU controls the camshaft phase angle

in order to attain optimal valve timing that suits the
engine load and engine speed.
Initial Phase Control Direction
Inlet valve Most retarded angle Advance direction

ENGINE CONTROL RELAY CONTROL
ENGINE CONTROL RELAY CONTROL

M2132006000720
Battery
LOCK
Ignition switch ST ACC
IG1 IG2
Engine control OFF

relay ON
ETACS-ECU
To each sensor and

actuator
Power Battery
source backup Engine-ECU
Engine control relay control Ignition switch-IG
AK604134AD
When the ignition switch-IG "ON" signal is input, • Throttle valve initializing control
engine-ECU turns ON the power transistor for control
of the engine control relay. As a result, current flows
through the engine control relay's coil, the relay
switch turns ON and power is supplied to each sen-
sor and actuator. Also, when ignition switch-IG "OFF"
signal is input, engine-ECU performs the following
controls and then turns OFF the power transistor for
control of engine control relay.

FUEL PUMP RELAY CONTROL
FUEL PUMP RELAY CONTROL

M2132006500769
Battery
LOCK
ST ACC Ignition switch
IG1 IG2
Engine control
OFF
relay
ON
To engine-ECU
ETACS-ECU Fuel pump

OFF
relay
ON
Fuel pump Ignition switch-ST

and gauge M
unit
Engine-ECU
Fuel pump Crank angle sensor
relay control
AK700635 AB
When current flows through the fuel pump relay, the relay. As a result, power is supplied to the fuel pump.
relay turns ON and the fuel pump is driven. The fuel Also, if engine speed falls below a set value, the fuel
pump relay is built into the ETACS-ECU. When the pump relay is turned OFF. Thus, it deals with sudden
ignition switch-ST signal is input, engine-ECU turns stoppages such as engine stalling etc. by stopping
ON the power transistor for control of the fuel pump the pump.

STARTER RELAY CONTROL
STARTER RELAY CONTROL

M2132025500672
Battery
Ignition switch-ST
Inhibitor R
P
switch N
ETACS
-ECU
Starter relay OFF

ON
ON
Engine-ECU OFF
Starter
Starter relay
control M
AK800140 AB
When the ignition switch-ST signal is input,

engine-ECU turns ON the power transistor for control
of the starter relay.

OXYGEN SENSOR HEATER CONTROL
OXYGEN SENSOR HEATER CONTROL

M2132007000734
Engine-ECU
Oxygen sensor heater
Engine coolant
Engine control temperature sensor
relay
Battery
AK602241AE
When exhaust gas temperature is low, the oxygen the fuel during deceleration. Based on driving condi-
sensor response is dull. So, response is improved by tions and the oxygen sensor activation state,
raising the sensor temperature by passing current engine-ECU changes the amount of current (duty
through the heater at a low exhaust gas temperature, ratio) to the heater to quicken the activation of the
such as in the immediate aftermath of the engine oxygen sensor.
start, or during the warm up operation and in cutting

A/C COMPRESSOR RELAY CONTROL
A/C COMPRESSOR RELAY CONTROL

M2132034500722
Battery
A/C compressor relay OFF

ON
A/C
refrigerant A/C switch (CAN)
temperature
OFF ON switch Crank angle sensor
A/C compressor
assembly Accelerator pedal position sensor
A/C compressor A/C compressor
clutch Vehicle speed signal (CAN)
relay control
Inhibitor switch (CAN)
Engine-ECU
AK800141 AH
After the A/C switch is turned ON and A/C compressor relay to drive the A/C compressor after idle-up is
sor relay reaches a state where it can turn ON, complete. Also, in order to secure acceleration per-
engine-ECU turns ON the A/C compressor relay and formance, it turns OFF the A/C compressor relay for
drives the A/C compressor. In order to prevent a fixed amount of time, if the throttle opening angle
change in engine speed due to increased load of increases beyond a prescribed limit.
driving the compressor, it controls the A/C compres-

ALTERNATOR CONTROL
ALTERNATOR CONTROL
M2132025000785
Alternator G terminal
Engine coolant
temperature sensor
Alternator FR terminal
Crank angle sensor
Engine-ECU
A/C switch (CAN)
Ignition switch-ST
Alternator
AK602242AL
During engine idle operation, engine-ECU controls increase in alternator output current and output cur-
duty of conduction between alternator G terminal and rent is increased only gradually. (Battery current is
earth. (G terminal duty is controlled to be the same supplied to the headlamp etc. till alternator produces
as ON duty of the power transistor inside the voltage sufficient current.) Thus, engine-ECU prevents
regulator). If headlamps etc. are turned on while change in idle speed due to sudden increase of
engine is idling, the consumed current increases engine load.
suddenly, but by gradually increasing the alternator
G terminal OFF duty, engine-ECU restricts sudden
PURGE CONTROL
M2132027500106
Refer to GROUP 17 − Emission Control − Evapora-
tive Emission Control System P.17-16.
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (CAN)

M2132019000957
CAN communication is established to ensure the reli-
able transmission of information. Refer to GROUP
54C − General Information P.54C-2.
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM
M2132009002093
Engine-ECU has been provided with the following • Diagnosis code function
functions for easier system inspection. Refer to the • Data list function
workshop manual for the details about each item. • Actuator test function
• Freeze-frame data function

NOTES

13B-1
GROUP 13B
FUEL SUPPLY
CONTENTS
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . 13B-2 FUEL TANK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13B-3

13B-2 FUEL SUPPLY
GENERAL INFORMATION
GENERAL INFORMATION
M2134000101676
The fuel system consists of the following compo- • Fuel high-pressure hose
nents: • Fuel line pipe
• Fuel injector • Fuel tank assembly
• Fuel delivery pipe • Fuel pump and gauge assembly
• Fuel vapour canister • Fuel gauge unit <4WD>
SPECIFICATIONS
Item Specification
Fuel tank capacity L 2WD 63
4WD 60
Fuel pump type Electric (incorporates tank pump and gauge assembly)
Fuel filter type Cartridge (incorporates tank pump and gauge assembly)
Fuel return system Return less
Fuel pressure regulator control pressure kPa 324
Fuel injector Type Elector-magnetic
Quantity 4
Evaporative emission control system Fuel vapour canister
CONSTRUCTION DIAGRAM
<2WD>
Fuel tank assembly
Fuel vapour canister
Fuel delivery pipe
Fuel injector
Fuel pump and
Fuel high-pressure hose Fuel line pipe gauge assembly
ACB05409AB

FUEL SUPPLY 13B-3
FUEL TANK
<4WD>
Fuel gauge unit Fuel tank assembly
Fuel vapour canister
Fuel delivery pipe
Fuel injector
Fuel pump and
Fuel high-pressure hose Fuel line pipe gauge assembly
ACB05408AB
This fuel system is designed with consideration for • A return less fuel system eliminates returned fuel
global environment protection to ensure safety at a from the engine. The heat that fuel receives from
collision, reduce weight, and improve reliability and the engine is reduced, minimising fuel tempera-
quality. This system has the following features: ture in the fuel tank and controlling the amount of
• A quick-joint connector of a plastic tube is used evaporated gas.
for the fuel high-pressure hose in the engine • The activated charcoal of fuel vapour canister is
compartment to reduce the permeation of fuel modified for downsizing, weight saving and better
evaporative emission. performance.
• The surface of under floor fuel line pipes is
coated with 1-mm thickness of resin to improve
resistance to corrosion and chipping.
FUEL TANK
M2134001001672
The fuel tank assembly consists of components such • A built-in fuel filter and a fuel tank suction hose
as a fuel pump and gauge assembly, a fuel gauge have been adopted to meet the fuel tank of a sad-
unit, and a fuel tank, and has the following features: dleback shape. <4WD>
• The fuel tank is mounted underneath the second The fuel pump and gauge assembly consist of the
seat to improve safety at a collision. following components:
• The fuel tank itself is made of a pre-coat galva- • Fuel pump
nized steel sheet that contains no lead. • Fuel gauge unit
• The capacity of the fuel tank is 63 litres <2WD> • Fuel filter
or 60 litres <4WD> to meet long-distance drives. • Fuel pressure regulator
• A fuel tank safety valve, which prevents fuel leak-
age when the vehicle banks or rolls over, is
located inside the fuel tank for fewer openings
and hose bonding points on the fuel tank top sur-
face.

13B-4 FUEL SUPPLY
FUEL TANK
<2WD>
Fuel pump and

gauge assembly
Fuel tank
ACC00445AB
Fuel tank safety valve
ACC00461AB

FUEL SUPPLY 13B-5
FUEL TANK
<4WD>
Fuel gauge unit

Fuel pump and
gauge assembly
Fuel tank
ACC00446AB
Fuel tank suction hose

Fuel in tank filter
ACC00462AB

NOTES

14-1
GROUP 14
ENGINE COOLING
CONTENTS
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . 14-2 WATER PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
WATER PASSAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3

14-2 ENGINE COOLING
GENERAL INFORMATION
GENERAL INFORMATION
M2140000101567
For the cooling method, a forced water-cooling circu- • A down-flow radiator has been adopted in order
lation system is adopted and it has the following to reduce the number of parts and improve serv-
characteristics: iceability.
• To reduce the coolant temperature variation, the • A ring fan has been adopted in order to reduce
inlet control system which arranges the thermo- noise.
stat at the inlet side of the coolant flowing from • A radiator condenser tank is assembled into the
the radiator to the engine is adopted. fan shroud in order to reduce the number of parts
and improve serviceability.
SPECIFICATIONS
Item 4B1
Cooling method Water-cooled pressurised, forced circulation with
electrical fan
Water pump Type Centrifugal impeller
Drive method Drive belt
Thermostat Type Wax pellet with jiggle valve
Valve open temperature °C 82 ± 1.5
Radiator Type Pressurised corrugate type
Core size (width × height × 687.4 × 400 × 16
thickness) mm
Performance kJ/h 201,800
Engine coolant Specified coolant DIA QUEEN SUPER LONG LIFE COOLANT or
equivalent
Quantity (including 0.65 L in Approximately 7.5
the radiator condenser tank) L
Radiator assembly
Radiator upper hose assembly
Radiator condenser tank
Condenser fan motor
Radiator fan motor
Fan shroud
CVT fluid cooler
feed hose CVT fluid cooler Radiator lower hose
return hose assembly
ACB05950 AB

ENGINE COOLING 14-3
WATER PASSAGE
WATER PASSAGE
M2140004000718
<Hot> <Cold>
Thermostat Thermostat
Water pump Water pump
Heater Heater
Throttle body Throttle body
CVT CVT
oil cooler oil cooler
Radiator Radiator
ACB04926AB
WATER PUMP
M2140003000492
The water pump is the centrifugal, impeller type that
is installed in front of the cylinder block. It is driven by
the drive belt.
Item Specifications
Discharge volume L/rpm 185/6 500
Impeller Impeller diameter mm 62
AK503034 AD

NOTES

15-1
GROUP 15
INTAKE AND
EXHAUST
CONTENTS
AIR INTAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2 EXHAUST SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3

AIR DUCT AND AIR CLEANER . . . . . . . . . 15-2 EXHAUST MANIFOLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
INLET MANIFOLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2 EXHAUST PIPE AND MUFFLER . . . . . . . . 15-3

15-2 INTAKE AND EXHAUST
AIR INTAKE SYSTEM
AIR INTAKE SYSTEM

AIR DUCT AND AIR CLEANER
M2150004001381
Resonator
Air cleaner assembly
Air duct
ACB05021AB
In order to save weight, an air cleaner element with-

out plastics is used and the panel thicknesses of the
cover and the housing are optimised.
INLET MANIFOLD
M2150010000666
The inlet manifold is made of plastic for weight
reduction, and the surface roughness of the inner
walls of the ports has been improved to reduce
intake resistance.

INTAKE AND EXHAUST 15-3
EXHAUST SYSTEM
EXHAUST SYSTEM
EXHAUST MANIFOLD
M2150006001105
The exhaust manifold incorporates a catalytic con-
verter. In order to reduce vibration, a spherical joint is
used at the front pipe connection.
EXHAUST PIPE AND MUFFLER

M2150003001775
Hanger bracket
Tail pipe
Hanger bracket
Catalytic converter
Hanger bracket
Main muffler
Annular joint
Sub muffler
Annular joint
ACB05022AB
Exhaust pipe and muffler consisting of two separa- • The spherical joint has been adopted for connec-
tion system has the following features: tion between the front exhaust pipe and the
• Improve emission gas cleaning ability by adopt- exhaust manifold, and between the exhaust pipe
ing rear exhaust system and placing front cata- and the centre exhaust pipe, which reduces
lytic converter by engine as close as possible. vibration to the vehicle.
• A 4-point exhaust muffler hanger has been
adopted for optimisation of position, which
reduces vibration to the vehicle.

NOTES

16-1
GROUP 16
ENGINE
ELECTRICAL
CONTENTS
STARTER MOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2 IGNITION COIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
ALTERNATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2 SPARK PLUG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2

16-2 ENGINE ELECTRICAL
STARTER MOTOR
STARTER MOTOR
M2161002000728
The starter motor is a reduction drive type with plan-
etary gear.
ALTERNATOR
M2162001000687
The alternator is the battery detection type.
IGNITION COIL
M2163001000561
The ignition coil is the plug-top type.
This plug-top type ignition coil has the following fea-
tures:
Coil
• A durable low-tension distribution system is
adopted.
• A separate igniting system is adopted. Due to
this, high voltage generated in the ignition coils
can be delivered into the spark plugs effectively.
• Low fuel consumption due to combustion stabili-
AKB00492AB
sation
• Compact and light weight
SPARK PLUG
M2163005000499
Iridium-tipped spark plugs are used.

17-1
GROUP 17
ENGINE AND
EMISSION
CONTROL
CONTENTS
ENGINE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2 GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-8

GENERAL INFORMATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2 CONSTRUCTION AND OPERATION . . . . . 17-12
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . . . . 17-2 EMISSION CONTROL<MPI> . . . . . . . 17-14

GENERAL INFORMATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2 GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-14
CONSTRUCTION AND OPERATION . . . . 17-5 CRANKCASE VENTILATION SYSTEM . . . 17-15
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-16
(ACC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-8 EMISSION REDUCTION SYSTEMS. . . . . . 17-17

17-2 ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL
ENGINE CONTROL
ENGINE CONTROL
GENERAL INFORMATION This system detects the amount of the accelerator
M2170001001522 pedal movement by using an accelerator pedal posi-
For the accelerator system, an electronic throttle tion sensor in the accelerator pedal assembly for
valve control system has been adopted, eliminating electronically controls the throttle valve.
of an accelerator cable.
Accelerator pedal assembly

(Built-in accelerator pedal
position sensor)
AC606134 AB
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM

GENERAL INFORMATION • For this cruise control system, due to the adop-
M2170001001555 tion of the common rail fuel control system, the
The cruise control system, which provides the con- engine-ECU electrically controls the fuel injection
stant speed driving without depressing the accelera- system. <Diesel engine>
tor pedal at a vehicle speed determined by the driver • In the situation that a vehicle speed is gradually
(within the range from approx. 40 to 200 km/h). increased without driver’s intention on downhill
• For this cruise control system, in conjunction with etc, speed limiter* is a driver assist function to
the electronic throttle valve control system, the prevent from exceeding the speed set by driver.
engine-ECU electronically controls the throttle
valve. <Petrol engine> NOTE: *: Adjustable speed limiter

ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL 17-3
Fuel injection system
<Diesel engine> Accelerator pedal <Standard meter>
(Built-in accelerator
Cruise control indicator lamp
pedal position sensor)
Hydraulic unit Assembly

(Built-in ABS-ECU Speed limiter display screen ACC00039
<Vehicles without ASC>
or ASC-ECU
<Vehicles with ASC>) <High contrast meter>
"SET" mark Cruise control display screen
SET
Speed limiter
Throttle body assembly display screen Multi information
Clutch switch <M/T> display
(Built-in throttle position
sensor and throttle valve
control servo) Engine-ECU 120
km/h
ACC00040
<Petrol engine> Stop lamp switch
Inhibitor switch <CVT, A/T>
Cruise control switches Diagnosis connector

CANCEL RES + or
SET -
Cruise control ON/OFF

Speed limiter ON/OFF
ACC0847 ACB04452
Engine-ECU
Relay box
ETACS-ECU
ACB04414 ACB04416
ACC00533 AB

COMPONENTS AND FUNCTIONS

Component Function
ABS-ECU <Vehicles without ASC> or Outputs the cruise control cancel signal to the engine-ECU.
ASC-ECU <Vehicles with ASC>
Accelerator pedal position sensor Informs the engine-ECU of the accelerator pedal depression.
Cruise control indicator lamp <standard When the cruise control ON/OFF switch is pressed, a lamp will
meter> or cruise control display screen illuminate or a screen will be displayed to inform the driver that
<high contrast meter> the cruise control system is active.
Speed limiter display screen When the speed limiter ON/OFF switch is pressed, a screen will
be displayed to inform the driver.
Cruise control Cruise control ON/OFF Power switch for cruise control system.
switches switch
Speed limiter ON/OFF Turn ON/OFF the speed limiter.
switch
RES + switch • Vehicle speed is set with the RES + switch and SET − switch.
SET − switch • Set vehicle speed of speed limiter is set with the RES +
switch and SET − switch.
CANCEL switch • Cancels the constant speed driving.
• Cancel speed limiter in the activated mode.
CVT-ECU <Petrol engine> • Controls the CVT based on the CVT control signal from the
engine-ECU.
• The selector lever "N" position signal from the inhibitor switch
is sent to the engine-ECU.
• Outputs the signal from the secondary pulley speed sensor to
the engine-ECU.
A/T-ECU <Diesel engine> • Controls the automatic transmission shifting based on the
shift control signal from the engine-ECU.
• The selector lever "N" position signal from the inhibitor switch
is sent to the engine-ECU.
• Outputs the signal from the secondary pulley speed sensor to
the engine-ECU.
Diagnosis connector If the M.U.T.-III is connected, the diagnosis code and data list
from the engine-ECU can be read.

Component Function
Engine-ECU • Based on the input signal from each sensors and switches,
the throttle opening angle indication signal is sent.
• Based on the input signal from each sensors and switches,
the CVT control signal is sent to the CVT-ECU. <Petrol
engine>
• Based on the secondary pulley speed sensor signal from the
CVT-ECU, it calculates the vehicle speed. <Petrol engine>
• Based on the selector lever "N" position signal from the
CVT-ECU, it cancels constant speed driving. <Petrol engine>
• Based on the input signal from each sensors and switches,
the CVT control signal is sent to the A/T-ECU. <Diesel
engine>
• Based on the secondary pulley speed sensor signal from the
A/T-ECU, it calculates the vehicle speed. <Diesel engine>
• Based on the selector lever "N" position signal from the
A/T-ECU, it cancels constant speed driving. <Diesel engine>
• To the cruise control indicator lamp, the cruise control system
ON/OFF signal is sent.
• The diagnosis codes and data list of the cruise control system
is sent to the diagnosis connector.
Inhibitor switch <CVT, A/T> The constant speed driving is cancelled by the selector lever
operation, the "N" position is detected.
Clutch switch <M/T> Because the constant speed driving is cancelled by the clutch
operation, the clutch pedal status is detected.
Stop lamp switch • The constant speed driving is cancelled by the brake
operation, the brake pedal operation is detected.
• As for the stop lamp switch, two built-in switches, the stop
lamp switch which is also used for the stop lamp illumination
and the brake switch which is used exclusively for the cruise
control, are integrated, and thus the reliability is enhanced.
Throttle valve control servo <Petrol The throttle valve opens and closes in response to the throttle
engine> angle control signal from the engine-ECU.
Throttle position sensor <Petrol engine> Informs the engine-ECU of the throttle valve opening angle.
Fuel injection system <Diesel engine> Amount of fuel consumption control signal from engine-ECU.
CONSTRUCTION AND OPERATION • In the engine control section, the target throttle
M2170002000919 valve opening angle is calculated based on the
The cruise control section in engine-ECU calculates target accelerator pedal opening angle signal
the cruise control system operation condition based from the cruise control section and the actual
on the signals sent from switches and sensors. accelerator pedal opening angle signal from the
Based on the calculation, the cruise control section accelerator pedal position sensor, and the vehicle
outputs the target accelerator pedal opening angle speed is controlled by operating the throttle valve
signal to the engine control section, and CVT control control servo. <Petrol engine>
signal to CVT-ECU <Petrol engine>, shift control sig- • In the engine control section, the amount of fuel
nal to A/T-ECU <Diesel engine> or clutch switch consumption is calculated based on the target
<M/T> and cruise control status (ON/OFF, etc.) to the engine torque signal from the cruise control sec-
combination meter, respectively. tion and the actual accelerator pedal opening
angle signal, and the vehicle speed is controlled
by controlling the fuel injection system. <Diesel
engine>

• The speed limiter controls the engine output and The combination meter will turn on the cruise control
the transmission gear ratio to regulate the vehicle indicator lamp <Standard meter>, the cruise control
speed. display screen <High contrast meter> or the speed
limiter display screen when the cruise control system
is active. On the high contrast meter, "SET" symbol
will also appear in the screen during constant speed
driving.
BLOCK DIAGRAM
Cruise control switches Stop lamp switch Clutch switch Accelerator pedal
<M/T> position sensor
Stop lamp Clutch switch
switch signal signal
ETACS-ECU
Engine-ECU
Cruise control Brake Stop lamp

Actual accelerator
switch signal switch switch signal
pedal opening
signal (CAN) Target accelerator
angle signal
pedal opening
angle signal
Cruise control section Engine control section
Secondary pulley CVT control

Inhibitor speed sensor signal signal (CAN)*1
switch (CAN) *1 or or
signal output shaft speed shift control
sensor signal signal (CAN)*2
(CAN)
(CAN) *2
ON/OFF signal Amount of Target Throttle

(CAN) fuel throttle valve
CVT-ECU*1 or A/T-ECU *2
consump valve opening
Combination meter Inhibitor Secondary pulley CVT control -tion opening angle
(Cruise control speed sensor signal*1 signal*1 angle signal
switch or
indicator lamp/ signal or signal
shift control
Cruise control output shaft speed signal *2
display screen, sensor signal *2
Speed limiter Fuel injection Throttle valve Throttle position
display screen) CVT-ECU*1 or A/T-ECU *2 system*2 control sensor *1
servo *1
NOTE
*1 : Petrol engine
*2 : Diesel engine ACC00545 AB
SYSTEM FUNCTIONS 3. When the SET − switch is operated while driving

SET FUNCTION at the vehicle speed of high speed limit
(approximately 200 km/h) or faster, the constant
1. While driving in the vehicle speed range of speed driving is not performed.
approximately 40 to 200 km/h, press the SET −
4. When the SET − switch is operated while driving
switch.
at the vehicle speed of low speed limit
2. The cruise control system stores the vehicle (approximately 40 km/h) or slower, the constant
speed when the SET − switch is released, and speed driving is not performed.
then performs a constant speed driving at the
stored vehicle speed. The speed limiter will store
a set vehicle speed, and then regulate the vehicle
speed within that stored speed.

DECELERATION FUNCTION 3. In addition when the RES + switch is pressed for

1. When the SET − switch is pressed and held for less than approximately 0.5 second, the vehicle
approximately 0.5 second or longer during the speed is increased by approximately 1.6 km/h
constant speed driving, the vehicle is decelerated from the constant speed driving speed. The
by using engine braking while the switch is accelerated vehicle speed is newly stored, and
pressed. then the constant speed driving is performed at
2. After that the SET − switch is released, the vehicle that speed. Every time the RES + switch is
speed of that time is newly stored, and then the pressed briefly (within approx. 0.5 seconds), the
constant speed driving is performed at that speed. speed limiter will store a higher vehicle speed by 1
The speed limiter will store a set vehicle speed, km/h. The speed limiter will regulate the vehicle
and then regulate the vehicle speed within that speed within that last stored speed.
stored speed.
CANCEL FUNCTION
3. In addition, when the SET − switch is pressed for When any of the following conditions are satisfied,
less than approximately 0.5 second, the vehicle the constant speed driving will be cancelled. The
speed is decreased by approximately 1.6 km/h speed limiter will be deactivated by pressing the
from the constant speed driving speed. The CANCEL switch.
decelerated speed is newly stored, and then the • The cruise control system is stopped by the
constant speed driving is performed at that speed. pressing the cruise control ON/OFF switch.
Every time the SET−switch is pressed briefly • The CANCEL switch is pressed.
(within approx. 0.5 seconds), the speed limiter will • The brake pedal is depressed.
store a lower vehicle speed by 1 km/h. The speed • The selector lever is shifted to the "N" position.
limiter will regulate the vehicle speed within that • The vehicle speed becomes low speed limit
last stored speed. (approximately 40 km/h) or less.
4. When the SET − switch is pressed and held, and • The vehicle speed is decreased by 15 km/h or
the vehicle speed is decelerated to low speed limit more from the setting vehicle speed.
(approximately 40 km/h) , the low speed limit will • An abnormality occurs in the vehicle speed sig-
be maintained. nal.
• The ASC is operated.
RESUME FUNCTION • An abnormality occurs in CVT-ECU.
1. During the constant speed driving, press the • An abnormality occurs in the CAN communica-
CANCEL switch, or depress the brake pedal to tion.
cancel the constant speed driving. The speed
limiter will be deactivated by pressing the EMERGENCY CANCEL FUNCTION
CANCEL switch. When the accelerator pedal is depressed fully to
2. Afterward, when the RES + switch is pressed drive at higher speed than the stored speed, the
while driving at a vehicle speed of low speed limit speed limiter will be deactivated temporarily
(approximately 40 km/h) or more, a constant
speed driving is performed at the vehicle speed LAST STATUS MEMORY FUNCTION
stored when the constant speed driving was <RUSSIA>
cancelled. The system stores ON/OFF status of the cruise con-
trol when the ignition switch is turned off. Then, when
ACCELERATION FUNCTION the ignition switch is turned on the next time, the sys-
1. During the constant speed driving, when the RES tem will resume the stored status.
+ switch is pressed and held for approximately 0.5
seconds or longer, the vehicle is accelerated with FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION
the specified acceleration while the switch is When one of the following conditions is met, the
pressed. cruise control system function will be suspended until
2. After that the RES + switch is released, the the system returns to normal condition. Also, when
vehicle speed of that time is newly stored, and one of the following conditions is met, a constant
then the constant speed driving is performed at speed driving is cancelled immediately. The speed
that speed. The speed limiter will store a set limiter will be also deactivated.
vehicle speed, and then regulate the vehicle • An abnormality occurs in the cruise control
speed within that stored speed. switches.

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (ACC)
• An abnormality occurs in the stop lamp signal. • An abnormality occurs in the vehicle speed sig-
When one of the following conditions is met, unless nal.
the vehicle is stopped to turn the ignition switch to • Throttle position sensor abnormality.
the "LOCK" (OFF) position, the cruise control system • Accelerator pedal position sensor abnormality.
function will be suspended even if the system returns
to the normal state. Also, one of the following condi- DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
tions is met, a constant speed driving is cancelled To ease the system inspection, the diagnosis code
immediately. The speed limiter will be also deacti- inspection, data list inspection is available by
vated. M.U.T.-III.
• Engine-ECU abnormality. NOTE: For the diagnosis code items and input check
code items, refer to the Workshop Manual.

GENERAL INFORMATION Control overview
M2170001001544
Constant speed control
In addition to the conventional cruise control system*,
an adaptive cruise control system (ACC), which
maintains the distance from vehicle travelling in front,
has been adopted.
• *: For the cruise control system, refer to P.17-2.
• A radar detects the distance from vehicle travel-
ling in front, and thus decelerates the vehicle by
braking if necessary to maintain the distance.
• The system attempts to maintain the distance Your vehicle Radar detection range
from vehicle travelling in front by accelerating
ACC00478 AB
within the set vehicle speed by using a radar
installed in the vehicle. The vehicle is driven at a constant speed.
NOTE: .
• If vehicle travelling in front accelerates faster than Deceleration and distance-keeping
your vehicle's set speed, your vehicle will be controls
driven at your set speed.
• If the vehicle travelling in front stops, your vehicle Vehicle travelling ahead
also stops.
• The system does not function if the vehicle travel-
ling in front is stationary or very slow, or much
slower than your vehicle.
• The system may not be able to maintain the dis-
tance if the radar is contaminated, vehicles are
driven uphill or downhill repeatedly, another vehi- Your vehicle Radar detection range
cle cuts in abruptly, or a motorcycle is travelling in
front. ACC00479AB
• If the vehicle travelling ahead decelerates, your

vehicle also decelerates to maintain the distance.
If the vehicle travelling ahead brakes to a stand-
still, your vehicle also brakes.
• If the vehicle travelling ahead accelerates, your
vehicle also accelerates within the set vehicle
speed.
NOTE: The distance between the vehicle travelling
ahead and your vehicle can be chosen from three
settings on the ACC distance switch.

If vehicle travelling in front accelerates faster than

Acceleration control your vehicle's set speed, your vehicle will accelerate
until it reaches your set speed gradually, and then be
Vehicle travelling ahead driven at a constant speed.
Your vehicle Radar detection range

ACC00480AB

Accelerator pedal
(Built-in accelerator
Hydraulic unit Assembly pedal position sensor)
(Built-in ASC-ECU) Steering wheel sensor
Throttle body assembly

(Built-in throttle position
sensor and throttle valve
control servo)
Cruise control display screen
120
SET km/h
Stop lamp switch Multi information

display
Engine-ECU CVT-ECU or A/T-ECU ACC00485

ACC/FCM-ECU Inhibitor switch
Cruise control switches Diagnosis connector

CANSEL RES + or
SET -
ACC ON/OFF
Speed limiter ON/OFF
ACC distance
ACC00483 ACB04452
Engine-ECU
Relay box
ETACS-ECU
ACB04414 ACB04416
ACC00481 AB

COMPONENTS AND FUNCTIONS

Component Function
ACC/FCM-ECU • ACC status is changed based on the ACC/ cruise control
system/ adjustable speed limitation control mode and on the
signal of switch state sent from engine-ECU.
• Signals of the ACC status (off, standby, active, temporary fail
and system fail) are changed state and sent.
• Acceleration/deceleration are calculated from the ACC
status, subject vehicle speed and data which the radar
detects, and Acceleration/deceleration are sent to ASC-ECU.
ASC-ECU • The ASC-ECU controls brake pressure based on signals of
acceleration/deceleration and the target deceleration
received from ACC/FCM-ECU.
• ASC-ECU triggers the stop lamp when the automatic brake is
activated.
• ASC-ECU internal ACC status is switched based on basically
signal of ACC status received from ACC/FCM-ECU and sent
as signal.
• Target engine torque and target primary speed <Vehicles for
CVT> are sent engine-ECU according to the
acceleration/deceleration received from ACC/FCM-ECU.
Combination ACC display screen Contents of display and buzzer are changed according to signal
meter of ACC status, Display request and buzzer request sent from
ACC/FCM-ECU when signal of control mode sent from
engine-ECU is ACC ON.
Cruise control ACC ON/OFF switch Power switch for ACC.
switches NOTE: .
• The system activates by pressing the switch briefly (within 1.5
seconds).
• The cruise control system activates by pressing the switch for
certain period (1.5 seconds or more).
ACC distance switch The distance from vehicle travelling in front is set with the
distance switch.
CVT-ECU <Petrol engine> Target primary is changed from general control map to cruise
control system, ACC control map according to signals of cruise
control system control flag, and T/M is controlled by accelerator
pedal position sensor and target primary speed which are
received from engine-ECU.
A/T-ECU <Diesel engine> Control map is changed from general control map to cruise
control system, ACC control map according to signals of cruise
control system control flag, and T/M is controlled by accelerator
pedal position sensor which are received from engine-ECU.
Diagnosis connector If the M.U.T.-III is connected, the diagnosis code and data list
from the ACC/FCM-ECU can be read.

Component Function
Engine-ECU • Signals of state of steering switches (including failure
judgement result) are sent.
• Acceleration/deceleration are controlled according to ACC
target torque received from ASC-ECU when ACC mode is
ON and ACC status is active. Engine-ECU has cruise control
module as a part of engine-ECU. ACC target torque which is
sent from ASC-ECU through signal is input to the cruise
control module. Cruise control module outputs ACC target
torque to engine-ECU.
ETACS-ECU • Stop lamp ON/OFF circuit which is driven at automatic brake
control by ASC-ECU is equipped.
• The state of ACC set distance switch is sent.
Steering wheel sensor (SAS) Signals of the steering angle and the steering angle velocity are
sent.
CONSTRUCTION AND OPERATION • Acceleration/deceleration are calculated from the

M2170002000908 ACC status, subject vehicle speed and data
• ACC status is changed based on the ACC/ cruise which the radar detects, and Acceleration/decel-
control system/ adjustable speed limitation con- eration are sent to ASC-ECU.
trol mode and on the signal of switch state sent • Signals of display request and buzzer request are
from engine-ECU. ACC set distance signal of the sent to the combination meter.
steering switch are received from ETACS-ECU.
• Signals of the ACC status (off, standby, active,
temporary fail and system fail) are changed state
and sent.

BLOCK DIAGRAM
Brake switch
Cruise control switches

(ACC/ cruise control/
speed limiter)
Cruise control switches

Stop lamp switch ASC-ECU
(ACC distance switch) ACC status
Switch signal Switch signal or target engine torque
or target primary speed
(CAN)
Stop lamp
activation
ETACS-ECU
Switch signal (CAN) Switch signal

Vehicle speed
or yaw rate ACC status
or acceleration or brake control request
Stop lamp /deceleration or target deceleration
etc (CAN) (CAN)
ACC/FCM-ECU
ACC display and buzzer System failure Cruise control switches

request (CAN) (CAN) mode (CAN)
Cruise control control flag,
accelerator pedal position,
Steering angle or
CVT-ECU target primary speed (CAN)
steering angle velocity
or A/T-ECU
(CAN)
Steering wheel sensor Combination meter ACC ON/OFF display contents Engine-ECU
(SAS) (ACC display screen) (CAN)
ACC00350 AB
SYSTEM FUNCTIONS
DISTANCE FUNCTION
During ACC control, the distance from vehicle travel-
ling ahead can be chosen from three settings.
FAIL-SAFE AND DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTIONS

ACC/FCM-ECU constantly monitors the input and NOTE: For the diagnosis code items and input check
output signals. If an error is detected in the system, code items, refer to the Workshop Manual.
ACC/FCM-ECU sends a fail signal and the corre-
sponding display screen. To ease the system inspec-
tion, the diagnosis code inspection, data list
inspection is available by M.U.T.-III.

EMISSION CONTROL<MPI>
GENERAL INFORMATION
M2171000101756
The emission control is basically the same as the
4B1 engine mounted on the ASX.
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION DIAGRAM
Purge control
solenoid valve Canister
Air
Air cleaner
From
Positive fuel pump
crankcase
ventilation
valve
Catalytic
converter
Catalytic Oxygen sensor (rear)

converter
Oxygen sensor (front)
AKB00864 AB
Exhaust gas cleaning devices list

System Objective / Function Composition parts
Crankcase ventilation system HC decrease Positive crankcase ventilation
Re-combustion of blow-by (PCV) valve
gas.
Evaporative emission control system HC decrease • Canister
Re-combustion of blow-by • Purge control solenoid valve
gas.

System Objective / Function Composition parts

Emission reduction Air-fuel ratio Decrease of CO, HC and • Engine-ECU
systems feedback control NOx • Air flow sensor
Controls air-fuel ratio of • Injector
air-fuel mixture to become • Oxygen sensor
theoretical air-fuel ratio • Crank angle sensor etc.
(about 14.7), which is when
the 3-way catalytic
converter's cleaning
performance is best. It also
controls optimum fuel
supply based on coolant
temperature, driving
conditions etc.
Catalytic Decrease of CO, HC and Monolith catalyst
converter NOx
It facilitates oxidation of CO
and HC and reduction of
NOx so that all 3 component
gases are cleaned
simultaneously.
CRANKCASE VENTILATION SYSTEM

M2171000400583
Ventilation hose
Air inlet
Positive Breather hose

crankcase
ventilation
valve
Flow of blow-by gas and clean air (low load area)

Flow of blow-by gas and clean air (high load area)
AKB00825AB
A blow-by gas reduction device prevents blow-by driving, clean air is supplied to the crankcase by the
gas from being expelled into the atmosphere and is air intake hose via the breather hose and rocker
of closed type. A positive crankcase ventilation
(PCV) valve is provided in the ventilation hose from
the rocker cover to the inlet manifold. During low load

cover, and it mixes with the blow-by gas in the crank- POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION
case. The blow-by gas in the crankcase is induced to (PCV) VALVE
the inlet manifold through the rocker cover and PCV
valve. During high load driving, blow-by gas in the
crankcase is induced to the inlet manifold through
the rocker cover and PCV valve and at the same From
rocker To inlet
time also via the air intake hose and throttle body cover manifold
due to negative pressure in the air cleaner.
Spring Plunger
AK602324 AF
PCV valve lifts the plunger according to negative

pressure at the inlet manifold to create appropriate
ventilation for the crankcase.
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

M2171000200590
Battery Purge control

solenoid valve
Canister
Air flow sensor

Manifold absolute
pressure sensor
Engine coolant
temperature sensor
Crank angle sensor

Engine-ECU
AKB00826AB
HC (hydrocarbon) generated in the fuel tank are PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
adsorbed by the active carbon in the canister and
To canister
stored. HC stored in the canister is introduced to the B
inlet manifold when engine is in operation where it is
mixed with intake air and combusted. Engine-ECU
introduces optimum HC amount according to driving
conditions and so performs duty control on the purge
control solenoid valve. Also, the purge control sole-
noid valve is closed during deceleration or immedi-
ately after engine start to restrict change in air-fuel
ratio and prevent engine from stalling. A
To inlet manifold AK602742AF

A purge control solenoid valve is installed in the inlet passes through the coil, air can pass between nipple
manifold. The purge control solenoid valve controls A and B and fuel vapour gas is sucked in.
the intake volume of fuel vapour gas from the canis- Engine-ECU changes the ON duty ratio according to
ter. The purge control solenoid valve is a duty control engine's operating condition to control the intake vol-
type solenoid valve. When current is not passing ume of fuel vapour gas.
through the coil, nipple A is kept airtight and fuel
vapour gas cannot be sucked in. When current
100 ms
OFF
12V
Purge control
solenoid valve ON
0V
Engine-ECU
AK602245AC
EMISSION REDUCTION SYSTEMS 2. CATALYTIC CONVERTER

M2171000800439
These decrease CO, HC and NOx in the exhaust
Catalytic converter
gases and consist of air-fuel ratio feedback control (built-in to exhaust manifold)
and catalytic converter.
1. AIR-FUEL RATIO FEEDBACK CON-
TROL
Refer to GROUP 13A − Fuel Injection Control
P.13A-24.
Catalytic converter
(built-in to centre exhaust pipe)
Front exhaust pipe

AKC00010AB
The exhaust manifold and the centre exhaust pipe

include a catalytic converter.
Based on appropriate air-fuel ratio feedback from
oxygen sensor, CO and HC are oxidized and NOx is
reduced. Catalytic converter is a monolith with bee-
hive design with catalysts on the unit surface. It is
protected by a thermally insulating mat and enclosed
in a shell.

NOTES

23-1
GROUP 23
CONTINUOUSLY
VARIABLE
TRANSMISSION
(CVT)
CONTENTS
CVT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-2 TRANSMISSION CONTROL . . . . . . . 23-3

GENERAL INFORMATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-2 GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-3

23-2 CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANSMISSION (CVT)
CVT
CVT
GENERAL INFORMATION
M2231000100585
The CVT is basically the same as for the predeces-
sor. However, note that a new gear ratio control is
adopted in order to reduce slip unique to the CVT.
SPECIFICATIONS
Transmission model F1CJA-2-A5W W1CJA-2-A5WA W1CJA-1-14YA
Engine model 4B11 4B12
Drive system 2WD 4WD
Torque converter Model 3-element, 1-stage, 2-phase
Stall torque ratio 1.99 1.83
Lock-up Present
Transmission type Forward automatic CVT (steel belt-driven), reverse 1 speed
Gear ratio Forward 2.349 − 0.394
Reverse 1.750
Final reduction gear ratio 6.466
Control type Electronically-controlled
Function Shift control Present
Line pressure control Present
Select control Present
Lock-up control Present
Self-diagnosis Present
function
Fail-safe function Present
Number of speedometer gears − (detected by the ABS sensor)
(drive/driven)
Oil pump Model Vane-type pump
Drive type Driven by the engine, sprocket, and chain
CVT fluid Brand name MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE CVTF-J4
Capacity (L) Approximately 7.1

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANSMISSION (CVT) 23-3
TRANSMISSION CONTROL
NEW ACCELERATION CONTROL
: New
Accelerator pedal
operation : Conventional
Time
New: To reduce a feel of untimely shifting, the downshift amount at
the initial acceleration is adjusted. In addition, the upshift amount
CVT gear ratio is restricted at the later acceleration with the aim of providing
the acceleration feeling like a multi-stage transmission.
Ratio Conventional: The downshift is carried out quickly at the initial
acceleration and after that the upshift is carried out with vehicle
speed increase.
Time
Engine speed New: The engine speed increases gradually in conjunction
with acceleration.
Conventional: The engine speed increases quickly at
r/min the initial acceleration.
Time
New: Acceleration feeling is sustained
Acceleration
Conventional: Acceleration feeling is NOT sustained
G
Time
ACB03776AB
A new acceleration control has been employed, in Moreover, both comfortable acceleration and power
which the engine speed and vehicle speed respond output performance have been achieved at the same
linearly to an accelerator pedal operation to reduce time by increasing the acceleration G with increase
the CVT-specific slippage feel. of the engine speed.
GENERAL INFORMATION • The weight reduction of the selector lever assem-
M2232000100823 bly has been realised by structural rationalisation.
• The gate-type selector lever with excellent opera- • There are two types of the selector lever knob;
bility has been employed to provide an appropri- sporty black and luxurious leather.
ate control force and a crisp operation feel. • The black shift indicator panel enhances the
• Shift lock and key interlock mechanisms of relia- sporty image.
ble electric type have been adopted. • Paddle shift is available on certain models.

23-4 CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANSMISSION (CVT)
Transmission control cable
Selector lever
assembly
ACC00027AB

25-1
GROUP 25
PROPELLER SHAFT
CONTENTS
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . 25-2

25-2 PROPELLER SHAFT
GENERAL INFORMATION
GENERAL INFORMATION
M2250000100829
The 2-piece, 3-joint type propeller shaft with a centre • Inside the rear propeller shaft, the dynamic
bearing is adopted. damper is integrated to reduce a booming noise
It has the following features: cased by the resonance at the high engine
• An insulator is installed to the vehicle body joint of speed.
the centre bearing to reduce vibration. • Adopting the friction welding method, the installa-
tion structure is streamlined to reduce the weight.
• Lead-free grease is adopted for the universal
joint.
SPECIFICATIONS
Item Specifications
Propeller shaft Type 2-piece, 3-joint type propeller shaft
Universal joint Type No.1 Cross type (caulking method)
No.2 Constant velocity type
No.3 Cross type (caulking method)
Bearing Needle roller bearing (maintenance-free type)
Front propeller Centre bearing Rear propeller shaft

shaft
No.1 joint
No.3 joint
AC602513AD
No.2 joint
Insulator
Dynamic damper
AC504845 AB AC504844 AB

26-1
GROUP 26
FRONT AXLE
CONTENTS

26-2 FRONT AXLE
GENERAL INFORMATION
GENERAL INFORMATION
M2260000101533
For the front axle, the multi-line angular contact ball • Dynamic damper is mounted on driveshaft (RH)
bearing with an integral oil seal is adopted as a to reduce differential booming noise. <2000>
wheel bearing, and EBJ-PTJ type constant velocity • Lead-free grease for the constant velocity joint is
joint as a driveshaft. adopted.
It has the following features: • Hexavalent chromium is eliminated from the dust
• The lightweight and compact EBJ-type constant cover material.
velocity joint is installed on the wheel side of the • The number of parts is reduced by integrating the
driveshaft, and the vibration reduced PTJ-type magnetic encoder for ABS wheel speed detection
constant velocity joint is installed on the differen- into the wheel bearing.
tial side. NOTE: .
• For the driveshaft (RH), instead of the conven- EBJ (High Efficiency Compact Undercut Joint):
tional output shaft, the long stem integrated with the lighter and smaller constant velocity joint com-
the differential side constant velocity joint is pared with the conventional BJ has been achieved
adopted to streamline the structure. <4WD> by adopting the eight small balls.
PTJ (Pillow Tripod Joint)
SPECIFICATIONS
Item Specifications
Wheel bearing Bearing type Unit bearing (Double-row angular contact ball
bearing)
Bearing (Outer diameter × inside 80 × 43
diameter) (mm)
Drive shaft Joint type Outside EBJ
Inside PTJ
Shaft length* × shaft LH 392.5 × 25.4
diameter (mm) RH 708.0 × 34.0 <2WD>, 509.0 × 29.0 <4WD>
NOTE: *: Indicates the distance between each joint centre.

FRONT AXLE 26-3
GENERAL INFORMATION
Strut assembly AC602514
ACB04894
PTJ
Knuckle <LH>
Driveshaft (LH)
PTJ
<RH - 4WD> Driveshaft (RH)
EBJ
Front hub Dynamic damper

PTJ
<RH - 2WD>
Wheel bearing
Magnetic Driveshaft (RH)

Oil seal encoder
AC504925 ACC00499AB

NOTES

27-1
GROUP 27
REAR AXLE
CONTENTS
REAR AXLE <2WD> . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-2 ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED

4WD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-6
REAR AXLE <4WD> . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-3 GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-6
4WD-ECU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-11
DIFFERENTIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-4 4WD SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-13
ELECTRONIC CONTROL COUPLING . . . . 27-13

27-2 REAR AXLE
REAR AXLE <2WD>
REAR AXLE <2WD>

M2270002000325
The rear axle has the following features: • The number of parts has been reduced by inte-
• The wheel bearing is a unit ball bearing (dou- grating the magnetic encoder for ABS wheel
ble-row angular contact ball bearing) which incor- speed detection into the wheel bearing.
porates the oil seals and is highly resistant to
thrust loads.
SPECIFICATIONS
Item Specification
Wheel bearing Bearing type Unit ball bearing (double-row angular contact ball bearing)
Rear hub
Ball bearing
Magnetic encoder
Oil seal
ACB05764AB

REAR AXLE 27-3
REAR AXLE <4WD>
REAR AXLE <4WD>

M2270003000447
For the rear axle, the unit ball bearing (double-row • Lead-free grease for the constant velocity joint
angular contact ball bearing) in which the hub and has been adopted.
ball bearing are incorporated has been adopted for • Hexavalent chromium has been eliminated from
the wheel bearing, and the EUJ−ETJ type constant the dust cover material.
velocity joint for the driveshaft. • The number of parts has been reduced by inte-
The following features are also available. grating the magnetic encoder for ABS wheel
• The lightweight and compact EUJ type constant speed detection into the wheel bearing.
velocity joint has been installed on the wheel side EUJ (High Efficiency Compact Undercut Joint):The
of the driveshaft, and the lightweight compact lighter and smaller constant velocity joint com-
ETJ type constant velocity joint has been pared with the conventional UJ has been
installed on the differential side. achieved by adopting the eight small balls.
• Adoption of the electronic control 4WD optimizes ETJ (High Efficiency Compact Tripod Joint):The
the size of the driveshaft constant velocity joint lighter and smaller constant velocity joint com-
and achieves the weight saving. pared with the conventional TJ has been
installed.
SPECIFICATIONS
Item Specification
Wheel bearing Bearing type Unit ball bearing (double-row angular
contact ball bearing)
Driveshaft Joint type Outer EUJ
Inner ETJ
Shaft length* × Shaft diameter mm LH 496.0 × 24
RH 576.4 × 24
NOTE: *: Indicates the distance between the centre of each joint.
ACB05765
Driveshaft
Rear hub
Ball bearing
Rear hub
Magnetic
encoder
Oil seal
ACC02148 AB

27-4 REAR AXLE
DIFFERENTIAL
DIFFERENTIAL
M2270001000797
With the introduction of the electronic control 4WD, The following features are also available.
the electronic control coupling has been installed in • Aluminium differential carrier has been adopted
front of the differential. for weight saving.
The electronic control coupling transfers the drive • Optimization of the hypoid gear ratio reduces the
force to the rear wheels by pushing the clutch in torque loss.
according to the strength of the magnetic attraction • Adoption of the hypoid gear with the same teeth
generated by the magnetic coil (For more details, height realizes the downsizing and increases the
refer to Electronic Control 4WD P.27-6). strength of the coupling.
SPECIFICATIONS
Item Specification
Reduction gear type Hypoid gear
Reduction ratio 2.352
Differential gear type Side gear Straight bevel gear × 2
(Type × Quantity) Pinion gear Straight bevel gear × 2
Number of teeth Drive gear 40
Drive pinion 17
Side gear 14
Pinion gear 10
Gear oil MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE Approx. 0.4 L
super hypoid gear oil API classification
GL-5, SAE 80W
ACB05767
Electronic control coupling Equal altitude

Differential toothed gear
Bevel gear
Clutch Electromagnet
ACC02152AB

REAR AXLE 27-5
DIFFERENTIAL
DIFFERENTIAL MOUNT
Rear suspension
crossmember
Upper stopper
Rear differential
mount insulator
Lower
Upper stopper
stopper
Rear differential mount
Weight front bracket (LH)
Rear differential mount

front bracket (RH)
Electronic control coupling
Lower stopper
Differential carrier
Weight
ACC02383 AB
The front side of the differential carrier is installed to

the rear suspension crossmember via rear differen-
tial mount front bracket (LH/RH). The rear side of the
differential carrier is installed to the rear suspension
crossmember via rear differential mount insulator. In
this way, the adoption of the three-point support type
differential mount and the optimization of the layout
reduce the vibration and noise.

27-6 REAR AXLE
ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED 4WD

GENERAL INFORMATION • Under severe driving condition, the system is pro-
M2270000101136 tected by minimizing the limitation force of the dif-
• Electronically controlled 4WD has been adopted ferential.
to ensure the on-road performance, achieve • During high-speed driving, the fuel efficiency is
lighter and smaller body, and realize better fuel improved by reducing the limitation force of the
economy. differential.
• The electronically controlled 4WD controls the • The following drive modes are available accord-
torque of the electronic control coupling located ing to the drivers' preference to provide the enjoy-
between the propeller shaft and rear differential. ment of selecting functions.
This strategy is enabled by varying the torque
Drive Control content Appeal point
distribution to the front and rear wheels from the
mode
status closer to the front wheel drive to the status
closer to the direct coupling 4WD and realizes the 4WD Minimizes the High fuel efficiency
optimal drive force according to the various driv- ECO limitation force of mode. This mode is
ing conditions. the differential. ordinary driven on
AIMS OF DEVELOPMENT efficient 2WD and
provides 4WD
Lightweight and simple construction of the electroni-
performance on
cally controlled 4WD achieves good fuel efficiency
wheel slipping
and provides enjoyment of selecting the drive mode.
conditions.
FUNCTION 4WD Increases the Normal mode. This
• The adoption of the electronic control coupling AUTO limitation force of mode achieves
the differential adequate 4WD
prevents the tight corner braking phenomenon*
according to the performance on
and satisfies the traction performance.
different rotation various conditions,
NOTE: *Tight corner braking indicates the following speed of the front dried pavement, wet
condition. When the 4WD vehicle turns sharply and rear wheels road, snow road, etc.
on a pavement at low speed (ex. parallel park- and the throttle
ing), the rotational radius of the front and rear position.
wheels differs, and this difference can no longer
be compensated by the tyre slippage. At this 4WD Further increases High traction mode.
time, the driver feels as if the brake was applied. LOCK the limitation force This mode excels at
• The electronically controlled 4WD receives the of the differential rough road driving
signals of the throttle position and vehicle speed compared to the and escape from
4WD AUTO. stuck conditions, in
via CAN* communication protocol, detects the addition, realizes
vehicle driving condition and operation of the strong 4WD driving
driver, and distributes the proper torque to the from low speed to
rear wheels. high speed on
NOTE: *: For more information about CAN (Control- ordinary road.
ler Area Network), refer to GROUP 54C P.54C-2.

REAR AXLE 27-7
Steering wheel sensor
Combination meter
ABS/ASC-ECU
ECO switch
4WD switch
Engine-ECU ETACS-ECU Electronic control coupling
4WD-ECU CVT-ECU or A/T-ECU

Diagnosis connector
< Standard meter> < High contrast meter>

Drive mode indicator Drive mode display
ACB05569 AC
System component and function

Parts name Functional description
Engine ECU Sends the following signals required by 4WD-ECU via CAN
communication.
• Engine torque signal
• Throttle position signal
• Engine speed signal
CVT-ECU or Sends the following signals required by 4WD-ECU via CAN
A/T-ECU communication.
• Gear position signal
ABS/ASC-ECU Sends the following signals required by 4WD-ECU via CAN
communication.
• ABS sensor signal (4 wheels speed signal)
• ABS/ASC operation signal
• 4WD limitation torque signal

27-8 REAR AXLE

Steering wheel sensor Sends the following signals required by 4WD-ECU via CAN
communication.
• Steering angle signal
4WD switch Sends the drive mode switch signal (4WD) to 4WD-ECU.
ECO switch Sends the ECO ON/OFF signal to 4WD-ECU.
ETACS-ECU Receives drive mode-related information (4WD ECO, 4WD AUTO, 4WD
LOCK), failure information and protection information from the 4WD-ECU,
and then sends them to the combination meter.
4WD-ECU Calculates the optimum differential limitation force judging from the vehicle
condition and present drive mode based on the signals from each ECU and
switch, and controls the current value flown to the electronic control
coupling.
Controls the indicators (4WD ECO, 4WD AUTO, 4WD LOCK) in the
combination meter.
Controls the self-diagnostic function and fail-safe function.
Controls diagnostic function (Compatible with M.U.T.-III).
Electronic control coupling Transmits the torque corresponding to the current value controlled by
4WD-ECU to the rear wheels.
Drive mode indicator Integrated in the combination meter, and indicates the selected drive mode.
• When the 4WD system fails or is protected, the "4WD-E" or"LOCK"
indicator will flash simultaneously or alternately, and the system will
enter the mode which protects automatically the drive system
components, and the drive mode changeover with the 4WD switch will
become unavailable. <Standard meter>
• When the 4WD system fails or is protected, a message will be
displayed, and the system will enter the mode which protects
automatically the drive system components, and the drive mode
changeover with the 4WD switch will become unavailable. <High
contrast meter>
• The drive mode signal from 4WD-ECU is sent to the combination meter
via ETACS-ECU using CAN communication.
Diagnosis connector Outputs the diagnosis code and establishes the communication with
M.U.T.-III.

REAR AXLE 27-9
System configuration
Engine-ECU ABS/ASC-ECU ETACS-ECU Combination meter

CAN-C CAN-C-Mid
CVT-ECU
Steering wheel CAN-C
or
sensor
A/T-ECU
Diagnosis
connector
4WD-ECU
Engine
Electronic control coupling

Transmission
4WD switch
NOTE:The dashed line indicates CAN communication lines (CAN-C, CAN-C-Mid). ACC00455 AC

27-10 REAR AXLE
Control schematic diagram

4WD switch
(4WD ECO
4WD AUTO
4WD-ECU
4WD LOCK) Coupling torque
Engine-ECU CAN-C CAN-C-Mid

· Engine r/min
Combination meter
· Engine torque
ETACS-ECU · Drive mode indicator
or display
ABS/ASC-ECU · Fail information
· 4 wheels speed
· 4WD torque reduction
requirement Diagnosis output
· Yaw rate, longitudinal
and lateral acceleration
ETACS-ECU
ABS/ASC-ECU
· Vehicle information
CAN-C · Drive mode
· Key position
· Coupling torque
· Battery voltage
· Ambient temperature
· Stop lamp switch
CVT-ECU or A/T-ECU
· Gear position
Steering wheel sensor NOTE:The dashed line indicates CAN communication

· Steering angle lines (CAN-C, CAN-C-Mid).
ACC00456 AC

REAR AXLE 27-11
Electronically controlled 4WD electric circuit diagram
Fusible link Ignition switch(IG1) Fusible link
ETACS-ECU
(Fuse) ETACS-ECU 15 A
(Fuse)
IG1
relay
Electronic control
10 A 7.5 A coupling solenoid
4WD-ECU
4WD switch
ABS/ASC CVT-ECU or
Engine-ECU
-ECU A/T-ECU
ETACS-ECU
Steering Diagnosis
LCD wheel sensor connector
4WD ECO
4WD AUTO
4WD LOCK
Combination meter
NOTE:The dashed line indicates CAN communication lines. ACB05564 AD
4WD-ECU 1. Communication function

M2270000500090 • CAN communication with other ECUs (Engine
FUNCTION ECU, CVT-ECU, A/T-ECU, ABS/ASC-ECU,
The main functions of 4WD-ECU are as follows: steering wheel sensor, ETACS)

27-12 REAR AXLE
• Communication with drive mode switch: The • Compares the command current value from
signal from the drive mode switch changes CPU with the monitored current and checks if
the drive mode. they agree.
• Combination meter display: Drive mode is dis- 4. External wire connection check
played. • Checks if the input and output of each exter-
2. Coupling control function nal wire connection is open, shorted, or stuck.
• Current output: Differential control function of
the electronic control coupling according to DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION
the vehicle conditions 4WD-ECU has the following functions for easier sys-
3. ECU self-diagnosis function tem checks. All of the following items can be diag-
• Initial check: ROM check, relay check, etc. nosed using the M.U.T.-III.
• Recording function of diagnosis codes and • Diagnosis code set
freeze frame data in case of failure • Service data output
• System shutdown function after failure detec- • Actuator test
tion, "4WD-E" and "LOCK" indicator warning • Freeze frame data output
<standard meter> and message indication on DIAGNOSIS CODE SET
display <high contrast meter>
Using M.U.T.-III, the diagnosis code (information of
• Normal control: Malfunction of CPU power
failures generated in the electronically controlled
supply, relay check, open or short circuit of
4WD system) can be read. When a failure occurs,
the I/O signal, abnormal CAN communication
4WD-ECU sets the diagnosis code for that failure in
the nonvolatile memory (EEPROM*), so the recorded
FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION information will not be erased even if the battery is
FAILURE DETECTION disconnected.
4WD-ECU performs the following checks at a timing NOTE: .
shown in the chart below. 4WD-ECU determines the • *EEPROM (Electrical Erasable & Programmable
malfunction occurred when the failure detection con- ROM): Special type of memory that can be pro-
ditions are met, and it sets the diagnosis code and grammed or erased electrically
executes the countermeasures for trouble. When the • For the diagnosis code output items of the elec-
failure resume conditions are met, ECU determines tronically controlled 4WD, refer to Workshop
the status is normal, and resumes the system. Manual.
NOTE: For the fail-safe specification, refer to Work-
shop Manual. SERVICE DATA OUTPUT
Using M.U.T.-III, the data (input data from each ECU
Start-up (Initial check just after the ignition
and switch) used for control by the electronically con-
switch is turned ON.)
trolled 4WD system can be read.
1. CPU check
NOTE: For each service data item, refer to Work-
• Performs the ROM and RAM check.
shop Manual.
2. Actuator check
• After CPU check has been completed, check ACTUATOR TEST
the driving voltage with the actuator relay
M.U.T.-III can forcibly drive the actuators (electronic
OFF.
control coupling solenoid and drive mode indicator)
Always (During ignition ON status other than ini- controlled by the electronically controlled 4WD sys-
tial check operation) tem.
1. CPU check NOTE: For the actuator test specification, refer to
• Performs CAN communication and interactive Workshop Manual.
check between CPUs.
2. Power supply check FREEZE FRAME DATA OUTPUT
• Monitors the CPU supply voltage and checks M.U.T.-III can read the freeze frame data (driving
if the voltage is within specifications. conditions when the failure occurs) set when the
3. Actuator check diagnosis code is detected.
• Checks if the actuator relay turns ON accord- NOTE: For freeze frame data items, refer to Work-
ing to the control. shop Manual.

REAR AXLE 27-13
4WD SWITCH If the ECO switch is turned on during 4WD AUTO

M2270001300022 mode, the drive mode will switch into 4WD ECO to
The 4WD switch has been installed on the floor con- reduce fuel consumption. When the ECO switch is
sole. When the 4WD switch is operated with the igni- turned off during 4WD ECO mode, the drive mode
tion switch ON, the drive mode can alternate 4WD will return to 4WD AUTO. During 4WD LOCK, the
ECO, 4WD AUTO or 4WD LOCK. system does not switch the drive mode regardless of
the ECO switch position.
ELECTRONIC CONTROL COUPLING

M2270000700072
FEATURES
The electronic control coupling realizes the highly reliable 4WD system with lighter weight and simpler con-
struction.
CONSTRUCTION
Rear differential
Pilot cam
Pilot clutch Magnet coil
Armature
Main cam
Ball
Front housing
Rear housing
Drive pinion
Main clutch Shaft AC505099AC
The electronic control coupling is comprised of the • The main clutch and pilot clutch are assembled to
front housing, main clutch, main cam, ball, pilot cam, the front housing on the outer side and to the
armature, pilot clutch, rear housing, magnetic coil, shaft on the inner side (The pilot clutch is
and shaft. installed via the pilot cam).
• The front housing is joined to the propeller shaft • The shaft is engaged via serrations with the drive
and rotates along with the shaft. pinion of the rear differential.

27-14 REAR AXLE
OPERATION
Coupling stops (2WD: Magnetic coil de-energized.)
Main clutch
Pilot clutch
Front housing Magnet coil
Propeller shaft
Shaft Drive pinion

(Rear differential)
AC505106AE
The drive force from the transfer is transmitted to the

front housing connected to the propeller shaft. The
drive force is also transferred to the pilot clutch and
the outer side of the main clutch assembled to the
front housing. Because the pilot clutch and the main
clutch are not engaged with the magnetic coil
de-energized, the drive force is not transferred to the
shaft and the drive pinion of the rear differential.

REAR AXLE 27-15
Coupling operates (4WD: Magnetic coil energized.)

Main cam
Main clutch Armature

Magnetic field
Pilot clutch
Front housing
Magnet coil
Rear housing
Propeller shaft
Shaft Ball Pilot cam Drive pinion

(Rear differential) AC505106AD
Pilot cam
Main cam
Ball
AC507947AD
• The drive force from the transfer is transmitted to drive force and that of the main cam not applied
the front housing connected to the propeller with the drive force become different. The ball
shaft. The drive force is also transferred to the slides along the curved space between the pilot
pilot clutch and the outer side of the main clutch cam and main cam by the rotational speed differ-
assembled to the front housing. When the mag- ence and pushes the pilot cam and main cam.
netic coil is energized, the magnetic field is gen- Then, the main clutch is pushed toward the main
erated among the rear housing, pilot clutch, and cam to engage. When the main clutch is
armature. The magnetic field induces the pilot engaged, the drive force is transferred to the rear
clutch and armature to engage the pilot clutch. wheels via the shaft and the drive pinion of the
When the pilot clutch is engaged, the drive force rear differential.
is transferred to the pilot cam. When there is a • By controlling the current applied to the magnetic
difference in rotation speed between the front and coil, the amount of the drive force transferred to
rear wheels (i.e. rotation speed of the propeller the rear wheels can be controlled within the
shaft is different from that of the drive pinion), the range of 0 to 100%.
rotation speed of the pilot cam applied with the

NOTES

31-1
GROUP 31
WHEEL AND TYRE

CONTENTS

31-2 WHEEL AND TYRE
GENERAL INFORMATION
GENERAL INFORMATION
M2310000102022
The wheels and tyres of the following specifications
have been established.
SPECIFICATIONS
Road wheel and tyre
<2000>
Item Standard Option <4WD>
Wheel Type Steel type Aluminium type Aluminium type
Size 16 × 6.5JJ 16 × 6.5J 18 × 7J
Amount of wheel offset mm 38 38 38
PCD mm 114.3 114.3 114.3
Tyre Size 215/70R16 100H 215/70R16 100H 225/55R18 98H
<2400>
Item Standard Option
Wheel Type Aluminium type Aluminium type
Size 16 × 6.5J 18 × 7J
Amount of wheel offset mm 38 38
PCD mm 114.3 114.3
Tyre Size 215/70R16 100H 225/55R18 98H
NOTE: PCD indicates the pitch circle diameter of the wheel installation holes.
Spare wheel and tyre

Item Standard Option
Wheel Type Steel type Aluminium type
Size 16 × 6.5JJ 18 × 7J
Amount of wheel offset mm 38 38
PCD mm 114.3 114.3
Tyre Size 215/70R16 100H 225/55R18 98H
NOTE: PCD indicates the pitch circle diameter of the wheel installation holes.

32-1
GROUP 32
POWER PLANT
MOUNT
CONTENTS

32-2 POWER PLANT MOUNT
GENERAL INFORMATION
GENERAL INFORMATION
M2320000101503
New pendulum engine mounting system reduces • Roll-rod stopper has two rubber-to-metal bush-
noise and vibration, which has the following features. ings including large voided bushing and reduces
• The power train mass is supported in line with the vibration and noise doubly.
axis of inertia and torque reaction is controlled by • Enlarged right-hand engine mount, incorporating
roll-rod stopper with longitudinal force in stead of a hydraulic chamber, reduces transmission of
vertical force, sensitive to noise and vibration. noise and vibration in common use and
enhances ride quality on rough roads.
Engine mounting
insulator
Engine roll stopper rod

assembly Front suspension crossmember
Transmission mounting
insulator
ACB05015 AB

33-1
GROUP 33
FRONT
SUSPENSION
CONTENTS

33-2 FRONT SUSPENSION
GENERAL INFORMATION
GENERAL INFORMATION
M2330000101979
The well-proven MacPherson strut type suspension • The newly adopted polyurethane bump stopper
has been adopted. Various components such as the absorbs high load without transmitting sharp
strut assembly and the coil spring have been modi- vibrations to the bodyshell.
fied or fine-tuned in order to enhance driving comfort, • The newly added cup does not rotate together
compared with the previous model. with the strut. As this stationary cup holds the
MAIN FEATURES bump stopper, Therefore, the friction on the top
• The thicker upper spring pad and lower spring surface of the bump stopper can be suppressed,
pad reduce high-frequency vibration and road thus eliminating sources of noise.
noise. • The extended dust cover bellows suppresses
dust intrusion through absorber oil seal.
• The newly designed barrel-shaped springs
reduce weight.

FRONT SUSPENSION 33-3
GENERAL INFORMATION
Coil spring and strut assembly

Strut insulator assembly
(Cup for stopper fixation)
Strut bearing
Upper spring pad
Bump stopper
Coil spring
Lower spring pad

Coil spring
Strut
Stabilizer link
Strut assembly
Coil spring
Stabilizer bar
Strut assembly
Lower arm assembly
Front axle No.1 crossmember
ACC00556 AB
SPECIFICATIONS
SUSPENSION SYSTEM
Item Specification
Suspension type MacPherson strut with coil spring
WHEEL ALIGNMENT
Item Specification
Camber 0°20'
Caster 2°35'
Kingpin inclination 12°45'

33-4 FRONT SUSPENSION
GENERAL INFORMATION
Item Specification
Toe-in At the centre of tyre tread mm 1
Toe-in angle (per wheel) 0°02'

34-1
GROUP 34
REAR SUSPENSION
CONTENTS

34-2 REAR SUSPENSION
GENERAL INFORMATION
GENERAL INFORMATION
M2340000101657
New blade multi-link rear suspension is an evolution • New designed blade suspension has a slight pas-
of the current rear suspension to enhance stability sive toe-steer effect and provides safer handling.
and save unsprung weight. Springs and shock • Extended toe control links provide smooth sus-
absorbers are optimised and fine-tuned for well- bal- pension stroke feeling and enhance ride comfort.
anced handling, stability and ride comfort. • The fine-tuned voided bushes pressed in the
blade trailing arm reduce harshness and absorb
MAIN FEATURES
vibration.
• Newly designed stamping arms reduce unsprung
weight which offer greater handling and ride com-
fort.
SPECIFICATIONS
SUSPENSION SYSTEM
Item Specification
Suspension type Trailing arm type multi-link
WHEEL ALIGNMENT
Item Specification
Camber −0°30'
Toe-in mm 3

REAR SUSPENSION 34-3
GENERAL INFORMATION
<2WD>
Shock absorber assembly
Upper arm
Coil spring
Upper arm
Stabilizer bar
Coil spring
Trailing arm Rear suspension

crossmember
Control link
Trailing arm ACB05753 AB
<4WD>
Upper arm Coil spring

Upper arm
Stabilizer bar
Coil spring
Trailing arm
Control link
Rear suspension
crossmember
Trailing arm ACB05754AB

NOTES

35-1
GROUP 35
SERVICE BRAKE
CONTENTS
BASIC BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35A
ANTI-SKID BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35B
ACTIVE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM (ASC). . . . . . . . . . . . 35C

NOTES

35A-1
GROUP 35A
BASIC BRAKE
SYSTEM
CONTENTS
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . 35A-2 MASTER CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35A-3

BRAKE BOOSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35A-3
CONSTRUCTION DESCRIPTION . . . 35A-3 FRONT BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35A-3
REAR BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35A-4

35A-2 BASIC BRAKE SYSTEM
GENERAL INFORMATION
GENERAL INFORMATION
M2350000101755
Brake systems with higher reliability and durability • The installation of 16-inch ventilated disc brake
have achieved distinguished braking performance. on the front axle and 16-inch solid disc brake on
FEATURES the rear axle achieves the secure braking force
and direct braking feeling.
IMPROVEMENT OF BRAKING PERFORM-
ANCE IMPROVEMENT IN SAFETY
• In addition to the 10-inch single brake booster, • Diagonal split (X-type) brake lines is adopted.
the small and long stroke-type master cylinder • Audible wear indicators are used on the front and
has been adopted to achieve the downsizing and rear brake pads to warn the driver of wear limit.
secure the assist force.
Brake booster
Reserve tank
Hydraulic unit
Brake pedal Rear disc brake

Master cylinder
Front disc brake ACC00001AB
SPECIFICATIONS
Item Specification
Master cylinder Type Tandem type
I.D. (Inner diameter) mm 20.6
Brake booster Type Vacuum type, single
Size inch 10
Boost ratio 8.5
Rear wheel hydraulic control method EBD (Electronic control braking force distribution)

BASIC BRAKE SYSTEM 35A-3
CONSTRUCTION DESCRIPTION
Item Specification
Front disc brake Type Floating caliper, 1-piston, ventilated disc
Brake disc effective dia. × thickness 241.6 × 26
mm
Cylinder I.D. mm 57.1
Brake pad thickness mm 10.0
Clearance adjustment Automatic adjustment
Rear disc brake Type Floating caliper with parking brake mechanism
integrated, 1-piston, solid disc
Brake disc effective dia. × thickness 259.8 × 10
mm
Cylinder I.D. mm 41.3
Brake pad thickness mm 9.0
Clearance adjustment Automatic adjustment
Brake fluid DOT3 or DOT4
MASTER CYLINDER BRAKE BOOSTER
M2350001000673 M2350002000988
The master cylinder is a tandem-type, with a struc- 10-inch brake booster has been installed.
ture that emphasizes safety.
FRONT BRAKE
M2350003000947
<Brake pads>
Wear Front brake (caliper assembly)
indicator Brake disc (ventilate disc)
Inner pad
Outer pad
<Normal> <At wear limit>

Brake disc Brake disc
Pad Pad
Wear
Wear indicator indicator
ACC00085AB
• The outer disc type brake disc which can be tight- • The inner brake pads with audible wear indicator
ened together with the wheel has been intro- are adopted which warn the driver of the wear
duced for better serviceability. limit.
• The 1-piston ventilate disc brake has been
adopted.

35A-4 BASIC BRAKE SYSTEM
REAR BRAKE
M2350004000917
<Brake pads>
Inner pad
Rear brake assembly

Outer pad
Brake disc
Wear
indicator
<Normal> <At wear limit>

Brake disc Brake disc
Pad Pad
Wear
Wear indicator indicator
ACC00071AB
• The outer disc type brake disc which can be tight- • The inner brake pads with audible wear indicator
ened together with the wheel has been intro- are adopted which warn the driver of the wear
duced for better serviceability. limit.
• The 1-piston solid disc brake with parking brake
mechanism integrated has been adopted.

35B-1
GROUP 35B
ANTI-SKID
BRAKING SYSTEM
(ABS)
CONTENTS
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . 35B-2 SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35B-7

ACTUATORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35B-7
CONSTRUCTION DESCRIPTION . . . 35B-7 ABS-ECU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35B-8

35B-2 ANTI-SKID BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)
GENERAL INFORMATION
GENERAL INFORMATION
M2351000101554
The 4ABS ensures directional stability and control • For wiring harness saving and secure data com-
during hard braking. munication, CAN *2 bus has been adopted as a
This ABS uses a 4-sensor system that controls all tool of communication with another ECU.
four wheels independently of each other. • Fail-safe function which ensures that safety is
• EBD *1control can obtain ideal rear wheel brake maintained.
force. • Diagnostic function which provides improved
• The magnetic encoder for wheel speed detection serviceability.
has been installed instead of the rotor as the NOTE: .
wheel speed sensor.
• *1: EBD (Electronic Brake-force Distribution)
• *2: For more details about CAN (Controller Area
Network), refer to GROUP 54C P.54C-2.
Specifications
Item Specifications
ABS control type 4 sensors
Wheel speed sensor Magnetic encoder Front 86 (N pole: 43, S pole: 43)
Rear 96 (N pole: 48, S pole: 48)
Type Semiconductor

ANTI-SKID BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS) 35B-3
GENERAL INFORMATION
<Standard meter> <High contrast meter>
7
8 8
9
6 6
10
4, 5, 11
3
<4WD>
1 2
1 2
1
2
ACB06010 AC
MAIN COMPONENTS AND FUNCTIONS

Name of part Number Outline of function
Sensor Wheel speed sensor 1 Outputs the frequency signal in proportion to the rotation
speed of each wheel to ABS-ECU.
Magnetic encoder for 2 When the magnetic encoder for wheel speed detection (a
wheel speed detection plate on which north and south pole sides of the magnets are
arranged alternately) rotates, the wheel speed sensor
outputs frequency pulse signal in proportion to each wheel
speed.
Stop lamp switch 3 Outputs the signal indicating whether the brake pedal is
depressed or not to ABS-ECU.
G sensor <4WD> 4 Incorporated in ABS-ECU, and detects the longitudinal
acceleration of the vehicle.

GENERAL INFORMATION
Name of part Number Outline of function

Actuator Hydraulic unit 5 Drives the solenoid valve using the signal from ABS-ECU,
and controls the brake fluid pressure for each wheel.
ABS warning lamp 6 Informs the driver of the system status by illuminating,
flashing, or turning off the warning lamp according to the
signal from ABS-ECU.
ABS warning display 7 Informs the driver of the system status by illuminating or
turning off the warning display according to the signal from
ABS-ECU.
Brake warning lamp 8 Used as the warning lamp for the parking brake, brake fluid
level, and EBD control. Informs the driver of the system
status by illuminating or turning off the warning lamp
according to the signal from ABS-ECU.
Brake warning display 9 Used as the warning display for brake fluid level, and EBD
control. Informs the driver of the system status by
illuminating or turning off the warning display according to
the signal from ABS-ECU.
Diagnosis connector 10 Outputs the diagnosis code and establishes the
communication with M.U.T.-III.
ABS-ECU 11 Controls actuators (described above) based on the signals
coming from each sensor.
Controls the self-diagnosis and fail-safe functions.
Controls the diagnosis function (M.U.T.-III compatible).

GENERAL INFORMATION
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
Wheel speed sensor (FL) FR solenoid valve (OUT)

FR solenoid valve (IN)
Wheel speed sensor (RL)
FL solenoid valve (OUT)
Wheel speed sensor (RR) FL solenoid valve (IN)
RR solenoid valve (OUT)
Wheel speed sensor (FR)
RR solenoid valve (IN)
Stop lamp switch ABS-ECU RL solenoid valve (OUT)
RL solenoid valve (IN)
ABS-ECU power supply Combination meter and
multi information display
· ABS warning lamp
· Brake warning lamp
G sensor · ABS warning display
<4WD> · Brake warning display
Diagnosis connector
CAN-BUS LINE
Front-right Rear-right
wheel (FR) wheel (RR)
CAN-BUS LINE ETACS-ECU
Wheel Wheel
speed speed
sensor sensor
(FR) (RR)
Stop lamp switch
Hydraulic unit
Wheel Wheel
speed speed
sensor sensor
(FL) (RL)
Front-left Rear-left
wheel (FL) wheel (RL)
ACC00359AB
NOTE: Dashed lines indicate the CAN bus communi-

cation lines.

GENERAL INFORMATION
ABS ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM
Fusible Fusible Ignition

link No.4 link No.2 switch (IG1) or
OSS-ECU (IG1)
14 CAN drive CAN drive

circuit circuit
15A
11 OFF ON
Field Effect 10A Interface Interface

15
Transistor circuit circuit
10A
Stop lamp
switch
ON
OFF
4WD-
Diagnosis ECU
connector
Engine-
ECU
Hydraulic unit
Solenoid valve
Motor
Solenoid valve
power supply CAN transceiver
Motor power supply
ABS BRAKE circuit
Motor power supply G sensor <4WD> Power supply CPU
LED drive LCD
circuit (ABS, BRAKE)
Solenoid valve
power supply GND GND
Rheostat
ABS-ECU Combination
meter
(FL) (FR) (RL) (RR)
Wheel speed sensor ACB05777 AB

SENSOR
M2351001001000
WHEEL SPEED SENSOR

FRONT REAR <2WD> REAR <4WD>
Front wheel speed sensor
Rear wheel Rear wheel
speed sensor speed sensor
Encoder for wheel

Encoder for wheel Encoder for wheel speed detection
speed detection speed detection
ACC00565AB
The wheel speed detecting section is a kind of a The front wheel speed detecting section consists of
pulse generator. It consists of the magnetic encoder the front wheel speed sensor mounted on the
for wheel speed detection (a plate on which north knuckle and the magnetic encoder for wheel speed
and south pole sides of the magnets are arranged detection which is press-fitted together with the oil
alternately) which rotates at the same speed of the seal to the front wheel bearing. The rear wheel
wheel and the wheel speed sensor (semiconductor speed sensor consists of the rear wheel speed sen-
sensor). This sensor outputs frequency pulse signals sor mounted on the trailing arm assembly and the
in proportion to the wheel speed. magnetic encoder for wheel speed detection which is
press-fitted together with the oil seal to the rear
wheel bearing.
G SENSOR <4WD>
The G-sensor is incorporated in ABS-ECU, and ACTUATORS
detects longitudinal acceleration of a vehicle. M2351002000486
ABS WARNING LAMP, BRAKE WARNING LAMP

The ABS system informs the driver to the ABS sys-
tem status by illuminating, extinguishing, or flashing
the ABS warning lamp and brake warning lamp as
follows.
ABS warning lamp and brake warning lamp illumination or flashing pattern
State ABS warning lamp Brake warning lamp
Normal Correct − −
Faulty ABS failure Illuminates −
EBD failure Illuminates Illuminates
When M.U.T.-III is Actuator not operated − −
connected Actuator operated Flash (2Hz) −
After the actuator is Illuminates* Illuminates*
activated forcibly *

NOTE: .
• *: The ABS warning lamp and the brake warning lamp stay on until the ignition switch is turned to the
LOCK (OFF) position.
• When the brake fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir tank is lower than the specified value, or when the
parking brake lever is pulled, the brake warning lamp turns ON.
ABS-ECU
M2351003001028
• By integrating ABS-ECU into the hydraulic unit, NOTE: *: The brake warning lamp is used as the
no wiring harness for sending drive signal of the EBD control warning lamp.
solenoid valve and pump motor is required, • ABS-ECU detects vehicle speed from the signals
assuring higher reliability. of the wheel speed sensor and its incorporated G
• By incorporating the G-sensor <4WD>, no sensor sensor <4WD>, recognizes the wheel rotation
harness is required, enhancing the reliability. status, estimates the wheel slip condition based
• Self-diagnostic and memory functions are inte- on the preprogrammed algorithm, and then con-
grated into ABS-ECU. If any malfunction is trols the solenoid valve in the hydraulic unit so
detected by the self-diagnostic function, that the wheels do not lock.
ABS-ECU activates a fail-safe function and illumi-
nates the ABS warning lamp and brake warning
lamp*.

ABS fluid pressure control
ABS control cycle
Increase
Hold
Decrease
Wheel speed
Estimated vehicle speed
A C
D
Actual vehicle speed
a
Brake pressure
e
d
b
c
AC506830AB
1. The ABS-ECU calculates the speed and deceler- 3. When the vehicle deceleration and wheel speed
ation of each wheel based on the signals from the begin recovery, and the vehicle speed reaches
four wheel speed sensors and the G sensor the point B, ECU outputs the pressure hold signal
<4WD> incorporated in the ABS-ECU, and esti- to maintain the wheel cylinder fluid pressure.
mates the vehicle speed at that time. (between b and c)
2. When the brake pedal is depressed, the brake 4. When the wheel speed deceleration is further
fluid pressure applied to the wheel cylinder recovered and overpasses the point C, ECU
increases, and the wheel speed decreases. determines that the wheel lock possibility has
When the difference between the wheel speed been eliminated and increases the brake fluid
and vehicle speed increases, and the vehicle pressure by outputting the pressure increase sig-
deceleration goes below the specified value nal again. (between c and d)
(Point A), ECU determines that the wheels are 5. Brake fluid pressure is controlled by repeating the
about to be locked. At this time, ECU reduces the increase and hold of the pressure. (between d
brake fluid pressure by outputting the pressure and e)
decrease signal to the solenoid valves (IN, OUT). 6. When the wheel deceleration goes below the
(between a and b) threshold again, ABS-ECU controls the brake
fluid pressure by repeating the cycle (Step 2 to 5).

EBD fluid pressure control

EBD control is activated in a range with lower slip tain level or more, EBD increases, holds, and
ratio where ABS is disabled. EBD calculates vehicle decreases the pressure at the rear wheel control
deceleration and slip amount of the four wheels solenoid valve in the hydraulic unit, and then adjusts
based on the wheel speed sensor signal. If the rear rear wheel brake fluid pressure fairly close to an
wheel speed differs from the vehicle speed by a cer- ideal distribution curve.
EBD operating conceptual design
Braking force distribution

by EBD control
Ideal distribution curve when
seated by fixed persons
Rear braking force

Braking Force
Braking force distribution curve Improved
by the existing proportioning valve
Ideal distribution curve when seated by one persons
Front braking force
AC208548AB
INITIAL CHECK NOTE: *: Initial startup indicates a first startup

ABS-ECU performs the following initial checks using after the system has started.
the diagnostic functions. ABS-ECU illuminates the 2. Wheel speed sensor check
ABS warning lamp for 3 seconds (including the initial ABS-ECU checks for any wheels that have not
check) * after the ignition switch is turned ON. If any received wheel speed sensor signal from the
malfunction is detected, ABS-ECU continues illumi- startup.
nating the ABS warning lamp and disables ABS con-
trol. CONSTANT CHECK
NOTE: *: The ABS warning lamp may stay on after ABS-ECU constantly checks the following items.
the ignition switch is turned ON until the startup vehi- 1. ABS-ECU
cle speed reaches approximately 10 km/h. As far as (1) Performs self-diagnosis in ECU.
ABS-ECU memorizes any diagnosis code related to
(2) Checks for abnormal output voltage of G
the wheel speed sensor malfunction recorded during
sensor, and detects open or short circuit in the
the previous ignition ON status, ABS-ECU continues
G sensor <4WD>.
illuminating the ABS warning lamp until it verifies that
the malfunction for that code is resolved (startup (3) Checks the output voltage for G sensor, and
check). determines that the G sensor is stuck when
the output voltage exceeding the specification
continues for a certain period or more <4WD>.
STARTUP CHECK
2. ECU power supply
When the startup vehicle speed reaches approxi-
mately 10 km/h, ABS-ECU performs the following Checks if ECU power supply voltage stays within
checks. the operational range.
1. Motor, solenoid valve check (Initial startup* only) 3. Wheel speed sensor
(1) Monitors the output voltage of the sensor
Turns ON the motor relay in ECU, and checks the
signal wiring harness and checks for abnormal
pump motor operation. At the same time,
output voltage (open/short circuit).
ABS-ECU sequentially energizes each solenoid
valve in a very short period and checks the valve (2) Checks for any wheels that do not send pulse
operation. signal while the vehicle is in motion.

(3) Checks if wheel speed which is abnormally Checks that the ABS-ECU output signal and the
higher or lower than the vehicle speed is input. operating conditions of the pump motor and
4. Pump motor, solenoid valve solenoid valve agree with each other.
FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION
If any malfunction is detected by the self-diagnostic DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION
function, ABS-ECU illuminates the ABS warning ABS-ECU has the following functions for easier sys-
lamp and brake warning lamp*, and it disables ABS tem checks. The following items can be diagnosed
and EBD control. using M.U.T.-III.
NOTE: *: The brake warning lamp is used as EBD • Diagnosis code set
control warning lamp. • Service data output
• Actuator test
• Freeze frame data output

NOTES

35C-1
GROUP 35C
ACTIVE STABILITY
CONTROL SYSTEM
(ASC)
CONTENTS
ACTIVE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION OF CONSTRUCTION AND

(ASC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35C-2 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35C-16
GENERAL INFORMATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . 35C-2
CONSTRUCTION DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . 35C-8
FORWARD COLLISION MITIGATION
(FCM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35C-24
SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35C-8
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35C-24
ACTUATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35C-8
SYSTEM OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35C-27
ASC-ECU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35C-9

35C-2 ACTIVE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM (ASC)
ACTIVE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM (ASC)

GENERAL INFORMATION
M2355000100694
Active Stability Control System (ASC) has been • The emergency stop signal system (ESS)*1,
installed. which makes the hazard warning lamps flash
• The ASC system integrates the traction control quickly when the brake is applied suddenly, has
(TCL) function and stability control function. been adopted.
• When TCL detects the slip of the driving wheel • If your vehicle approaches the vehicle-travel-
(ex. during startup on low μ road), it automatically ling-ahead with the adaptive cruise control sys-
applies the brakes to the slipping driving wheel.
tem (ACC)*2 on, the FCM keeps the distance to
At the same time, TCL reduces the engine output
that vehicle by braking your vehicle automatically.
and prevents the wheel spin when it determines
that the engine torque is too high for the road sur- • The forward collision mitigation (FCM)*3 brakes
face μ. the vehicle automatically by controlling the brake
• When the ASC-ECU determines that the vehicle fluid pressure in order to reduce injury or damage
is in a dangerous condition, it reduces the engine due to collision accident or avoid a collision itself.
output and applies brake force to four wheels NOTE: .
independently to control the vehicle behaviour, • By the integrated control with the anti-skid brake
avoiding the critical state. system (ABS), the system stabilises the vehicle
• Hill start assist (HSA) function has been adopted attitude and at the same time secures the driving
to hold and prevent the roll back of the vehicle force.
when the vehicle is on a slope and the foot is • *1: ESS, refer to P.35C-9.
transferred from the brake pedal to the accelera- • *2: ACC, refer to GROUP 17 − Adaptive Cruise
tor pedal <Vehicles with HSA>. Control System P.17-8.
• The brake assist (BA) control determines an
emergency braking and increases the braking • : FCM, refer to P.35C-24.
*3
force for the drivers who cannot depress the

brake sufficiently when the emergency brake is
applied. This shortens the distance to stop or
reduces the collision speed.

ACTIVE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM (ASC) 35C-3
11
14
14 11 13, 15
9
10 12 15
9
13, 15
16
4, 7, 8, 20 3
5
<4WD>
17
6
1 2
2
18 1
1
2 19 <4WD>
ACC01951AB


Name of part Number Functional description
Sensor Wheel speed sensor 1 Outputs the frequency signal in proportion to the rotation
speed of each wheel to ASC-ECU.
Magnetic encoder for 2 The wheel speed sensor is a pulse generator. When the
wheel speed detection magnetic encoder for wheel speed detection (a plate on
which north and south pole sides of the magnets are
arranged alternately) rotates, it outputs frequency pulse
signal in proportion to each wheel speed.
Stop lamp switch 3 Outputs the signal indicating whether the brake pedal is
depressed or not to ASC-ECU.
G & yaw rate sensor 4 Is integrated in the ASC-ECU, detects the yaw rate and
longitudinal and lateral acceleration of a vehicle, and sends
a signal to the ASC-ECU.
Steering wheel sensor 5 Detects the steering angle of the steering wheel, and
outputs signal to ASC-ECU via the CAN bus line.
ASC OFF switch 6 Outputs the ON/OFF signal for ASC to ASC-ECU.
Brake fluid pressure 7 Integrated into the hydraulic unit, and outputs the signal for
sensor the brake fluid pressure in the master cylinder to ASC-ECU.
Actuator Hydraulic unit 8 Drives the solenoid valve using the signal from ASC-ECU,
ABS warning lamp 9 Informs the driver of the system status by illuminating,
flashing, or turning off the ABS warning lamp according to
the signal from ASC-ECU.
ABS warning display 10 Informs the driver of the system status by illuminating or
turning off the ABS warning display according to the signal
from ASC-ECU.
Brake warning lamp 11 Used as the brake warning lamp for the parking brake,
brake fluid level, and EBD control. Informs the driver of the
system status by illuminating or turning off the brake
warning lamp according to the signal from ASC-ECU.
Brake warning display 12 Used as the brake warning display for the brake fluid level,
and EBD control. Informs the driver of the system status by
illuminating or turning off the brake warning display
according to the signal from ASC-ECU.
ASC operation lamp 13 Informs the driver of the system status by flashing when the
system operates according to the signal from ASC-ECU.
ASC OFF lamp 14 Informs the driver of the system shutdown by illuminating by
the signal from ASC-ECU. Informs the driver that the brake
system overheats and the brake TCL stops by flashing the
ASC OFF lamp for the duration of approximately 2 Hz.
ASC warning display 15 TCL function and stability control function, HSA function use
and lamp the same display and lamp. Depending on the signal from
ASC-ECU, the ASC warning display and lamp informs the
driver of the system status by illuminating when the system
has malfunction (When the ASC warning display and lamp
is illuminated, the HSA function does not operate).
Diagnosis connector 16 Sets the diagnosis code and establishes the communication
with M.U.T.-III.


Engine-ECU 17 Controls the engine output based on the signal from
ASC-ECU.
CVT-ECU 18 CVT-ECU performs integrated control with ASC-ECU.
Output the gear position to ASC-ECU.
4WD-ECU* 19* Outputs the drive status to ASC-ECU.
4WD-ECU performs integrated control with ASC-ECU.
ASC control unit (ASC-ECU) 20 Controls the actuators (hydraulic unit) based on the signals
sent from sensors.
NOTE: .
• *: 4WD

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
Combination meter and multi
information display
· ABS warning lamp and display
· Brake warning lamp and display
· ASC operation lamp
Wheel speed sensor (FL) · ASC OFF lamp
· ASC warning display and lamp Parking brake
Wheel speed sensor (RL) switch
Wheel speed sensor (RR) Diagnosis

connector
Wheel speed sensor (FR) FR suction valve

FL suction valve
Master cylinder pressure sensor
FR cut valve
ASC-ECU power supply FL cut valve
ASC-ECU
FR solenoid valve (OUT)
· Engine-ECU
· CVT-ECU FR solenoid valve (IN)
· 4WD-ECU*1
FL solenoid valve (OUT)
· ACC/FCM-ECU*2
· Steering wheel sensor FL solenoid valve (IN)
· Stop lamp switch RR solenoid valve (OUT)
· ASC OFF switch
RR solenoid valve (IN)
Stop lamp drive*2 RL solenoid valve (OUT)
G and yaw rate
Stop lamp monitor*2 RL solenoid valve (IN)
sensor
· Engine-ECU
· CVT-ECU
· 4WD-ECU*1
Steering wheel sensor · ACC/FCM-ECU*2
Front-right wheel (FR) ETACS-ECU Rear-right wheel (RR)
Wheel Wheel
speed speed
sensor Stop lamp sensor
(FR) (RR)
ASC OFF switch
Stop lamp switch

Hydraulic
unit
Wheel Wheel
speed speed
sensor sensor
(FL) (RL)
Front-left wheel (FL) Rear-left wheel (RL)

ACC02099 AB
NOTE: .
• Dashed lines indicate the CAN bus line.
• *1: 4WD
• *2: Vehicles with ACC/FCM

ASC ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM
Ignition switch (IG1) or

Fusible link No.2 OSS-ECU (IG1)
ETACS-
ECU
CAN drive IG1 CAN drive

relay No.14
circuit circuit
No.11 15A
OFF ON
10A
Interface Interface
No.15 Field Effect Transistor
circuit circuit
10A
Steering
wheel
sensor Stop
lamp
switch
ON
OFF
Diagnosis 4WD-ECU
connector <4WD>
CVT-ECU
CAN
transceiver ASC
OFF circuit BRAKE ABS ASC OFF
ON
CPU
LED drive circuit
Engine-ECU ASC OFF Rheostat
switch LCD
Fusible link (ABS, ASC OFF,
No.4 Interface
circuit ASC WARNING, BRAKE)
Combination meter
Parking
ASC-ECU
ON
brake
<Vehicles with ACC/FCM> OFF switch
Motor power supply ASC-ECU
power supply G and yaw
Solenoid valve power supply rate sensor
(LH) (RH) (LH) (RH)

Solenoid valve
Front wheel speed sensor Rear wheel speed sensor Hydraulic unit
ACC02101 AB

CONSTRUCTION DIAGRAM The steering wheel sensor is attached to the column

switch, and detects the rotational angle of the steer-
SENSOR ing wheel.
M2355001100471
WHEEL SPEED SENSOR ASC OFF SWITCH

Refer to GROUP 35B − Sensor P.35B-2.
G & YAW RATE SENSOR ASC OFF switch
ACB04992AB
ASC-ECU The ASC OFF switch is installed on the side air outlet
(driver’s side). ASC functions can be disabled by
ACB06006AB pressing this switch for 3 seconds (The HSA and BA
The G & yaw rate sensor is integrated in the function operates even when the ASC system is
ASC-ECU, and detects the yaw rate and longitudinal turned OFF with the ASC OFF switch). Pressing this
and lateral acceleration of a vehicle. switch again resumes the ON status. As a counter-
measure for the stuck of the ASC OFF switch, press-
STEERING WHEEL SENSOR ing the ASC OFF switch for 15 seconds resumes the
system to the ON status.
When the ignition switch is turned from "LOCK"
(OFF) to ON position, ASC functions are constantly
in the ON status.
ACB04993AB
ASC OFF SWITCH OPERATION AND SYSTEM OPERATION

ASC OFF switch operation TCL Stability HSA BA
Brake control Engine control control
Not operated Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled
Operated (Press and hold for 3 Prohibited Prohibited Prohibited Enabled Enabled
seconds)
NOTE: The stability control is available when the
vehicle speed is 15 km/h or more.
ACTUATOR
M2355001200467
HYDRAULIC UNIT the ASC control.

The hydraulic unit incorporates the ABS control and NOTE: For the internal hydraulic circuit of the
ASC control. The cut valve, pressure relief valve, hydraulic unit, refer to P.35C-16.
suction valve, suction damper, G & yaw rate sensor
and pressure sensor have been added to the unit for

ASC OPERATION LAMP, ASC WARNING ASC warning display and lamp
DISPLAY AND LAMP, ASC OFF lamp • Turns ON when the system malfunction occurs.
The ASC system illuminates or flashes the ASC ASC OFF lamp
operation lamp, ASC warning display and lamp or • ASC-ECU detects the overheat of the brake
ASC OFF lamp in the following operation patterns, pads. When the brake TCL control is prohibited,
and informs the driver of the ASC system status. the ASC OFF lamp flashes in approximately 2
Hz.
ASC operation lamp
• Flashes in 4 Hz during the ASC control.
ASC operation lamp, ASC warning display and lamp, ASC OFF lamp illumination and flashing pat-
terns
State ASC operation lamp ASC warning display ASC OFF lamp
and lamp
Normal Normal − − −
Stability control Flashing (4 Hz) − −
operated
TCL operated Flashing (4 Hz) − −
HSA operated − − −
ASC is disabled ASC disabled − − Illuminates
by ASC OFF
switch
When the brake ASC-ECU informs − − Flashing (2 Hz)
pad the driver that the
temperature is brake TCL does
high not function.
Abnormal Stability control − Illuminates Illuminates
malfunction
TCL malfunction − Illuminates Illuminates
HSA malfunction − Illuminates −*
M.U.T.-III Actuator not − − −
connection operated
Actuator operated − Illuminates Illuminates
NOTE: * Illuminates if the TCL function or stability control function is defective when the HSA function is
defective. (HSA control prohibited)
ASC-ECU
M2357000100526
This ECU incorporates the ABS function, EBD func- The hydraulic units of the ASC and TCL systems
tion, HSA function, stability control function, TCL employ the automatic pressurisation function. These
function, brake assist control and emergency stop systems also incorporates G and yaw rate sensor
signal system. (integrated with ASC-ECU), steering wheel sensor,
and master cylinder pressure sensor (integrated with
hydraulic unit).

STABILITY CONTROL DESCRIPTION

ASC-ECU detects vehicle movement based on infor-
mation from various sensors and calculates a model
of ideal vehicle movement. ASC-ECU compares the
actual vehicle movement with the ideal vehicle
model, and manages the brake of the specific wheel
so that the actual vehicle movement gets close to the
ideal vehicle mode. It also controls the understeer or
oversteer condition by creating the yaw moment in
the vehicle.
Example of Stability Control function
<Generation of rotating force> <Generation of counter-rotating force>
Large braking
force
Large braking
force AC604152AB
The Stability Control manages the vehicle attitude by

creating a yaw moment from altering the balance
between the cornering force and each wheel's brak-
ing mechanism.
Example of the effect of control

Suppression of front wheel side slip Suppression of rear wheel side slip
Prevents the vehicle Prevents spinning

from getting out of course caused by
by front wheel side slip rear wheel side slip
AC604154AB

For example, on a slippery surface, if the vehicle moment (a restorative moment) is created to restrain
tends to be under-steered contrary to the driver’s the oversteering by increasing the front-outside
intention, a yaw moment (a rotational moment) is wheel braking force. Furthermore, when it is deter-
created to restrain the under-steering by increasing mined that the vehicle is over-speeding, safe and
the rear-inside braking force. On the other hand, stable cornering is enabled by deceleration from
when the vehicle tends to be oversteered, a yaw reducing the engine output.
Joint control
ASC-ECU transmits data necessary for control of
ABS and TCL, performing joint control.
Control system Control content
ABS Even during ABS operation, ABS performance is improved from the joint
operation of the stability control.
TCL During acceleration, engine output is governed through joint operation with
stability control.
Example of TCL function

2WD
Slippery surface
Brake force Slipping wheel
Direction of Driving
driving force
AC705575AB
4WD
Slippery surface
Brake force Slipping wheel
Direction of Driving Driving

driving force force
Brake force
Slipping wheel
Slippery surface AC706148 AB

When the driving wheels slip on the slippery road

surface, TCL applies the brake automatically, sends
the signal requesting engine speed reduction to the
engine-ECU, and prevents the loss of the driving
force resulting from the slippage of the driving wheel.
Hill START ASSIST (HSA) FUNCTION
Hydraulic unit
Wheel speed sensor

FL
Engine-ECU
ASC-ECU
engine related information
FR
CVT-ECU HSA control Brake fluid
currently
gear position information supplied to each
wheel cylinder
G and yaw rate is controlled.
ETACS-ECU RL
sensor
Combination meter
Master cylinder
RR
Parking brake switch pressure sensor
: Hardwire-line
: CAN line
: Brake-line
ACB06022AB
When the vehicle has completely stopped on a steep

uphill by the service brake, ASC-ECU judges
whether or not start the HSA function control in
accordance with the signals (ETACS-ECU,
CVT-ECU, G & yaw rate sensor, brake fluid pressure
sensor, engine-ECU, wheel speed sensor).

HSA function state transition diagram (Overview)
HSA function control

not activated
- Steep uphill
- The vehicle has been stopped by depressing the brake during uphill driving
- The accelerator pedal is not depressed
When the conditions above are met
HSA function
control activated
Release of depressed brake pedal
The fluid pressure hold mode is kept for

approx. two seconds Depressurization is
Forcible termination complete
Fluid pressure
hold mode mode
The accelerator pedal

is depressed
The start mode is continued for

approx. 1.5 seconds
Start mode
Depressurization is
complete
AC809431AC
NOTE: .
• ASC-ECU judges the inclination angle of the slope according to the G and yaw rate sensor output.
• When either of the following conditions is satisfied, the mode is shifted to the forcible termination mode,
and HSA function control is terminated.
• The parking brake operation is detected.
• The shift lever operation to the shift or selector position other than the uphill direction driving is
detected (Forward uphill driving: shift or selector position other than "D"*, Reverse uphill driving: shift
or selector position other than "R").
• The accelerator pedal and brake pedal are depressed at the same time.
• The wheel speed sensor pulse is generated (When the vehicle moved)
• The engine is stopped by engine stall, etc.
*:When uphill driving, if shift position is "N" position, HSA function is operated
HSA function control activated FLUID PRESSURE HOLD MODE

ASC-ECU judges that the HSA operation condition is By closing the cut valve, ASC-ECU maintains the
satisfied. When the driver releases the brake pedal, brake wheel cylinder pressure of the time when the
ASC-ECU maintains the brake wheel cylinder pres- brake pedal is depressed, to prevent the vehicle from
sure and waits. moving backward.

START MODE FORCIBLE TERMINATION MODE

ASC-ECU releases the brake wheel cylinder pres- ASC-ECU immediately releases the brake wheel cyl-
sure maintained by the cut valve, depending on the inder pressure maintained by the cut valve and termi-
engine torque generated by depressing the accelera- nates HSA function control.
tor pedal.
BRAKE ASSIST (BA) CONTROL

Operation description
• If an emergency brake is determined by the brake • The brake assist is completed when the brake
pedal depression speed and force, the brake pedal is released or the vehicle is stopped.
assist works to increase the braking force the
drivers produce. [The braking force is not
increased more than the brake performance (the
friction force between the road surface and the
tyres) .]
fail-safe function
The brake assist mechanism does not work when the
ABS warning lamp illuminates.
Brake assist operation

Brake pedal
depression force
Emergency brake (determined)

Elapsed time
Braking force
With brake assist
Without brake assist
Elapsed time
AC903511AC

ESS FUNCTION
ESS SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

ASC-ECU
Wheel speed sensor Vehicle speed
G and yaw rate sensor Vehicle deceleration

(longitudinal G)
The judgment of a brake operation ESS

operation
judging
ABS operation
The lighting state of hazard warning lamp by

operation of hazard warning lamp switch
CAN-C line
ETACS-ECU Combination meter
The ESS operation Turn-signal indicator

demand from ASC-ECU
The demand of the

Blink control
Hazard warning lamp turn-signal lamp blink
of turn signal
switch control by hazard warning
lamp CAN-C-Mid line
lamp switch operation
The demand of the

turn-signal lamp blink
Turn-signal lamp switch control by turn-signal lamp
switch operation
Stop lamp switch Processing with a filter Front turn-signal lamp,

Side turn-signal lamp,
Rear turn- signal lamp,
AC809173AH
The ASC-ECU judges whether the brake is applied • The brake pedal is depressed, and the system
suddenly or not according to the stop lamp switch judges that the brake is applied suddenly accord-
"ON" signal sent from the stop lamp switch and the ing to the deceleration of the vehicle and the ABS
frequency signal in proportion to the rotation speed operation status.
of each wheel sent from the wheel speed sensors. If
the ASC-ECU judges that the brake is applied sud- Emergency stop signal operation stop
denly, it sends the ESS activation request signal to condition
the ETACS-ECU. When the ETACS-ECU receives The operation will be stopped under one of the fol-
the ESS activation request signal, it makes the lowing conditions.
turn-signal lamps flash quickly. • The brake pedal is released.
Emergency stop signal operating • The hazard warning lamps are flashing by the
condition hazard warning lamp switch operation.
It operates when the following conditions are met. • The system judges that the brake is not applied
• The vehicle speed is 55 km/h or more. suddenly according to the deceleration of the
vehicle and the ABS operation status.

FAIL-SAFE AND DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTIONS

ASC-ECU constantly monitors the input and output All the above items can be diagnosed using
signals. If an error is detected in the system, M.U.T.-III.
ASC-ECU sends a fail signal and the corresponding CALIBRATION
indicator lamp is illuminated or blinks. Various con- After the steering wheel sensor and hydraulic unit
trols are processed depending on the cause of mal- (integrated with ASC-ECU and G & yaw rate sensor)
function as shown below. have been replaced with new ones, calibration must
ASC-ECU has the following functions for easier sys- be performed using M.U.T.-III*.
tem checks.
• Diagnosis code set NOTE: .
• Service data output • M.U.T.-III uses the ABS data list.
• Actuator test • *: For calibration, refer to Workshop Manual.
• Freeze frame data output
DESCRIPTION OF CONSTRUCTION AND OPERATION

M2355002000563
STABILITY CONTROL OPERATION

ASC-ECU receives various kinds of information from When the system increases the fluid pressure auto-
the engine-ECU, 4WD-ECU, ETACS-ECU, matically, it closes the cut valve to shut off the pres-
CVT-ECU, steering wheel sensor, G & yaw rate sen- sure line to the suction valve, and drives the pump
sor, and wheel speed sensor. When ECU determines motor. For example, when the vehicle runs in the
the vehicle runs in the oversteer or understeer direc- oversteer direction while turning to the right,
tion based on the signal sent from these sensors, ASC-ECU supplies the brake fluid from the pump to
ASC-ECU drives each valve and pump motor and the front left wheel to apply the braking force on it.
controls the braking force to be applied to the ASC-ECU, the engine ECU, and 4WD-ECU commu-
wheels. nicate with each other via CAN. When the accelera-
tor pedal is depressed too far, the signal requesting
the engine output reduction is sent to the engine
ECU. Depending on the situation, 4WD control
amount limitation signal is sent to the ASC-ECU to
secure the ASC controllability.

When brake fluid pressure decreases during ABS operation
Master cylinder
Hydraulic unit
Outlet valve
Inlet valve Suction valve Cut valve
Wheel Outlet valve

cylinder
Inlet valve
(Front)
Suction
damper Pressure sensor
Damping
Pump chamber
Wheel
cylinder
(Rear) Brake fluid flow
Low pressure Motor
accumulator
ACC00363AB
The brake fluid supplied from the wheel cylinder is

stored in the low pressure accumulator. Then, the
stored brake fluid is returned to the master cylinder
by driving the pump using the motor.
VALVE CONDITION
Item Power status Open/Close
Cut valve OFF Open
Suction valve OFF Closed
Inlet valve ON Closed
Outlet valve ON Open

When brake fluid pressure is held by ABS
Master cylinder
Hydraulic unit
Outlet valve
Wheel Outlet valve

cylinder Inlet valve
(Front)
Suction
Damping
Pump chamber
Wheel
cylinder
Low pressure Motor
accumulator
ACC00363AC
The system closes the inlet valve and outlet valve to

hold the brake fluid pressure in the wheel cylinder. If
the brake fluid is stored in the low pressure accumu-
lator, the brake fluid is returned to the master cylinder
by driving the pump using the motor.
VALVE CONDITION
Cut valve OFF Open
Inlet valve ON Closed
Outlet valve OFF Closed

When brake fluid pressure is increased by normal braking or ABS
Master cylinder
Hydraulic unit
Outlet valve
Brake fluid flow

Wheel Outlet valve
cylinder Inlet valve
(Front)
Suction
Damping
Pump chamber
Wheel
cylinder
(Rear)
Low pressure Motor
accumulator
ACC00363AD
The system opens the inlet valve while closing the

outlet valve to increase the brake fluid pressure in
the wheel cylinder.
VALVE CONDITION
Cut valve OFF Open
Inlet valve OFF Open
Outlet valve OFF Closed

When brake fluid pressure is increased by stability control (or increased by TCL)
Master cylinder
Hydraulic unit
Outlet valve
Wheel Outlet valve

cylinder
Inlet valve
(Front)
Suction
Damping
Pump chamber
Wheel
cylinder
Low pressure Motor
accumulator
ACC00363AE
The system closes the cut valve to block the pas-

sage from the pump outlet to the master cylinder,
and opens the suction valve, connecting the passage
from the master cylinder to the pump inlet. The brake
fluid from the master cylinder is supplied to the wheel
cylinder.
VALVE CONDITION
Cut valve ON Closed
Suction valve ON Open
Inlet valve* OFF Open
Outlet valve* OFF Closed

NOTE: * The inlet valve and the outlet valve close or
open depending on driving conditions to control the
brake fluid pressure at each wheel.

When brake fluid pressure is held by stability control, TCL or HSA (Hill Start Assist)
function
Master cylinder
Hydraulic unit
Outlet valve
Wheel Outlet valve

cylinder
Inlet valve
(Front)
Suction
Damping
Pump chamber
Wheel
cylinder
Low pressure Motor
accumulator
ACC00363AF
The system closes the cut valve, suction valve and

outlet valve to hold the brake fluid pressure in the
wheel cylinder.
VALVE CONDITION
Cut valve ON Closed
Inlet valve* OFF Open
Outlet valve* OFF Closed


When brake fluid pressure is decreased by stability control (or decreased by TCL)
Master cylinder
Hydraulic unit
Outlet valve
Wheel Outlet valve

cylinder
Inlet valve
(Front)
Suction
Damping
Pump chamber
Wheel
cylinder
Low pressure Motor
accumulator
ACC00363AG
The system opens the outlet valve while closing the

inlet valve to store the brake fluid filled in the wheel
cylinder in the low pressure accumulator. The brake
fluid stored in the low pressure accumulator returns
to the master cylinder through the suction valve.
VALVE CONDITION
Cut valve OFF Open
Inlet valve* ON Closed
Outlet valve* ON Open

TCL OPERATION
ASC-ECU receives various kinds of information from sure of the driving wheel determined to be slipping
the engine-ECU, 4WD-ECU, steering wheel sensor, so that the torque is transferred to another driving
G & yaw rate sensor, CVT-ECU, and wheel speed wheel. Basically, the operations of ABS solenoid
sensor. When ASC-ECU determines that the driving valve and ASC valve are the same. ASC-ECU, the
wheel is slipping, it suppresses the wheel slippage. engine-ECU, and CVT-ECU communicate with each
At this time, ASC-ECU controls the brake fluid pres-

other via the CAN bus line. When the accelerator

pedal is depressed too far, the signal requesting the
engine speed reduction is sent to the engine-ECU.
The ASC-ECU performs joint control with CVT-ECU
and secures the TCL controllability.
HSA OPERATION
ASC-ECU receives various kinds of information from sure by closing the cut valve to prevent the vehicle
the engine ECU, G & yaw rate sensor, CVT-ECU, from sliding down the slope when the brake pedal is
ETACS-ECU and wheel speed sensor. When the released at startup. It also adjusts the brake wheel
vehicle has been completely stopped on a slope by cylinder pressure depending on the engine torque to
the service brake, the ASC-ECU activates the HSA. prevent the vehicle from moving backward during
The HSA maintains the brake wheel cylinder pres- startup.

FORWARD COLLISION MITIGATION (FCM)

GENERAL INFORMATION d. There are road humps, pothole or any
M2357000200136 metal obstacles.
CAUTION e. Your vehicle becomes too close to the
Do not overestimate the FCM. It is never vehicle-travelling-ahead during overtak-
almighty. In addition, the FCM is not designed to ing.
avoid driver's inattentive or careless driving or f. Your vehicle is being driven under an over-
improve the poor vision due to rain or fog. pass.
• No system control and warnings are provided • The system may operate incorrectly if any of
if any of the conditions below is satisfied: the following conditions is satisfied. In such a
a. A vehicle-travelling-ahead is stationary, case, turn the FCM system off.
extremely slow or extremely slower than a. Your vehicle is towed.
your vehicle. b. Your vehicle is carried by a truck.
b. Another vehicle cuts in abruptly. c. Your vehicle is driven on a chassis
c. The distance between your vehicle and a dynamometer or a free roller.
vehicle-travelling-ahead is too short. d. Wheels rotates freely by starting the
d. The FCM system is defective. engine with your vehicle off the ground.
• No system control and warnings MAY be pro- e. Your vehicle is driven under a streamer, a
vided if any of the conditions below is satis- flag or a weeping tree branches, or on a
fied: bush.
a. The object travelling ahead is a motor f. Sporty driving such as competition
bike, a bicycle, a pedestrian, an animal or If the Forward Collision Mitigation (FCM) determines
a falling object on the road, etc. that a collision may occur by using its integrated
b. An extremely heavy load is stored on the radar, it will provide a visual and audible warning on
rear seat or the luggage compartment. the combination meter to alert the driver of an
c. The radar is contaminated with dirt, snow impending danger, and controls the vehicle braking
or ice. by increasing the brake fluid pressure or enhancing
d. The vehicle is being driven on a winding the brake pedal effort. If a collision is highly antici-
road or near a corner. pated, the system will brake the vehicle automatically
e. In bad weather (rain, snow, fog) in order to avoid or reduce the injury or damage due
f. Another vehicle interrupts your vehicle to the collision accident.
abruptly. NOTE: The warning timing can be switched between
g. Your vehicle is driven uphill or downhill "FAR" and "NEAR" by operating the FCM ON/OFF
repeatedly. switch.
h. The system determines that the driver has
operated the steering wheel, the accelera-
tor pedal, the brake pedal or the shift lever
to avoid a collision.
i. Your vehicle is not being driven stably due
to unstable relationship between your
vehicle and the vehicle-travelling-ahead,
the steering operation conditions, a traffic
accident or vehicle faults.
• A system control and warnings MAY be pro-
vided if any of the conditions below are satis-
fied:
a. There is an obstacle near a road curve.
b. The vehicle is being driven across a nar-
row bridge.
c. The vehicle is being driven through a low
or narrow gate.

16 6 9
12
7 10
8 11
5, 15
13 3 4
17
2, 14
ACC00407
ACC00406 AB

Switch/se FCM ON/OFF switch 1 • Switches on and off the FCM.
nsor • Switches the warning timing of the FCM between "FAR"
and "NEAR".
Radar 2 Detects the distance from the vehicle travelling ahead, the
position, relationship and the speed difference between the
vehicle travelling ahead and your vehicle by using a radar
wave.
Stop lamp switch 3 Sends the signal indicating whether the brake pedal is
depressed or not to ETACS-ECU.
Steering wheel sensor 4 Detects a steering angle and a steering angular velocity,
and send them to the ACC/FCM-ECU via the CAN
communication.


Actuator Hydraulic unit 5 Drives the solenoid valve using the signal from ASC-ECU,
FCM warning display 6 Is displayed to request the driver to depress the brake pedal
when a head-on collision is imminent.
FCM auto brake 7 Is displayed after the FCM turns off.
activation display
FCM temporary failure 8 Is displayed when the FCM is inactive temporarily.
display
FCM failure display 9 Is displayed when the FCM is defective.
FCM FAR display 10 Is displayed when the the FCM warning timing is switched to
"FAR."
FCM NEAR display 11 Is displayed when the the FCM warning timing is switched to
"NEAR."
FCM OFF display 12 Is displayed when the FCM is turned off.
Diagnosis connector 13 Sets the diagnosis code and establishes the communication
with M.U.T.-III.
ACC/FCM-ECU 14 • Switches the FCM and/or the warning timing in
accordance with the FCM ON/OFF switch status, which
is received from the ETACS-ECU via CAN
communication.
• Determines whether the FCM should be activated in
accordance with the radar detection (distance or relative
velocity) or the other vehicle information, which is
received via CAN communication.
• Sends a forward collision mitigation brake system prefill
request, a forward collision mitigation brake assist
request, a forward collision mitigation brake request
and/or the target deceleration during the automatic
braking via CAN communication to the ACS-ECU.
• Sends FCM status information and a visible and audible
warning request to the combination meter via CAN
communication.
ASC-ECU 15 • Controls the brake fluid pressure according to the brake
control request and the target deceleration speed, which
is received from the ACC/FCM-ECU via CAN
communication.
• Activate the stop lamp illumination circuit when the
automatic braking is in progress.
• Performs a forward collision mitigation brake system
prefill control according to the request, which is received
from the ACC/FCM-ECU.
• Alleviate a threshold value and performs a forward
collision mitigation brake assist control according to the
request, which is received from the ACC/FCM-ECU.
Combination meter 16 Switches a display mode and sounds the buzzer according
to the FCM status and/or the warning request (visible and
audible), which is received from the ACC/FCM-ECU via
CAN communication.


ETACS-ECU 17 • Contains the stop lamp activation circuit when the FCM
automatic braking is in progress.
• Sends a signal, which indicates FCM ON/OFF switch
status and stop lamp switch status via hardwires, to the
CAN bus lines.
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
ACC/FCM-ECU
(incorporating radar)
Solenoid valve
ASC-ECU
· Forward collision mitigation
brake system prefill request
· Forward collision mitigation
brake assist request · Forward collision mitigation
· Forward collision mitigation brake system prefill control
brake request · Forward collision mitigation
· Target deceleration speed brake assist control
Stop lamp drive signal
· LCD display and buzzer · Forward collision mitigation
sound request brake control

ETACS-ECU
· Steering angle
· Steering angular velocity
Stop lamp Stop lamp
drive circuit
Diagnosis connector
Stop lamp switch Combination meter

FCM ON/OFF switch · LCD display and buzzer sounding
ACC00415 AB
NOTE: Dashed lines indicate the CAN bus line.
SYSTEM OPERATION
M2357000600060
Function
The FCM has the following functions:
Function General
Forward collision warning function Activate the visible warning on the combination meter and
audible warning when the system determines that a forward
collision is imminent.
Forward collision mitigation brake system Increases the brake fluid pressure in advance to enhance the
prefill response during the driver's braking operation when the
system determines that a forward collision is imminent.
Forward collision mitigation brake assist Advances the brake assist timing when the system
determines that a forward collision is imminent.
Forward collision mitigation brake Activates the automatic emergency braking to reduce the
vehicle speed when the system determines that a forward
collision is not avoidable.

Function General
Forward collision mitigation brake for low Activates the automatic emergency braking to reduce the
speed driving vehicle speed when the system determines that a forward
collision is imminent when the vehicle is being driven at 30
km/h or less. Stops the vehicle to avoid the collision under
certain circumstances.
Operation
The system calculates the distance and the relative velocity between the vehicle travelling ahead and your
vehicle by using a radar. If the system determines that a straightforward collision is imminent, it will avoid or
reduce the injury or damage due to the collision by performing the controls shown in the table below:
Obstacle
: Warning
Collision is possible Collision is imminent Collision is not avoidable
: Automatic braking
ACC00398AB
Control Collision is possible Collision is imminent Collision is not avoidable

Forward Warning
collision indicator
warning
function ACC00401 ACC00401 ACC00401
Buzzer Sounds Sounds Sounds

Forward collision Increase the brake fluid − −
mitigation brake pressure.
system prefill
Forward collision Assists the braking force in Assists the braking force in Assists the braking force in
mitigation brake accordance with the accordance with the accordance with the
assist driver's brake operation. driver's brake operation. driver's brake operation.
Forward collision − Weak automatic-braking Strong automatic-braking
mitigation brake*
NOTE: *: If two seconds elapse after the forward col-
lision mitigation brake stops the vehicle, it can be
deactivated automatically.

FCM ON/OFF SWITCH How to switch on and off the FCM

The FCM is toggled between on and off when the
FCM ON/OFF switch is pressed for 1.5 seconds or
more. When the FCM is toggled, the system will
FCM ON/OFF switch inform the driver of it by the combination meter LCD
display * and the buzzer.
NOTE: *: If the FCM is toggled off, "FCM OFF dis-
play" will be shown on the combination meter LCD
screen. If the FCM is toggled on, a current warning
timing will be shown on the combination meter LCD
ACC00407AB screen.
The FCM ON/OFF switch is installed at the instru-
ment panel left lower side. You can switch the FCM
How to switch the FCM warning timing
(on and off) and the warning timing ("FAR" and The FCM warning timing is toggled when the FCM
"NEAR") by operating this switch. ON/OFF switch is pressed for less than 1.5 seconds
with the FCM activated. When the FCM is toggled,
the system will inform the driver of it by the combina-
tion meter LCD display and the buzzer.
Fail-safe and self-diagnosis functions

The ACC/FCM-ECU constantly monitors the input • Freeze frame data output
and output signals. If the system detects a malfunc- All the above items can be diagnosed using
tion, it will send a failure signal to the combination M.U.T.-III.
meter and prohibit the FCM control under circum- Radar adjustment
stances. The combination meter will provide a visual If the ACC/FCM-ECU is replaced or removed and
and audible warning to inform the driver of it. The installed, adjust the radar by using the M.U.T.-III.
ACC/FCM-ECU has the following functions for easier
system checks. NOTE: For how to adjust the radar, refer to the
• Diagnosis code set WORKSHOP MANUAL.
• Service data output

NOTES

36-1
GROUP 36
PARKING BRAKES
CONTENTS

36-2 PARKING BRAKES
GENERAL INFORMATION
GENERAL INFORMATION
M2360000101165
A parking brake lever is used to operate the mechan-
ical rear-wheel acting type parking brake.
<2WD>
Parking brake lever
Parking brake rear cable
ACB04927AB

37-1
GROUP 37
ELECTRIC POWER
STEERING (EPS)
CONTENTS
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . 37-2 ELECTRIC POWER STEERING. . . . . 37-5

GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37-5
STEERING WHEEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37-3 MOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37-7
TORQUE SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37-8
STEERING SHAFT AND COLUMN. . 37-4 ELECTRIC POWER STEERING-ECU
(EPS-ECU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37-8
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37-9

37-2 ELECTRIC POWER STEERING (EPS)
GENERAL INFORMATION
GENERAL INFORMATION
M2370000102158
An electrical power steering system has been • 3-spoke type steering wheel integrated with an
adopted. SRS air bag has been adopted.
• Shock absorbing mechanism has been adopted
FEATURES with the steering column shaft assembly.
• Improved fuel consumption by reduction of
engine load, and weight saving by decrease of
the number of parts have been achieved with the
introduction of the electric power steering system.
SPECIFICATIONS
Item Specification
Steering wheel Type 3-spoke type
Outside diameter mm 370
Maximum number of turns 3.3
Power steering type Electrical powered type
Steering gear Type Rack and pinion type
Stroke ratio (Rack stroke/Steering 43.69
wheel maximum number of turns)
mm/rev
Rack stroke mm 144
Steering angle Inner wheel 38° 50'
Outer wheel (reference value) 32° 20'
Steering wheel assembly

Steering column shaft assembly
Motor
Electric power steering-ECU (EPS-ECU)
Torque sensor
Steering gear and linkage
Front axle crossmember
ACA00055AC

ELECTRIC POWER STEERING (EPS) 37-3
STEERING WHEEL
STEERING WHEEL
M2370001001474
<Urethane steering wheel> <Leather steering wheel> Section A - A
Driver's air bag

A A module
Bezel cover Bezel cover
Inflator
Steering wheel
remote control
Cruise control switch
switch
A A
Driver's air bag module Driver's air bag module
ACB05486 AB
The steering wheel is designed to improve operabil- • Steering wheel remote control switch (steering
ity, safety and maintainability and has the following wheel audio remote control switch, steering
features: wheel voice control switch) and cruise control
• The 3-spoke type has been adopted. The steer- switch are available on some models.
ing wheel made of urethane or leather has been • It incorporates an SRS airbag to protect the driver
adopted. in the event of a frontal collision (single inflator).

STEERING SHAFT AND COLUMN
STEERING SHAFT AND COLUMN

M2370002001046
Motor
Torque sensor
Steering column shaft
Intermediate shaft
A
Tilt lever
Contracting mechanism
View A
One-way capsule
ACB05495AB
The steering shaft and column, which informs the IMPACT-ABSORBING MECHANISM
EPS-ECU of steering effort on the steering wheel,
PRIMARY COLLISION
consist of a torque sensor and motors, etc. They are
designed to improve safety, and has the following
features: Before collision
• Shock absorbing mechanism has been adopted
Intermediate shaft (A)
to the steering column which absorbs the impact
energy at collision and provides safety to the
driver.
• Collapsible steering column has been employed.
During a collision, the steering wheel moves for-
ward. Intermediate shaft (B)
• The adoption of the collapsible steering column
construction prevents the fallaway sections from After collision
being affected by the impact at primary collision, Intermediate shaft (A)
and stabilises the shock absorbing capability.
Also, the secondary collision impact is partially
absorbed by the collapsible steering column con-
struction, enhancing the collapse performance.
Intermediate shaft (B)
ACB05496AB

ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
When a vehicle crash occurs and the intermediate SECONDARY COLLISION

shaft is loaded from the gearbox side, the intermedi-
ate shaft (A) is forced into the intermediate shaft (B) Before collision Resin pin
to absorb an impact load. By this, a rearward out- Column One-way
thrusting of steering column is prevented. bracket capsule
Column
pipe inner A A Column
pipe outer
Sectional view A - A
After collision
B B
Sectional view B - B
ACB03550 AB
When the driver's body falls against the steering

wheel via the deployed air bag, the column bracket
moves forwards by deforming the rivet pin of the
one-way capsule.

GENERAL INFORMATION CAN* communication has been adopted in order to
M2370000102169
communicate with another ECUs for obtaining nec-
Vehicle-speed sensitive electric power steering essary information related to this control, achieving
(whole range type) has been adopted. This system wiring harness saving and secure data communica-
allows a light steering force during stationary steer- tion.
ing manoeuvre or low speed driving, and a moderate
steering force during medium or high speed driving. NOTE: *: For more information about CAN (Control-
For vehicles with this system, the EPS-ECU controls ler Area Network), refer to GROUP 54C, General
the motor current according to the vehicle speed and Information P.54C-2.
steering force of the steering wheel.
SPECIFICATIONS
Item Specification
Motor Type Permanent magnetic field type
Rated voltage V DC 12
Rated current Arms 82
Torque sensor Type Noncontact type hole IC type
EPS-ECU Control type Microcomputer control (32 bit)
Rated voltage V DC 12

GENERAL DESCRIPTION ON SYSTEM
Motor
EPS-ECU
Torque sensor
ACB05501AB
To improve operational reliability, the dual-circuit sys- informs a driver of the system malfunction by illumi-
tem has been adopted for the torque sensor. If any nating the warning lamp on the combination meter.
malfunction occurs in the electric power steering sys- The warning lamp illuminates when the following
tem, the fail-safe function of the EPS-ECU is acti- malfunctions occur: open circuit in the electric power
vated, and the output current of the EPS-ECU steering system wiring harness, poor connection,
applied to the motor is turned off. At the same time, malfunctions in the EPS-ECU, motor, or sensors.
the steering system enters manual mode, and
ELECTRICAL PARTS AND FUNCTIONS

Parts name Description about function
Sensor Wheel speed sensor (ABS-ECU The vehicle speed signal is sent from the ABS-ECU or
or ASC-ECU) ASC-ECU to the EPS-ECU via the engine-ECU.
Torque sensor Detects a steering force, converts it into the voltage signal,
and then sends the signal to the EPS-ECU.
Actuator Motor Generates assist torque by the steering operation to the
column shaft using the signals sent from the EPS-ECU.
Electric power steering warning Warns a driver of the system malfunction using the signal
lamp (in combination meter) sent from the EPS-ECU.
EPS-ECU Control the actuator (motor) based on the signal sent from
sensor.

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
EPS-ECU Power supply Output current value

Ignition switch Engine speed Engine-ECU
Earth Vehicle speed
EPS warning lamp
Odometer
(distance information) Combination
EPS-ECU Diagnosis code allowed ETACS-ECU
meter
to be stored
Additional Torque
AWC-ECU
Torque sensor signal (main)
Diagnosis code output Diagnosis
Torque sensor signal (sub) connector
Torque sensor
Motor current
Motor
Steering column
shaft assembly
NOTE: line indicates the CAN communication.

ACB05502 AB
MOTOR
M2370001100122
Motor
A
Worm shaft
A
Reduction gear
Sectional view A - A
ACB05503AB
The EPS motor receives the control current from the

EPS-ECU, and rotates in accordance with steering
operation. The rotational force generated by the EPS
motor is transmitted via the worm shaft and the
reduction gear to the column shaft.

TORQUE SENSOR
M2370001600020
Torque sensor
Torque sensor characteristic chart

Output voltage (V)
5 Main
Torque sensor
2.5 Sub
Input shaft
Neutral
Torsion bar
Lower shaft
ACB05508AB
The torque sensor is mounted on the column shaft, ELECTRIC POWER STEERING-ECU
and detects the steering force. When the steering (EPS-ECU)
wheel is turned, the phase relationship between the M2370000800195
input shaft and the lower shaft will be changed due to The EPS-ECU includes an input interface circuit, a
distortion of the torsion bar. The torque sensor will microprocessor, an output drive circuit, a power relay
detect the distortion angle and send two voltage sig- and a motor line relay. It also integrates a self-diag-
nals (main and sub) to the EPS-ECU in accordance nostic function, and illuminates the warning lamp on
with it. the combination meter when a trouble occurs. At the
same time, it sends diagnosis code(s) to the diagno-
sis connector.
CAN communication
The EPS-ECU communicates with the other ECUs
and other units through CAN communication to con-
trol the steering system.
Input signals Sent to
Engine-ECU 4WD-ECU Combination ETACS-ECU
meter (via the
ETACS-ECU)
Engine speed • − − −
Vehicle speed • − − −
Additional torque •
Distance information (diagnosis − − • −
additional information)
Vehicle information (diagnosis − − − •
control)
NOTE: Indicates items which send and receive data
through CAN communication.

Output signal name Received by

Engine-ECU Combination meter Diagnosis connector
(via the ETACS-ECU)
Motor current signal • − −
EPS warning lamp illumination − • −
request signal
Diagnosis code signal − − •
Service data output signal − − •
NOTE: Indicates items which send and receive data NOTE: .
through CAN communication. • *EEPROM (Electrical Erasable & Programmable
ROM): Special type of memory that can be pro-
Fail-safe function grammed or erased electrically.
If the EPS-ECU detects any malfunction, it illumi- • For diagnosis items, refer to Workshop Manual.
nates the EPS warning lamp, deactivates the EPS
functions, and then switches the steering system into Service data output
manual mode. Using M.U.T.-III, the input data sent from the sensors
and motors can be read.
DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION NOTE: For service data items, refer to Workshop
The EPS-ECU has the following functions to make Manual.
system checks easier.
• Diagnosis code set OPERATION
M2370000700217
All the above items can be diagnosed using MUT-III. IGNITION SWITCH ON
Ignition supply voltage is applied to the EPS-ECU,
Diagnosis code set
and the ECU enters standby mode.
There are 29 diagnostic items. Since all the diagnos-
tic results are recorded in volatile memory (EEP-
ROM*), they are stored in the memory even though
the battery terminals are disconnected.
Engine speed Electric power Motor current signal

Engine-ECU Motor
steering-ECU
500 r/min ON
OFF
Engine speed
Maximum limit value (82Arms)
Motor output
OFF
min 0.6 second 0.8 second

Determination of motor Temporary increase of motor
control start assist limit value
AC611649AJ
1. When the engine is started, the engine speed sig- 2. After starting the engine, the EPS-ECU judges
nal sent from the engine-ECU is input to the the engine status "ENGINE SPEED ON" when
EPS-ECU. the engine speed reaches 500 r/min, then the
power assist function is ready.

STEERING WHEEL OPERATION
Torque sensor signal (main)

Motor current
Torque sensor EPS-ECU Motor
Torque sensor signal (sub)
ACB05506AB
1. When the steering wheel is operated, the torque 3. The motor outputs the rotational torque (assist
sensor integrated into the column shaft detects torque) in proportion to the current intensity and
the steering torque and outputs the torque sensor assists the power steering gear.
signal (main and sub), which varies with the
steering force, to the EPS-ECU. FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION OPERATION
2. The EPS-ECU outputs the current in proportion to During the fail-safe mode, the electric power steering
the torque sensor signal to the motor. operates as a manual steering system.

42-1
GROUP 42
BODY
CONTENTS
BODY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42A
KEYLESS OPERATION SYSTEM (KOS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42B

NOTES

42A-1
GROUP 42A
BODY
CONTENTS
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . 42A-2 KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM <Vehicles

without keyless operation system> . . . . . . . 42A-12
MAIN BODY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42A-3 POWER WINDOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42A-16
BODY PANELLING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42A-3 ELECTRIC TAILGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42A-17
BODY SHELL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42A-4 WEATHERSTRIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42A-32
QUIETNESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42A-7
BODY COLOUR CHARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42A-7
WINDOW GLASS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42A-33
HOOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42A-8 SUNROOF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42A-34
DOOR AND TAILGATE . . . . . . . . . . . 42A-9 LOOSE PANELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42A-37

DOOR AND TAILGATE LOCK . . . . . . . . . . 42A-9
CUSTOMISATION FUNCTION. . . . . . 42A-38

42A-2 BODY
GENERAL INFORMATION
GENERAL INFORMATION
M2420000102064
FEATURES IMPROVEMENTS IN OPERATION

LIGHT WEIGHT, HIGH RIGIDITY, PERFORMANCE
ANTI-CORROSIVE • The central door locking system which can
• High-tensile steel plates and anti-corrosion steel lock/unlock all the doors and tailgate has been
plates have been adopted. adopted.
• The ring structure for the side structure reinforce- • The override function which allows to open the
ment has been adopted. driver's door by pulling the driver's inside handle
• A front floor side member has been adopted. when all the doors are locked has been adopted.
• Electric tailgate lock release handle that requires
REDUCTION IN VIBRATION AND NOISE only the slightest operating force has been
• Sound dampening foam material and urethane adopted.
foam have been adopted. • The electric tailgate with safety mechanism has
been installed as an option.
IMPROVEMENTS IN SAFETY
IMPROVEMENTS IN MARKETABILITY
• The one-touch power window (operative after
ignition switch is turned OFF) with safety mecha- AND APPEARANCE
nism has been installed. • By improving an audible clicking sound when the
• The direct combination key cylinder and inside door latch and striker are engaged, the door lock-
lock cables for the front doors have been adopted ing sound quality has been enhanced.
to improve door opening operation upon impact. • The high rigidity pressed door has been adopted
• RISE (Reinforced Impact Safety Evolution) has to improve the rigidity of the door sash bottom
been adopted for the main body. section.
• The side door beam has been adopted. • The wiper deicer has been added to the wind-
• The crush box structure has been adopted to the shield as an option <Optional>
front end of front sidemember . • The privacy glasses for the rear door window
• The front end side panel under the engine com- glass, quarter window glass and tailgate window
partment absorbs impact energy during frontal glass have been adopted as an option.
collision more effectively than the predecessor. • The latch cover has been installed to the hood
• The impact-absorbing structure has been utilised latch front section to deter thieves.
on the fender, and the cowl top to improve the • The sunroof with safety mechanism has been
pedestrian protection capability. installed as an option.
• The fender bracket padding structure has been
adopted. IMPROVEMENTS IN FUNCTIONALITY
• The fuel filler cap holder has been installed to the
fuel lid in order to prevent the fuel cap from being
left open.

BODY 42A-3
MAIN BODY
MAIN BODY
BODY PANELLING
M2420002001554
*
*
* *
**
*
*
* **
*
**
* *
*
*
*
*
**
*
*
* *
**
NOTE:
* *
: Anti-corrosion steel panels *
: High-tensile steel panels (*: Indicates 590MPa-high-tensile steel panels.) *
(**: Indicates 980MPa-ultra-high-tensile steel panels.) ABC00060 AC

42A-4 BODY
MAIN BODY
• RISE (Reinforced Impact Safety Evolution) has • Some high-tensile steel panels in 590 MPa-class
been adopted for the main body in order to and 980 MPa-class have been adopted to
improve all-round impact safety at high level. improve the rigidity and weight reduction of the
• The applications of anti-corrosion steel plates panel.
have been expanded to the hood, doors, inner • The sealer application area has been extended to
panel of the tailgate and reinforcements to the entire flange folded edge of the doors, hood,
improve the anti-corrosive properties of the main and tailgate, and the panel joints at the bottom of
body. the front floor and the rear floor, in order to
improve rust resistance.
BODY SHELL
M2420003001331
IMPACT SAFETY BODY RISE (REIN-

FORCED IMPACT SAFETY EVOLUTION)
1
A ABC00135AB
4 D
B
C
ABC00042AB

BODY 42A-5
MAIN BODY
1 View A 3 View B
Crush box
Front floor
sidemember
3 View C 4 Section D - D Cowl top panel

upper
Cowl top stay

Front floor centre
sidemember
Cowl top panel

lower
Cowl top panel
inner
ABC00115AB
The front and rear structures to absorb high energy, 2. The ring structure of the side structure reinforce-
and the highly tough cabin structure are adopted to ment has been adopted to improve the collision
reduce the risk of passenger injuries at front-, rear-, characteristics and the rigidity of the whole vehi-
and side-impact collisions, secure the space for life cle.
protection, and facilitate rescuing passengers. These 3. A front floor sidemember is located in and under
structures also have the following features: the front floor to improve frontal collision safety.
1. The crush box structure has been adopted to the 4. The padding structure of the cowl top is designed
front end of the front sidemember to improve the to have a crushable structure in order to effi-
characteristics at a minor frontal collision. ciently absorb energy upon impact, thus improv-
ing the pedestrian protection capability.

42A-6 BODY
MAIN BODY
STEEL PLATE WITH UNEVEN THICK-

NESS
Front door inner panel

Thickness is thicker on the forward
part of the vehicle from this line.
ABB00850AB
The uneven thickness steel panels* (in uneven thick- NOTE: *: A steel sheet of varying thickness that is
ness integrated structure) have been adopted for the welded into one steel sheet.
parts shown in the figure to improve safety upon
impact and reduce weight.

BODY 42A-7
MAIN BODY
QUIETNESS
M2420004000911
1
1
1
ABB00855AB
1. The sound dampening foam material has been BODY COLOUR CHARTS
adopted to the upper and lower sections of the M2420005002891
front pillar, roof side rail section, centre pillar Two types of colour variation have been introduced;
lower section, wheel house arch, and rear end the colour suggesting the great nature or the colour
inside to shield from external noise. providing the sporty and tough impression. Colour
names have been modified for easy recognition. The
2. Urethane foam has been inserted into the centre
colour recipe is the same as the conventional one.
pillar lower section to shield from external noise.
BODY COLOUR TABLE
Colour Colour Colour Colour name Coating film Composition of film
code number structure
SILVER A31 CMA10031 Cool Silver Metallic 2M Metallic
REDDISH BROWN C07 CMC10007 Copper Metallic 2M Metallic
DARK BLUE D14 CMD10014 Cosmic Blue Mica 2P Interferenced Pearl
GREY U17 CMU10017 Titanium Grey Metallic 2M Metallic
BLUISH SILVER U21 CMU10021 Technical Silver Metallic 2M Metallic

42A-8 BODY
HOOD
Colour Colour Colour Colour name Coating film Composition of film

code number structure
WHITE W13 CMW10013 White Pearl 3P Pearl
WHITE W37 CMW10037 White Solid 2S Solid
BLACK X42 AC11342 Black Mica 2P Interferenced Pearl
NOTE: .
• The coating film structure indicates top coating only (2S: 2 coat solid, 2M: 2 coat metallic, 2P: 2 coat pearl,
3P: 3 coat pearl).
• For painting, inner panel colours should be similar to the outer panel colours.
HOOD
M2420023000738
HOOD LATCH The latch cover has been installed to the front of the
hood latch to deter thieves.
Hood latch
Latch cover
ACB04934AB

BODY 42A-9
DOOR AND TAILGATE
DOOR AND TAILGATE

DOOR AND TAILGATE LOCK
M2420001100317
CENTRAL DOOR LOCKING
<Rear door> <Front door>
Outside handle
Outside handle
Inside lock cable
Key cylinder
(Driver's side only) Inside lock cable
Inside lock knob
Inside lock knob
Door check
Door latch Door check

assembly
Door latch
assembly
Door lock
actuator Door lock
actuator
Inside handle cable Inside handle cable

Inside handle
Inside handle
ACB05642AB
<Tailgate upper (Except vehicles with electric tailgate)>
Tailgate lock
release handle
Location of the door lock switch
Driver's side
Tailgate lock actuator

Door lock switch
ACB04935
Tailgate latch assembly ACB05432 ACC00210AB
• The central door locking system that • The child protection function has been introduced
locks/unlocks all the doors and tailgate using the to prevent the rear doors from being opened acci-
driver's side door lock switch has been installed. dentally during driving.
• The key-in prevention function has been intro-
duced.

42A-10 BODY
DOOR AND TAILGATE
• The selector "P" position-linked door unlocking SELECTOR "P" POSITION-LINKED DOOR
function has been introduced. UNLOCKING FUNCTION
• The ignition switch "LOCK (OFF)" position-linked
• When the selector lever is shifted to the "P" (park-
door unlocking function has been introduced.
ing) position with the ignition switch turned ON,
• The direct combination key cylinder mechanism
all the doors will be unlocked automatically,
has been adopted.
improving passengers' convenience for getting
out. Using a customise feature, the selector "P"
DESCRIPTION OF CONSTRUCTION AND position-linked door unlocking function can be
OPERATION changed (Refer to P.42A-38).
•
CENTRAL DOOR LOCKING

• When the driver's door lock switch is pushed to
the lock position with all doors closed, all the
doors and tailgate will be locked. With the driver's ON
door opened, the driver's door lock switch cannot Inhibitor switch "P"
OFF
be operated (blocking mechanism).<Driver's side
only> Unlock relay output
ON
• The function that allows the driver's door to be OFF

t
opened by pulling the driver's door inside handle
even when the driver's door inside lock knob is in t: 0.25 second
the lock position is called "override function". All AC900907AB
the doors and tailgate can be unlocked at the When the selector lever is shifted to the P position
same time. with the ignition switch turned ON, the inhibitor
•
switch "P" turns ON, ETACS-ECU turns the

unlock relay output ON for 0.25 second to unlock
ON
Lock switch all the doors.
OFF
Unlock switch
ON IGNITION SWITCH "LOCK (OFF)"
OFF POSITION-LINKED DOOR UNLOCKING
ON
Lock relay output
OFF
FUNCTION
t
• When the ignition switch is turned to the " LOCK
ON
Unlock relay output (OFF)" position, all the doors will be unlocked
OFF t
t: 0.25 second
automatically, improving passengers' conven-
AC101496AC
ience for getting out. Using a customise function,
When the driver's door is locked, ETACS-ECU turns the ignition switch " LOCK (OFF)" position-linked
the lock relay output ON for 0.25 second to lock door unlocking function can be changed (Refer to
all the doors (including the tailgate). When the P.42A-38).
driver's door is unlocked, ETACS-ECU turns the •
unlock relay output ON for 0.25 second to unlock

all the doors (including the tailgate).
KEY-IN PREVENTION FUNCTION Ignition switch ON
When the driver's door inside lock knob is operated "LOCK (OFF)" OFF
to the lock position with the driver's door opened, the ON

driver's door cannot be locked, preventing it from Unlock relay output
OFF
being locked with the key inside the vehicle. t
t: 0.25 second
AC900907AC
When the ignition switch is turned to the " LOCK

(OFF)" position, ETACS-ECU turns the unlock
relay output ON for 0.25 second to unlock all the
doors.

BODY 42A-11
DOOR AND TAILGATE
DIRECT COMBINATION KEY CYLINDER The electric tailgate lock release handle which
MECHANISM requires a small operating force and has no tempera-
• ture dependency has been adopted to improve the
Direct combination opening operation. The switch will be turned on by
key cylinder mechanism
pressing the arrow mark on tailgate lock release han-
dle.
NOTE: If the tailgate cannot be opened from the out-
side of the vehicle due to any malfunction such as
discharged battery, it can be opened from the inside
of the vehicle using the following procedures:
.
1.
Tailgate trim
Key cylinder
Cover
Door latch
ACB05450AB
ACB05669AB
From the inside of the vehicle, remove the emer-
The structure in which an impact of a side collision is gency lever cover installed to the tailgate trim.
not easily transferred to the door latch with the
2.
<Except electric tailgate>

doors unlocked has been established to facilitate
the door opening operation. (To prevent passen-
gers from falling out of the vehicle)
• Even if any door key cylinder is attempted to be
tampered with the doors locked, the tampering
force is not easily transferred to the door latch to
deter thieves.
TAILGATE
Emergency lever ACC00475
TAILGATE LOCK RELEASE HANDLE <Electric tailgate>
Tailgate lock release handle
Emergency lever ACC00476

ACB05671AB ACC00501AB
Operate the emergency lever to the direction of the

arrow.
3. Open the tailgate while pushing it up.

42A-12 BODY
DOOR AND TAILGATE
TAILGATE OPENER CONTROL When the tailgate lock release handle is operated to
FUNCTION open the tailgate (the tailgate lock release handle
switch turns ON) while the vehicle is parked and the
tailgate is unlocked, ETACS-ECU turns the unlock
Vehicle speed 0km/h relay output ON for 0.3 seconds, thus the tailgate
UNLOCK can be opened by the tailgate lock release handle.
Tailgate
LOCK
Tailgate lock ON
release handle
switch OFF
ON
Unlock relay output
OFF
t
t: 0.3 second AC302457AB
KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM <Vehicles without keyless operation system>

M2420010001117
Receiver antenna
ACB05509
Radio frequency signal
Transmitter
ETACS-ECU Lock switch
Electric signal
Unlock switch AC402532

Door lock actuators (lock/unlock)
Tailgate latch assembly
Door mirror assembly (unfolding/folding)
The signal causes the hazard warning lamp to flash once when the doors are locked, or flash twice when unlocked (Initial setting).
The signal causes the room lamp to extinguish when the doors are locked, or come on for 15 seconds when unlocked.
ACC00258 AB
The keyless entry system is installed. There are the • Up to 8 encrypted codes (8 transmitters) can be
following features. registered using M.U.T.-III.
• Transmitter has two switches (LOCK/UNLOCK). • Answer-back function has been adopted.
• The power door locks with selective unlocking • Using the LOCK/UNLOCK switches, all doors
has been adopted. (including tailgate) can be locked or unlocked.
• The receiver antenna is equipped with the inte-
gral receiver and receiving antenna.

BODY 42A-13
DOOR AND TAILGATE
• By using the lock/unlock switches, the driver can The transmitter is integrated into the master key.
lock/unlock all the doors (including tailgate), • When either switch is pressed, the transmitter
fold/unfold the door mirrors. emits a radio signal representing a specific ID
• NOTE: Using a customisation function, the oper- code.
ation of the door mirrors can be enabled or disa- • There are two switches on the transmitter; the
bled (Refer to P.42A-38). lock switch and the unlock switch.
• An indicator lamp, which illuminates when signals
DESCRIPTION OF STRUCTURE AND are transmitted, is added on the key grip. This
indicator lamp informs you of the signal transmis-
OPERATION
sion status and warns you of flat battery.
TRANSMITTER • A brilliant silver Three-diamond mark is stamped
•
on the back side of the key grip to improve

<Front view>
Indicator lamp appearance.
Lock switch
• A signal transmission circuit (printed circuit) and
a battery are housed in one case. The case is
housed in the key grip, thus improving resistance
to water ingress.
• A coin type battery, CR1616 is used in the trans-
mitter.
Unlock switch • The transmitter switch operation allows the sys-
tem to operate as follows:
AC302207
<Rear view>
Three-diamond mark
AC309781
AC403982 AC
Function Transmitter operation System operation

Standard function Press the lock switch once. All doors (including the tailgate) are
(lock/unlock) locked.
NOTE: If the retracting function of the
electric folding mirrors is added using a
customisation function, it can be retracted
in synchronisation with a lock operation.
Press the unlock switch once. All doors (including the tailgate) are
unlocked.
NOTE: If the opening function of the
electrical folding mirrors is added as an
adjustment function, it can be opened in
synchronisation with an unlock operation.

42A-14 BODY
DOOR AND TAILGATE
Function Transmitter operation System operation

Multi mode Press the lock switch once to lock all doors The door mirrors are retracted.
function (including the tailgate), and within 30
seconds press the lock switch twice
consecutively.
Press the unlock switch once to unlock all The door mirrors return to the original
doors (including the tailgate), and within position.
30 seconds press the unlock switch twice
consecutively.
Power door locks Press the unlock switch once to unlock the Power door locks with selective unlocking.
with selective driver’s door, and within 2 seconds, press NOTE: Using a customisation function, the
unlocking the unlock switch again to unlock the front power door locks with selective unlocking
passenger’s door, rear doors and tailgate. can be enabled or disabled.
POWER DOOR LOCKS WITH SELECTIVE The figure shows the codes transmitted from the
UNLOCKING transmitter. Every time the switch is pressed, the
data code is transmitted twice. The encrypted code
• Responding to the adoption of power door locks
for user identification is a combination of 0 and 1,
with selective unlocking, the anti-theft feature has
and more than 1 million different combinations are
been improved.
available. In addition to the encrypted code, the data
• When the lock/unlock switch of front door
code contains a rolling code that changes at each
(driver's side) is pressed once, only the driver's
transmission, protecting transmission codes from
door is unlocked. When the lock/unlock switch of
theft by coping.
front door (driver's side) is pressed once again
within 2 seconds after the driver's door is RECEIVER ANTENNA
unlocked, the front passenger's door, rear doors,
The receiver antenna receives the signal from the
and the tailgate are unlocked.
transmitter and sends the signal to the ETACS.
• When the unlock switch on the transmitter is
pressed once, only the driver's door is unlocked. ETACS-ECU
When the transmitter unlock switch is pressed
ETACS-ECU compares the signal the receiver
once again within 2 seconds after the driver's
antenna received from the transmitter with the
door is unlocked, the front passenger's door, rear
encrypted code registered in it, and when they coin-
doors, and the tailgate are unlocked.
cided, operates keyless entry function (door lock,
• Using a customisation function, the power door
unlock, etc.). By connecting M.U.T.-III to the diagno-
locks with selective unlocking can be enabled or
sis connector, encrypted codes of up to eight trans-
disabled (Refer to P.42A-38).
mitters can be registered.
ENCRYPTED CODE
FUNCTION FOR CONFIRMING
Transmitter lock or unlock button ETACS-ECU OUTPUT AND OPERATION
ON
The ETACS-ECU outputs LOCK/UNLOCK signal
and informs the driver of the keyless entry system
OFF
operation by flashing the lamp (Answer-back). Using
a customisation feature, the flashing patterns for the
answer-back function can be changed according to
Data
code the table below. The initial setting at factory for the
answer-back function is as follows: "Hazard warning
lamp: LOCK, Flash once, UNLOCK, Flash twice /
AC508281AB
Room lamp: LOCK, Flash once, UNLOCK, Stay on
for 15 seconds." Using a customisation feature, the
hazard answer-back function can be changed (Refer
to P.42A-38).

BODY 42A-15
DOOR AND TAILGATE
KEYLESS ENTRY HAZARD LAMP When LOCK signal from the keyless entry transmit-
ANSWERBACK FUNCTION ter is input to the ETACS-ECU, all doors (including
tailgate) are locked and the hazard warning lamp
Keyless entry LOCK flashes once. When UNLOCK signal is input, all
transmitter OFF doors (including tailgate) are unlocked and the haz-
switch
UNLOCK ard warning lamp flashes twice.
ON
Lock relay output
OFF
ON
Unlock relay output
OFF
Hazard Illuminate
warning lamp Extinguish
AC207001AB
KEYLESS ENTRY ROOM LAMP ANSWER-BACK FUNCTION
ON
Unlock relay output
OFF
ON
Lock relay output
OFF
ON
Door lock switch

output OFF
ON
Door unlock switch
output
OFF
Illuminate
Room lamp
Extinguish
b a b
a: 0.6 second c
b: 1.2 seconds
c: 15 seconds AC404883AB
When the LOCK signal from the transmitter is input KEYLESS ENTRY TIMER LOCK TIME
to ETACS-ECU via the receiver antenna, all doors If any door is not opened or closed within 30 seconds
(including tailgate) are locked, and the room lamp is after the doors (including tailgate) are unlocked by
turned off in synchronisation with hazard lamp the keyless entry system, ETACS-ECU automatically
answerback (when the room lamp is illuminated, the outputs the door lock signal to lock the doors (includ-
lamp is turned off). Also, when the UNLOCK signal ing tailgate). This function prevents the doors (includ-
from the transmitter is input to ETACS-ECU via the ing tailgate) from being unlocked unexpectedly by
receiver antenna, all doors (including tailgate) are operation errors. Using a customisation feature, the
unlocked, and the room lamp is illuminated for 15 keyless entry timer lock time can be changed (Refer
seconds in synchronisation with hazard lamp to P.42A-38).
answerback.
OPERATION INHIBITION CONDITIONS
The operation of the keyless entry system is inhibited
in the following conditions.
• When the ignition key is inserted into the ignition
switch.
• When either door (including tailgate) is open (the
door switch: ON). (including door ajar)

42A-16 BODY
DOOR AND TAILGATE
POWER WINDOW
M2420022000735
<Rear door> <Front door>
Door window glass Door window glass
Power window motor Power window motor
Power window regulator assembly Power window regulator assembly
ACB05643
Power window main switch (Driver's side)
Power window
lock switch
Power window switch
ACB04936
ACC00214AB
The power window has the following features: SAFETY MECHANISM

• The safety mechanism has been adopted. The power window with the safety mechanism has
• The power window timer function has been been adopted. To enhance safety, if any obstacle
adopted. such as a hand or a head is detected to be pinched
• The power window lock switch has been during a window glass closing operation, the window
adopted. glass is opened by approximately 150 mm.
DESCRIPTION OF CONSTRUCTION AND POWER WINDOW SWITCH

OPERATION The power window switch has employed the
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM push-pull operation method to enhance safety. To
open a door window glass, press in the switch knob,
The power window switch has a waterproofing struc-
and to close, pull it up. The one-touch opening/clos-
ture which prevents water (such as rain drops) enter-
ing mechanism has been adopted to the driver's
ing from above. Should water enters, it is drained
power window switch to fully open or close any door
through the hole located on the lower area of the
window glass in a single operation.
switch, and no water may be accumulated.

BODY 42A-17
DOOR AND TAILGATE
POWER WINDOW TIMER FUNCTION • Even after the ignition is switched off, the
• The power window can be opened or closed after ETACS-ECU keeps the power window relay acti-
the ignition switch is turned OFF by the timer vated for approximately 30 seconds, enabling
function. Using a customise feature, the timer raising or lowering of the power windows by using
period can be changed. (Refer to P.42A-38.) the power window switches (timer function). After
•
approximately 30 seconds, the power window

Ignition switch ON relay is deactivated.
(IG1) OFF During this timer operation, if the driver’s or front
ON passenger’s door is opened, the power window
Driver's or front (Open)
passenger's relay is deactivated from that moment.
OFF
door switch (Close)
POWER WINDOW LOCK SWITCH
Power window ON The driver power window switch is equipped with the
relay OFF lock switch. This switch disables the opening/closing
t: 30 seconds
t ZC600258 operation of the door window glass using each pas-
AC607043AI
senger's power window switch. Using a customise
feature, the lock switch operation can be changed
(Refer to P.42A-38).
ELECTRIC TAILGATE
M2420001900078
Electric tailgate switch

Tailgate sensor
Electric tailgate main switch
Electric tailgate control unit

Keyless operation key Tailgate lock
Lock switch release handle
ACB05433
Unlock switch
Electric tailgate buzzer
Tailgate latch assembly
Electric tailgate close switch

ACB05461
ACC00271AB
The electric tailgate has been adopted as an option. • The electric tailgate can be opened and closed
There are the following features. automatically by using the electric tailgate switch
of the keyless operation key. (Refer to GROUP
42B − Keyless Entry Function P.42B-14.)

42A-18 BODY
DOOR AND TAILGATE
• The electric tailgate can be automatically opened • The safety mechanism has been adopted.
and closed using the electric tailgate switch. • A safety mechanism prevents the electric tailgate
• The electric tailgate can be closed fully by using from lowering.
its close switch. • A mechanism, which prevents a sudden opening
• The electric tailgate can be opened fully by using and closing, has been adopted.
its tailgate lock release handle. • The easy closer system has been adopted.

BODY 42A-19
DOOR AND TAILGATE
DESCRIPTION OF CONSTRUCTION AND

OPERATION
Electric tailgate control unit system circuit
Electric tailgate motor
Electro-
magnetic Pulse
clutch sensor
Tailgate motor
assembly
Electric tailgate Tailgate latch assembly

main switch
22 12
Electric tailgate Latch
switch
M motor
23
11
A/C-ECU Neutral switch
15
Full latch switch
OSS-ECU 4
Half latch switch
7 17
Combination KOS-ECU Door-ajar switch
meter
8 19
CPU
Electric tailgate
ABS-ECU close switch
CVT-ECU or
ASC-ECU 9
Tailgate lock
release handle
6
3 Electric tailgate
Ignition switch ETACS-ECU buzzer
13
5
1
26
Tailgate sensor (RH)
24
Tailgate sensor (LH)
25
2 Electric tailgate control unit
ACC00139AB
The electric tailgate control unit uses input signals from switches to control the electric tailgate motor.

42A-20 BODY
DOOR AND TAILGATE
ELECTRIC TAILGATE CONTROL UNIT

Open
Arm
No.3 gear
No.2 gear
No.1 gear
Electric tailgate
motor assembly
Electric tailgate control unit
Close ACB05624AB
The electric tailgate motor consists of an electric

motor assembly (incorporating an electromagnetic
clutch and gears), gears and arms. It is integrated in
the electric tailgate control unit. As the motor runs to
the open or close direction, the gears (No.1, No.2,
and No.3) will rotate in that order, thus turning the
arm.

BODY 42A-21
DOOR AND TAILGATE
TAILGATE LATCH
Neutral switch
OFF area Lever
Latch motor (Engaged side)
Neutral switch
ON area
(Disengaged side)
AC402604
ON ON OFF
Lever
Half latch
switch
Door-ajar
switch
AC610260 Full latch
OFF switch
OFF AC402603
ON
AC610751 AB
The tailgate latch includes the latch motor and NOTE: *: Overrun indicates that the striker is pulled
switches. With each switch, ON and OFF is switched further to close side by the tailgate latch in order
by the lever movement. to fully close the electric tailgate securely.
• A half latch switch detects that the latch remains • A door-ajar switch detects the doors are closed
ajar (not engaged fully). This prevents the electric fully. In addition, the switch detects that the elec-
tailgate from opening unintentionally. tric tailgate can be opened.
• A full latch switch detects that the electric tailgate • A neutral switch detects the neutral position of
remains closed fully (overrun*). the latch motor.

42A-22 BODY
DOOR AND TAILGATE
TAILGATE SENSOR When the electric tailgate main switch in the instru-
ment panel is OFF, the electric tailgate cannot be
opened or closed automatically. This prevents the
electric tailgate from an unintentional operation
caused by the accidental pressing of electric tailgate
switch or electric tailgate close switch of the keyless
operation key.
NOTE: If you attempt to open or close the tailgate
automatically while the electric tailgate main switch is
off, the warning buzzer will sound four times to warn
that the electric tailgate cannot be operated.
ELECTRIC TAILGATE SWITCH

A
A
Tailgate sensor ACB05468
Section A – A Normal state
Pressure sensor

ACB05029AB
AC402600
When you press and hold the electric tailgate switch
on the instrument panel, the electric tailgate is auto-
Section A – A Jammed state
matically opened or closed to its full position.
Pressure sensor
ELECTRIC TAILGATE CLOSE SWITCH

Pressure
AC500572
ACC00272 AB
While the electric tailgate is being closed automati-

cally, if pressure is applied to the tailgate sensors Electric tailgate close switch
located at the both sides of electric tailgate, the sys-
Tailgate latch
tem determines that something is caught by the com-
pression of pressure detection sensor. ACB05027AB
If you turn on the electric tailgate close switch inside

ELECTRIC TAILGATE MAIN SWITCH
the tailgate while the tailgate is fully opened, it will be
closed automatically to its full position.
Electric tailgate main switch
TAILGATE LOCK RELEASE HANDLE
The electric tailgate lock release handle which
requires a small operating force and has no tempera-
ture dependency has been adopted to improve the
opening operation. When the handle is operated, the
switch is turned ON or OFF. Refer to P.42A-9.
ACB05028AB

BODY 42A-23
DOOR AND TAILGATE
CONDITIONS FOR AUTOMATIC • When the vehicle is stationary with the selector
OPERATION BY USING THE KEYLESS lever at "P" (parking) position.
• When the electric tailgate is opened or closed
OPERATION KEY, ELECTRIC TAILGATE fully.
SWITCH, TAILGATE LOCK RELEASE • When the system voltage is 11V or more
HANDLE, AND ELECTRIC TAILGATE • When the ignition switch is in the LOCK (OFF) or
CLOSE SWITCH ACC position
• When the electric tailgate main switch is ON. • When the ignition switch is on and the vehicle is
• When the tailgate is unlocked by using the central stationary with the selector lever at park position.
door locking or keyless operation key. • When the tailgate sensor is OFF
Opening and closing the electric tailgate by using the keyless operation key
Electric tailgate Door- Open Door-

Fully closed ajar Fully open Closed ajar Fully closed
position
Keyless operation ON
key (electric
tailgate switch) OFF
ON
Half latch switch
OFF
ON
Full latch switch
OFF
ON
Door-ajar switch
OFF
ON
Neutral switch
OFF
ON
Warning buzzer
OFF
Hazard warning ON
lamps OFF
Electro-magnetic ON
clutch
OFF
Open
Tailgate motor
assembly OFF
Close
Disengaged
side
Latch motor OFF
Engaged
side
ACC00015AB
If the electric tailgate switch of the keyless operation • When you are opening the electric tailgate, the
key is pushed twice, the warning buzzer will sound, warning buzzer will sound four times to open it
and then the electric tailgate will open or close. fully.
When the electric tailgate is operated, the warning • When you are closing the electric tailgate, the
buzzer operates as follows: warning buzzer will sound three times to close it
fully.

42A-24 BODY
DOOR AND TAILGATE
If the electric tailgate switch is operated If the electric tailgate switch is operated when
when the tailgate is being opened the tailgate is being closed automatically, the
automatically, the tailgate will be closed. tailgate will be opened.
Electric tailgate
position Open Fully closed or partially open Fully open
ON
Keyless operation key
(electric tailgate switch) OFF
ON
Half latch switch
OFF
ON
Full latch switch
OFF
ON
Door-ajar switch
OFF
ON
Neutral switch
OFF
ON
Warning buzzer
OFF
ON
Hazard warning lamps
OFF
ON
Electro-magnetic clutch
OFF
OPEN
Tailgate motor assembly OFF
CLOSE
Disengaged side
Latch motor OFF
Engaged side
AC402929AI
When the electric tailgate switch of the keyless oper-

ation key is pushed once while the electric tailgate is
being closed or opened, the warning buzzer will
sound once, and then the electric tailgate will operate
in the opposite direction.

BODY 42A-25
DOOR AND TAILGATE
Opening and closing of electric tailgate using electric tailgate switch
Electric tailgate Door- Door-

position Fully closed Open Fully open Open Fully closed
ajar ajar
ON
Electric tailgate
switch OFF
ON
Half latch switch
OFF
ON
Full latch switch
OFF
ON
Door-ajar switch
OFF
ON
Neutral switch
OFF
ON
Warning buzzer
OFF
Hazard warning ON
lamps OFF
Electro-magnetic ON
clutch OFF
OPEN
Tailgate motor
assembly OFF
CLOSE
Disengaged side
Latch motor OFF
Engaged side
ACC00016AB
When the electric tailgate switch is pressed and held, • When you are opening the electric tailgate, the
the warning buzzer will sound, and then the electric warning buzzer will sound four times to open it
tailgate will open or close. When the electric tailgate fully.
is operated, the warning buzzer operates as follows: • When you are closing the electric tailgate, the
warning buzzer will sound three times to close it
fully.

42A-26 BODY
DOOR AND TAILGATE
Electric tailgate position
Open Fully closed or partially open Fully open
ON
OFF
ON
Half latch switch
OFF
ON
Full latch switch
OFF
ON
Door-ajar switch
OFF
ON
Neutral switch
OFF
ON
Warning buzzer
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OPEN
CLOSE
Disengaged side
Latch motor OFF
Engaged side
AC402929AN
When the electric tailgate switch is pushed once

while the electric tailgate is being closed or opened,
the warning buzzer will sound once, and then the tail-
gate will operate in the opposite direction.

BODY 42A-27
DOOR AND TAILGATE
Opening the electric tailgate fully by using its tailgate lock release handle
Door-
Electric tailgate position Fully closed Open Fully open
ajar
ON
OFF
ON
Half latch switch
OFF
ON
Full latch switch
OFF
ON
Door-ajar switch
OFF
ON
Neutral switch
OFF
Warning buzzer *¹ ON
OFF
ON
Hazard warning lamps *²
OFF
ON
OFF
Open
Close
Disengaged
side
Latch motor OFF
Engaged
side ACC00020AB
If the tailgate lock release handle is pushed once, the NOTE: .

warning buzzer will sound four times, the hazard • *1: The warning buzzer sounds only when the tail-
warning lamps will flash twice, and then the tailgate gate lock release handle is operated with all the
will open. doors unlocked.
• *2: The hazard warning lamps flash only when the
tailgate lock release handle is operated with all
the doors locked.

42A-28 BODY
DOOR AND TAILGATE
ON
OFF
ON
Half latch switch
OFF
ON
Full latch switch
OFF
ON
Door-ajar switch
OFF
ON
Neutral switch
OFF
ON
Warning buzzer
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OPEN
CLOSE
Disengaged side
Latch motor OFF
Engaged side
AC402929AN
If the tailgate lock release handle is pushed once

while the tailgate is being opened fully, the warning
buzzer will sound once, and then the tailgate will
close.

BODY 42A-29
DOOR AND TAILGATE
Closing the electric tailgate fully by using its close switch
Door-
Electric tailgate position Fully open Open Fully closed
ajar
ON
OFF
ON
Half latch switch
OFF
ON
Full latch switch
OFF
ON
Door-ajar switch
OFF
ON
Neutral switch
OFF
Warning buzzer ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Open
Close
Disengaged
side
Latch motor OFF
Engaged
side ACC00017AB
If the electric tailgate close switch is pushed once,

the warning buzzer will sound three times, and then
the tailgate will close.

42A-30 BODY
DOOR AND TAILGATE
ON
OFF
ON
Half latch switch
OFF
ON
Full latch switch
OFF
ON
Door-ajar switch
OFF
ON
Neutral switch
OFF
ON
Warning buzzer
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OPEN
CLOSE
Disengaged side
Latch motor OFF
Engaged side
AC402929AJ
If the electric tailgate close switch is pushed once

while the tailgate is being closed fully, the warning
buzzer will sound once, and then the tailgate will
open.

BODY 42A-31
DOOR AND TAILGATE
SAFETY MECHANISM
If the tailgate bumps against something If something is jammed when the tailgate is
when it is being opened automatically, being closed automatically, it will be opened.
it will be closed. Fully closed or
Electric tailgate position Open Fully open
partially open
ON
When a jam is detected
OFF
ON
Half latch switch
OFF
ON
Full latch switch
OFF
ON
Door-ajar switch
OFF
ON
Neutral switch
OFF
Warning buzzer ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Open
Close
Disengaged side
Latch motor OFF
Engaged side
AC402929AK
If a person or luggage is caught while the electric tail- NOTE: The mechanism, which prevents electric tail-
gate is being closed automatically, or your finger is gate from lowering, may also operate if the tailgate
caught at one of the tailgate sensors located at both gas spring is too deteriorated to support the tailgate.
sides of electric tailgate, the warning buzzer will
sound once and then the tailgate will operate to the A MECHANISM PREVENTING A SUDDEN
opposite direction. OPENING AND CLOSING
NOTE: When the safety mechanism is activated con- If a poor system voltage occurs while the electric tail-
secutively for twice, the operation is changed to the gate is being opened or closed automatically, the
manual operation. If the operation is changed to the system will inhibit the automatic operation. This may
manual operation, fully opening or closing the elec- cause the electric tailgate to stop or move intermit-
tric tailgate once enables the automatic operation. tently. With this feature, the mechanism will prevent
the electric tailgate from closing or opening suddenly.
MECHANISM PREVENTING ELECTRIC
TAILGATE FROM LOWERING
If the electric tailgate is opened automatically to the
full position and then the electric tailgate control unit
detects that the tailgate is being lowered due to addi-
tional equipment on the tailgate or other reasons, the
warning buzzer will sound to warn the driver and
then the system will close the tailgate automatically.

42A-32 BODY
DOOR AND TAILGATE
EASY CLOSER SYSTEM If the electric tailgate is closed to its ajar position, the
system will close the tailgate automatically to its full
position. This ensures safety by closing the tailgate
fully, and improves comfort by eliminating unpleasant
noise during slamming.
Electric tailgate Door-
position Open ajar Fully closed NOTE: The easy closer system can operate even if
the slide door power switch is OFF.
ON
Half latch switch
OFF DATA LIST REFERENCE TABLE
ON Using M.U.T.-III, the input data sent from the sensors
Full latch switch
OFF and switches can be read. For service data items,
ON refer to Workshop Manual.
Door-ajar switch
OFF
ON
Neutral switch
OFF
Disengaged
side
Latch motor OFF
Engaged
side
AC402931AB
WEATHERSTRIP
M2420020000513
A
A
A
A
B
B
B
B
ACB04501
Section A – A Section B – B
Door opening
weatherstrip
Door opening
ACB05720 weatherstrip ACB05719
ACB06034 AB
The double weather strips have been installed along sound-proof and water-proof performances.
the perimeter of the door window to improve the

BODY 42A-33
WINDOW GLASS
WINDOW GLASS
M2420015001640
VISIBLE RAY TRANSMISSIVITY RATE

FOR WINDOW GLASS
ACB05026 AB
Number Name Type Thickness Colour Visible ray

(mm) transmissivity
rate (%)
1 Windshield Laminated glass 4.76 Green 79
2 Front door window glass Tempered glass 4.0 Green 80

42A-34 BODY
SUNROOF
Number Name Type Thickness Colour Visible ray

(mm) transmissivity
rate (%)
3 Rear door window glass Tempered glass 3.1 Green 82
Dark grey (privacy 25
glass)
4 Quarter window glass Green 82
glass)
5 Tailgate window glass Green 82
glass)
6 Sunroof lid glass 3.5 Dark grey 20
NOTE: The visible ray transmissivity rate (%) is a reference value.
The laminated glass has been adopted for the wind- • The privacy glasses for the rear door window
shield, and the tempered glass has been adopted for glass, quarter window glass, and tailgate window
other windows. The window glass has the following glass have been adopted <Optional>.
features.
SUNROOF
M2420016000877
Drain pipe
Sunroof lid glass
Drain pipe
Sunshade
Sunroof motor assembly

(integrated into sunroof-ECU) Drain pipe
ACB05472AB

BODY 42A-35
SUNROOF
Close/down switch
Tilt-up switch
AC505240
Sunroof switch Open switch
AC505239
AC506511AB
The electric sliding glass sunroof with tilt-up mecha- • During the safety mechanism activation, when
nism has been adopted as an option. This sunroof the sunroof close switch is operated, the sunroof
has the following characteristics: lid glass stops. By continuing the close switch
• A lightweight sunroofs has been adopted. operation, the sunroof lid glass can be forcibly
• The sunroof tilts up for approximately 30 mm to closed without activating the safety mechanism
improve ventilation performance. even when the obstacle is detected to be
• The integrated switch allows for all slide open- pinched.
ing/closing, tilt up/down, and stop operations. All
operations are available at one touch. SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY
• If external force is applied during slide closing or
Sunroof motor
tilt down operations that obstructs operations, the
sunroof lid glass will move in the reverse direc-
tion. Sunroof ECU
DESCRIPTION OF CONSTRUCTION AND

OPERATION
SAFETY MECHANISM
Drive gear
• If any obstacle such as a hand or a head is
ACB05550AB
detected to be pinched during a sunroof lid glass
closing operation, the sunroof lid glass is opened The sunroof motor assembly, which consists of the
by approximately 200 mm or more. motor main body, drive gear, and sunroof ECU, is
• During the sunroof lid glass closing operation, by installed in front of the housing.
continuing the sunroof close switch operation, the
sunroof can be forcibly closed without activating
the safety mechanism even when the obstacle is
detected to be pinched.

42A-36 BODY
SUNROOF
SUNROOF-ECU
ETACS-ECU
7
Ignition
switch
3
Driver
circuit M Motor
Tilt-up switch
4 Sunroof-ECU
Open switch
5
Close/Tilt-down Sensor
switch
10
Sunroof switch
EEPROM
1
2
1 2 3 4 5 Sunroof motor assembly
6 7 8 9 10 ZC604430
AC609032
ZC604430
AC700720AB
The sunroof-ECU incorporates a microcomputer and

controls motor operations with the sunroof switch
signals, depending on various conditions.

BODY 42A-37
LOOSE PANELS
LOOSE PANELS
M2420000200418
Front end side panel
Front bumper reinforcement A
Front bumper reinforcement B
ACC00273AB
The front end side panel under the engine compart-

ment absorbs impact energy during frontal collision
more effectively than the predecessor. In addition, an
impact-absorbing bumper minimises the risk of injury
to pedestrians, in particular to legs and head.

42A-38 BODY
CUSTOMISATION FUNCTION
M2420002500891
By operating the M.U.T.-III ETACS system, the fol-
lowing functions can be customised. The pro-
grammed information is held even when the battery
is disconnected.
Adjustment Adjustment item Adjusting content Adjusting content
item (M.U.T.-III (M.U.T.-III display)
display)
Hazard answer Adjustment of the Lock:1, Unlock:2 LOCK: Flashes once, UNLOCK: Flashes
back number of keyless twice (initial condition)
hazard warning Lock:1, Unlock:0 LOCK: Flashes once, UNLOCK: No flash
lamp answer back
flashes Lock:0, Unlock:2 LOCK: No flash, UNLOCK: Flash twice
Lock:2, Unlock:1 LOCK: Flash twice, UNLOCK: Flash once
Lock:2, Unlock:0 LOCK: Flash twice, UNLOCK: No flash
Lock:0, Unlock:1 LOCK: No flash, UNLOCK: Flash once
Lock:0, Unlock:0 No function
Auto fold mirror Electric folding door Not Auto No synchronised operation
mirror automatic Open Vehicle SPD Vehicle speed-dependent operation
unfolding function
<vehicles with Open/Close by IG Ignition switch linked operation
electric retractable OPN/CLS Keyless Keyless entry linked operation (initial
remote controlled condition)
door mirrors>
Auto door Adjustment of the Disable Without function <M/T, A/T, CVT> (initial
unlock auto door unlock condition)
function Always (P pos) With function: Operates when the shift
lever or the selector lever is moved to the
P position. <A/T, CVT>
Always(Lock pos) With function: Operates when the ignition
switch is moved to the LOCK (OFF)
position. <M/T, A/T, CVT>
Door unlock Adjustment of All Doors Unlock Without function: The first operation of
mode power door locks keyless entry system or unlock operation
with selective by KOS unlocks all doors (initial condition).
unlocking <Vehicles Dr Door Unlock With function: The first operation of
without dead lock keyless entry system or unlock operation
system> by KOS unlocks the driver's door only, and
the second unlock operation within 2
seconds after that unlocks all doors.
Deadlock Adjustment of the Twice Operate the lock switch of the keyless
Button dead lock system entry system or KOS twice.(initial
Operation setting procedure condition)
<vehicles with dead Once Operate the lock switch of the keyless
lock system> entry system or KOS once.

BODY 42A-39

display)
Timer lock timer Timer lock period 30 sec. 30 seconds (initial condition)
adjustment 60 sec. 60 seconds
120 sec. 120 seconds
Multi mode Multi-mode keyless Disable No function
entry function D/M: O&C Door mirror fold/unfold operation only
customisation (initial condition)
<Vehicles with
electric retractable
remote controlled
door mirrors>

NOTES

42B-1
GROUP 42B
KEYLESS
OPERATION
SYSTEM (KOS)
CONTENTS
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . 42B-2 OSS (ONE-TOUCH START SYSTEM) . . . . 42B-18

WARNINGS/ALARMS <Standard meter> . . 42B-23
SYSTEM OPERATION. . . . . . . . . . . . 42B-8 WARNINGS/ALARMS
DOOR ENTRY FUNCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . 42B-8 <High contrast meter> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42B-27
KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . 42B-14
CUSTOMISATION FUNCTION. . . . . . 42B-31

42B-2 KEYLESS OPERATION SYSTEM (KOS)
GENERAL INFORMATION
GENERAL INFORMATION
M2421000100630
The keyless operation system (KOS) enables the • The keyless operation key incorporates an emer-
driver to lock or unlock all the doors (including the gency key to lock/unlock the front doors in case
tailgate) by just operating the lock/unlock switch on the battery in the keyless operation key is dis-
the front door outside handles or operating the tail- charged or the keyless operation system is not
gate lock release handle (tailgate open switch, tail- working normally.
gate lock switch), without taking the keyless NOTE: If the immobilizer related system failure
operation key out from his/her pocket or bag when occurs, the engine may not start.
he/she is carrying a keyless operation key which has • The driver can customise KOS; enabling/disa-
been registered in the vehicle's KOS-ECU (Door bling all the system functions, enabling the door
entry function). The KOS also allows the driver to locking/unlocking function only, or enabling the
start the engine without using the conventional engine starting function only (Refer to P.42B-31).
mechanical key (engine start function). Moreover, the • Engine start function: The system has been
KOS incorporates the keyless entry function with changed to the engine start system that supports
which, like the conventional keyless entry system, a OSS (one-touch start system).
driver can perform the remote operation (open-
NOTE: OSS (one-touch start system): System that
ing/closing of all the doors and the tailgate) by using
has the electrically actuated steering lock, and
the lock/unlock switch of the keyless operation key
that allows the engine to be started and the vehi-
and the immobilizer function that prohibits the start-
cle power to be switched via the operation of
ing of engine by using an unauthorised key. The
engine switch.
KOS has the following features:
• Engine starting method when keyless operation
• Each vehicle is provided with two keyless opera-
key battery is discharged: A change has been
tion keys, and up to four keyless operation keys
made to the control that does not use the emer-
can be registered in the vehicle's KOS-ECU.
gency key and performs the control with the dis-
• The keyless operation key also incorporates an
charged keyless operation key inserted in the key
indicator lamp that enables the driver to check if
slot.
the signal is transmitted correctly or if the battery
in the key is discharged (Refer to P.42B-14).

KEYLESS OPERATION SYSTEM (KOS) 42B-3
GENERAL INFORMATION
Engine switch
ACB05528
Combination meter Lock/Unlock switch

KOS-ECU (Passenger's side)
Brake pedal OSS-ECU
(Stop lamp switch)
Key slot Exterior transmitter
Engine-ECU antenna assembly
(Passenger's side)
Interior transmitter
antenna assembly
(Rear)
Tailgate lock
release handle
ETACS-ECU
Electric
steering lock
Lock/Unlock switch
(Driver's side) Exterior transmitter
antenna assembly
(Tailgate)
Exterior transmitter Interior transmitter
antenna assembly antenna assembly ACB05578
(Driver's side) (Front) Outer buzzer
Selector lever assembly
(P range detection switch)
Lock/Unlock switch (Driver's side)
Lock switch
Lock/Unlock switch Tailgate
lock release handle ACB05671
ACC00329AB

GENERAL INFORMATION
Combination meter
Immobilizer/electric Keyless operation
steering lock warning lamp system indicator Multi information display
KEYLESS OPERATION
SYSTEM SERVICE
REQUIRED
ACB05440 ACB05441
ACC00331 AB
Keyless operation key Indicator lamp
Lock switch
Unlock switch
Emergency key
<Vehicles with electric tailgate>
AC703227
ACB05931AB
Main components and functions

KOS-ECU Controls KOS by using the following inputs/outputs and
communications.
• Input of front door lock/unlock switch, input of tailgate lock
release handle, and input of tailgate lock switch
• Communications with ETACS-ECU, OSS-ECU and
combination meter via CAN
• Wireless communication of keyless operation key via the
interior and exterior transmitter antennas as well as via the key
slot integrated antenna
• Output to the outer buzzer
• Output of actuator driving permission signal to electric steering
lock
Electric steering lock (incorporates The steering lock mechanism incorporates a mechanism that can
electric steering lock unit) electrically unlock the lock. When the lock is unlocked electrically,
the steering lock is unlocked approximately for 30 seconds by the
certification communication with OSS-ECU via LIN
communication, the power supply permission signal obtained via
wire communication, and the actuator driving permission signal
received via wire communication from KOS-ECU.

GENERAL INFORMATION

Keyless operation key (incorporates • The keyless operation key receives signals sent from each
emergency key) interior/exterior transmitter antenna, certifies the key ID code,
calculates the encrypted code, and sends the reply data signal
to KOS-ECU. If the integrated battery is discharged, the keyless
operation key receives signals sent from the key slot when it is
inserted in the key slot. Then, it certifies the key ID code,
calculates the encrypted code, and sends the reply data signal
to KOS-ECU via the key slot. Also, when the lock/unlock switch
on the keyless operation key is pressed, the corresponding
signal is sent to KOS-ECU.
• If two or more keyless operation keys registered in KOS-ECU
respond at the same time, their signals would interfere. To avoid
this interference, each signal from KOS-ECU is given the
priority* data, and the keyless operation keys respond in
accordance with this priority.
Lock/Unlock switch Driver’s side Locks/unlocks all the doors and tailgate when the driver carrying
Passenger’s the keyless operation key presses the lock/unlock switch on the
side front door outside handle.
Tailgate lock release handle Unlocks all the doors and the tailgate when a driver carrying the
keyless operation key presses the tailgate lock release handle.
Tailgate lock switch Locks all the doors and tailgate when the driver carrying the
keyless operation key presses the lock switch on the tailgate lock
release handle.
Exterior transmitter Driver’s side Converts the data output from KOS-ECU via wire into a signal, and
antenna assembly Passenger’s sends it to the keyless operation key (For more information on the
side transmission/reception area, refer to the door entry function valid
area P.42B-8).
Tailgate
Interior transmitter Front Converts the data output from KOS-ECU via wire into a signal, and
antenna assembly Rear sends it to the keyless operation key (For more information on the
transmission/reception area, refer to the one-touch start system
valid area P.42B-18).
Outer buzzer The outer buzzer sounds when:
• The doors are locked or unlocked by the door entry function.
• The keyless operation key is carried out of the vehicle when the
power supply mode is other than OFF, and the door is closed.
• The lock/unlock switch on the front door outside handle is
pressed when the power supply mode is other than OFF.
pressed when the keyless operation key is still located inside
the car.
pressed when the door is ajar.
• With the driver's door kept open, the keyless operation key is
not removed from the key slot located in the glove box.
Key slot Converts the data output from KOS-ECU via wire into a signal,
sends it to the keyless operation key, and then sends the reply
data signal from keyless operation key to KOS-ECU.

GENERAL INFORMATION

OSS-ECU Controls OSS by using the following inputs/outputs and
communications.
• Input from the engine switch
• Input from stop lamp switch
• Input from P range detection switch
• Input of monitoring signal for actuator driving permission of
electric steering lock via wire communication with KOS-ECU
• Output of KOS back-up power supply via wire communication
with KOS-ECU
• Power supply output to electric steering lock unit
• CAN communication with KOS-ECU, ETACS-ECU, engine
ECU, and combination meter
• LIN communication with electric steering lock
Engine switch • Output of engine switch ON/OFF signal to OSS-ECU
• Input of LED signal from OSS-ECU
Combination meter (keyless operation Communicates with KOS-ECU and OSS-ECU via CAN. Receives
alarm display) the warning request or warning information from KOS-ECU and
OSS-ECU, and displays the warning.
ETACS-ECU • Communicates with KOS-ECU via CAN. By the door
lock/unlock request or tailgate lock/unlock request from
KOS-ECU, ETACS-ECU outputs the lock/unlock signal. When
the door lock/unlock signal is output, the ETACS-ECU flashes
or illuminates the turn-signal lamps and the room lamp to notify
the driver that the doors are locked/unlocked. Furthermore, by
the multi-mode function of keyless entry, the folding/unfolding of
door mirrors is performed depending on the pattern of door
lock/unlock request from KOS-ECU.
• Communicates with OSS-ECU via CAN, and outputs the door
switch ON/OFF signal.
• Receives the ACC output signal or IG1 output signal sent from
OSS-ECU via wire communication, and drives the ACC relay or
supplies electrical current to the IG1 relay to drive the IG1 relay.
• Using the welcome light function, the headlamps and tail lamps
are illuminated by the door unlock request from KOS-ECU.
Engine-ECU Communicates with OSS-ECU through ETACS-ECU via CAN.
Permits/inhibits the engine starting and controls the engine
operation.
NOTE: *: When registering the keyless operation
keys, KOS-ECU numbers each key (1 to 4) in the
order they are registered (initial priority). This priority
is renewed each time the doors are locked/unlocked
and the engine switch is pressed. For example, when
only keys 1 and 3 have responded to the signal sent
from KOS-ECU, the new priority of the keys would be
1-3-2-4. When keys 3 and 4 have responded, then
the priority of the keys becomes 3-4-1-2.

GENERAL INFORMATION

(Lock/Unlock/Electric
tailgate <Vehicles with Frequency
electric tailgate>) signal
Frequency Exterior transmitter
signal Interior transmitter antenna
antenna assembly (Driver's side/
Frequency (Front/Rear) Passenger's side/
signal Tailgate)
Outer buzzer Door lock actuator

Receiver Tailgate lock actuator
antenna Door mirrors
Room lamp
Key slot Turn-signal lamp
Tail lamp
KOS-ECU Position lamp
CAN-C-Mid Headlamp
communication
Lock/Unlock switch
(Driver's side/
Passenger's side) ETACS-ECU
Tailgate lock switch
Tailgate lock release
handle Each door switch
Electric steering lock

CAN-C
communication
CPU
LIN communication
(Local)
Engine-ECU
Engine switch
(ON signal)
Engine switch
(LED indicator)
OSS-ECU

(P range detection switch)
Brake pedal
(Stop lamp switch) Combination meter
ACB05960 AB

SYSTEM OPERATION
SYSTEM OPERATION
DOOR ENTRY FUNCTION
M2421009100411

<Vehicles outside area>
Front door outside handle (passenger's side)
Front door outside handle (driver's side)

ACB05583

AC608093
ACB05951 AB
Front door outside handle (driver's side, passenger's side)
A
Tailgate lock
Lock/unlock switch AC505249 release handle
AC506192
ACB04499
View A Tailgate lock release handle
Lock switch
Licence plate lamp
AC505247
AC904907
ACB05952 AB

SYSTEM OPERATION
When a driver carrying a keyless operation key the received factor, and sends the result to
presses the lock/unlock switch on the front door out KOS-ECU together with the response data.
side handle (driver's side, front passenger's side) or KOS-ECU determines that the communication is
the lock switch of tailgate lock release handle, the established only when the code calculation results of
KOS-ECU communicates with the keyless operation both parties coincided.
key to authorise* the keyless operation key. When
the KOS-ECU senses the registered keyless opera- LOCKING OPERATION OF DOOR ENTRY
tion key within 70 cm in radius from the periphery of FUNCTION
the vehicle, it requests the ETACS-ECU to The keyless operation key certification communica-
lock/unlock the doors (If the keyless operation key is tion is performed when the lock/unlock switch of front
too high/low or too close to the vehicle, the door door outside handle (driver's side, front passenger's
entry function may not function). side) or the lock switch of tailgate lock release han-
NOTE: *: In the communication for certification of the dle is turned ON. When KOS-ECU can certify the
keyless operation key, KOS-ECU judges if the key- registered keyless operation key outside the vehicle
less operation key ID (specified to keyless operation only, it requests ETACS-ECU to lock all the doors
key) contained in the response data from the keyless (including tailgate).
operation key coincides with the ID that has been NOTE: .
stored in ECU by registration operation. The keyless • When a keyless operation key is located inside
operation key sends the response to KOS-ECU only the vehicle, KOS-ECU does not output a request
when the KOS ID (specific to KOS-ECU) contained for locking all the doors.
in the received data coincided with the stored ID. In • When a keyless operation key with discharged
the beginning of the communication for certification, battery is inserted in the keyless operation key
KOS-ECU creates an encrypted code calculation slot, the keyless operation key is not certified to
factor in random number, and sends it to the keyless be located inside the vehicle.
operation key together with the transmit data. The
keyless operation key calculates the code by using

SYSTEM OPERATION
CONTROL OF LOCKING OPERATION
Lock/unlock switch of Jamming is not transmitted at If there is no keyless operation key response,
door outside handle (driver's the time of tailgate operation. retry that keyless operation key locates outside.
side, passenger's side) or ON
lock switch of tailgate lock
release handle OFF
Outside transmission Transmission
antenna assembly
(operation side) No transmission
antenna assembly
(opposite side) No transmission
Inside transmission Transmission

antenna assembly No transmission
Keyless operation key Response

1 to 4 response No response
a b c i i
d
e
f
g g
h
j
k
l
m
n
Communication
CAN
No communication
a: Exterior data transmitting start: 0.03 to 0.04 sec j: CAN communication onset time: keyless operation key 1
b: Interior data transmitting start: 0.03 to 0.05 sec priority order response time (4-key registration: 0.76 to 0.87 sec)*
c: Keyless operation key 1 response onset time: 0.035 to 0.06 sec k: CAN communication onset time: keyless operation key 2
d: Keyless operation key 2 response onset time: 0.08 to 0.115 sec priority order response time (4-key registration: 0.81 to 0.92 sec)*
e: Keyless operation key 3 response onset time: 0.135 to 0.18 sec l: CAN communication onset time: keyless operation key 3
f: Keyless operation key 4 response onset time: 0.2 to 0.26 sec priority order response time (4-key registration: 0.86 to 0.99 sec)*
g: Reception-waiting time: It is variable by the registration number m: CAN communication onset time: keyless operation key 4
(4 registration: 0.3 sec) priority order response time (4-key registration: 0.93 to 1.07 sec)*
h: CAN communication onset time: It is variable by the registration
key number (4-key registration: 0.68 to 0.73 sec)* n: Operation completed time: keyless operation key 4
priority order response time (4-key registration: 0.69 to 1.09 sec)*
i: Retry transference time (retry completed): 0.01 sec
Function completed time (retry failed): 0.02 to 0.03 sec Note:*: Including CAN communication onset time: to 0.03 sec
AC904852AB
1. KOS-ECU detects the lock/unlock switch ON 3. After the exterior data are transmitted from the
signal of door outside handle (driver's side, front exterior transmitter antenna assembly, the interior
passenger's side) or the lock switch ON signal of data are transmitted from the interior transmitter
tailgate lock release handle. antenna assembly (front, rear).
NOTE: When KOS-ECU detects the lock/unlock 4. After the specified time (varies with the number of
switch ON signal of door outside handle (driver's keyless operation keys registered in KOS-ECU)
side, front passenger's side) or the lock switch ON has elapsed, a confirmation is made that there is
signal of tailgate lock release handle, KOS-ECU no keyless operation key located inside the
judges the lock prohibition condition. When the vehicle.
lock prohibition condition is met, the locking oper- • When KOS-ECU receives the response from the
ation is terminated. keyless operation key that received the interior
2. KOS-ECU transmits the exterior data from the data, KOS-ECU terminates the process without
exterior transmitter antenna assembly on the performing the locking operation.
operation side. 5. KOS-ECU transmits the interior data from the
interior transmitter antenna assembly (front, rear).

SYSTEM OPERATION
6. After the specified time (varies with the number of LOCKING OPERATION INHIBITION
keyless operation keys registered in KOS-ECU) CONDITIONS
has elapsed, a confirmation is made if the lock In the following cases, the door locking operation is
conditions are met. inhibited.
• When KOS-ECU receives the response from the • Any door or the tailgate is open (door switch is
keyless operation key that received the interior ON). (including door ajar)
data, KOS-ECU terminates the process without • Either of the exterior/interior transmitter antenna
performing the locking operation. assembly is being detected to be open, or it is
• When all the responses from the registered key- actually open.
less operation key are the exterior data only, • The wiring of exterior/interior transmitter antenna
KOS-ECU transmits the lock request to assembly is contacting against the power supply
ETACS-ECU. Also, KOS-ECU transmits the key- line.
less operation key number to ETACS-ECU. • The engine switch is other than OFF.
NOTE: When multiple keyless operation keys • The lock and unlock signals are input at the same
responded, KOS-ECU transmits ETACS-ECU the time. (When the tailgate is operated)
key number of keyless operation key that • The door entry function is prohibited by the cus-
responded first. As for the transmission sequence tomisation function.
to ETACS-ECU, the keyless operation key
number is transmitted first, and then the lock UNLOCKING OPERATION OF DOOR
request is output. ENTRY FUNCTION
• If there is no response from the keyless operation The keyless operation key and KOS-ECU communi-
key, Step 6 is performed once. cate to certify the keyless operation key when the
7. KOS-ECU transmits the exterior data from the lock/unlock switch of front door outside handle
exterior transmitter antenna assembly on the (driver’s side, front passenger's side) or the tailgate
operation side. lock release handle (open switch) is turned ON.
8. If the specified time (varies with the number of When KOS-ECU can certify the registered keyless
keyless operation keys registered in KOS-ECU) operation key outside the vehicle, it requests
has not elapsed, a confirmation is made if the lock ETACS-ECU to unlock all the doors (when a regis-
conditions are met. tered keyless operation key is certified outside the
• After retry, when the responses from the regis- vehicle, KOS-ECU requests ETACS-ECU to unlock
tered keyless operation key are the exterior data even when other registered keyless operation keys
only, KOS-ECU transmits the lock request are located inside the vehicle).
(request to lock the applicable position) to NOTE: When the driver's door limited unlocking
ETACS-ECU. Also, KOS-ECU transmits the key- function is set to active using the customisation func-
less operation key number to ETACS-ECU. tion, the operation can be performed using the
NOTE: When multiple keyless operation keys lock/unlock switch of front door outside handle
responded, KOS-ECU transmits ETACS-ECU the (driver's side). Within 2 seconds after the driver's
key number of keyless operation key that door is unlocked by pressing the lock/unlock switch
responded first. As for the transmission sequence of front door outside handle (driver's side) once,
to ETACS-ECU, the keyless operation key pressing the lock/unlock switch of front door outside
number is transmitted first, and then the lock handle (driver's side) unlocks all the doors (including
request is output. tailgate).
• When the locking operation is performed on the
driver's side, the priority order of keyless opera-
tion key is updated.

SYSTEM OPERATION
CONTROL OF UNLOCKING OPERATION

Lock/unlock switch of Jamming is not transmitted at If there is no keyless operation key
door outside handle (driver's the time of tailgate operation. response, retry is performed once.
side, passenger's side) or
open switch of tailgate ON
lock release handle
OFF
antenna assembly
operation side No transmission
antenna assembly
opposite side No transmission
Inside transmission Transmission
antenna assembly No transmission
Keyless operation key Response
1 to 4 response No response
c
a b d h h
e
f
g
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
p
q
Communication
CAN
No communication
a: Exterior data transmitting start: 0.015 to 0.04 sec k: CAN communication onset time: keyless operation key 3
b: Interior data transmitting start: 0.03 to 0.05 sec priority order response time (4-key registration: 0.2 to 0.32 sec)*
c: Keyless operation key 1 response onset time: 0.035 to 0.06 sec l: CAN communication onset time: keyless operation key 4
d: Keyless operation key 2 response onset time: 0.08 to 0.115 sec priority order response time (4-key registration: 0.26 to 0.4 sec)*
e: Keyless operation key 3 response onset time: 0.135 to 0.18 sec m: CAN communication onset time: keyless operation key 1
f: Keyless operation key 4 response onset time: 0.2 to 0.26 sec priority order response time (4-key registration: 0.44 to 0.56 sec)*
g: Reception-waiting time: It is variable by the registration number n: CAN communication onset time: keyless operation key 2
(4 registration: 0.3 sec) priority order response time (4-key registration: 0.48 to 0.61 sec)*
h: Retry transference time (retry completed): 0.01 sec
Function completed time (retry failed): 0.02 to 0.03 sec o: CAN communication onset time: keyless operation key 3
i: CAN communication onset time: keyless operation key 1
priority order response time (4-key registration: 0.1 to 0.2 sec)* p: CAN communication onset time: keyless operation key 4
j: CAN communication onset time: keyless operation key 2
priority order response time (4-key registration: 0.14 to 0.25 sec)* q: Operation completed time: keyless operation key 4
Note:*: Including CAN communication onset time: to 0.03 sec AC904853AB
1. KOS-ECU detects the lock/unlock switch ON 2. When KOS-ECU detects the lock/unlock switch
signal of door outside handle (driver's side, front ON signal of front door outside handle (driver's
passenger's side) or the tailgate lock release side, front passenger's side) or the tailgate lock
handle (open switch) ON signal. release handle (open switch) ON signal,
NOTE: When KOS-ECU detects the lock/unlock KOS-ECU transmits the exterior data from the
switch ON signal of door outside handle (driver's exterior transmitter antenna assembly on the
side, front passenger's side) or the tailgate lock operation side.
release handle (open switch) ON signal, 3. After the exterior data are transmitted from the
KOS-ECU judges the unlock prohibition condition. exterior transmitter antenna assembly, the interior
When the unlock prohibition condition is met, the data are transmitted from the interior transmitter
unlocking operation is terminated. antenna assembly (front, rear).
4. For the specified time (varies with the number of the response from the keyless operation key
keyless operation keys registered in KOS-ECU), meeting the unlock condition is monitored.

SYSTEM OPERATION
• When the registered keyless operation key UNLOCKING OPERATION INHIBITION

receives the exterior data only, KOS-ECU trans- CONDITIONS
mits the unlock request (request to unlock the
In the following cases, the unlocking operation is pro-
applicable position) to ETACS-ECU.
hibited.
• Even after the specified time has elapsed, if
• Any door or the tailgate is open (door switch is
KOS-ECU receives no response that satisfies the
ON). (including door ajar)
unlock, it performs a retry once. (When no
• Inside lock knob position of driver's side and front
response after the retry, KOS-ECU terminates
passenger's side is set to Unlock.
the unlocking operation.)
• The engine switch is other than OFF.
• When the unlocking operation is performed on
• The lock and unlock signals are input at the same
the driver's side, the priority order of keyless
time. (When the tailgate is operated)
operation key is updated.
• The exterior/interior transmitter antenna assem-
UNLOCKING OPERATION INHIBITION bly is being detected to be open, or it is open.
• The wiring of exterior/interior transmitter antenna
TIME (WHEN THE TAILGATE IS assembly is contacting against the power supply
OPERATED) line.
Considering that the customer operates the lock • During the unlocking operation inhibition time
switch of tailgate lock release handle to make sure (When the tailgate is operated)
the doors are locked, the unlocking operation is pro- • The door entry function is prohibited by the cus-
hibited for 3 seconds after the locking operation is tomisation function.
performed by the lock switch of tailgate lock release
handle. Using the customisation function, the unlock ANSWERBACK FUNCTIONS
prohibition time can be changed. When KOS-ECU sends a signal to ETACS-ECU,
ETACS-ECU outputs the lock/unlock signal and acti-
vates the hazard warning lamp to notify the driver the
doors are locked/unlocked.
Lock signal received Unlock signal received
ETACS-ECU Lock signal output Unlock signal output
Hazard warning lamp Flashes once (initial setting) Flashes twice (initial setting)
KOS TIMER LOCK FUNCTION

When none of the doors are opened within 30 sec-
onds after the doors are unlocked by KOS,
ETACS-ECU automatically outputs the door lock sig-
nal to lock the doors. This function prevents the
doors from being unlocked accidentally.

SYSTEM OPERATION
KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION

M2421000400512
KOS-ECU
(incorporating receiver
and antenna)
ACB05509
Radio frequency signal

Lock switch
ETACS-ECU <Vehicles with electric tailgate>
Electric signal
Unlock switch
Door lock actuators (lock/unlock)
Tailgate latch assembly AC608093
Door mirror assembly (unfolding/folding)
Electric tailgate control unit <Vehicles with electric tailgate>
The signal causes the hazard warning lamp to flash once when the doors are locked, or flash twice when unlocked (Initial setting).
The signal causes the room lamp to extinguish when the doors are locked, or come on for 15 seconds when unlocked.
ACC00257 AB
This keyless entry function has the following fea- NOTE: The answerback function can be enabled/dis-
tures: abled using a customisation function (Refer to
• A two switches keyless operation key with lock P.42B-31).
and unlock switches is adopted <Vehicles without • Using the lock/unlock switches, all doors (includ-
electric tailgate>. ing tailgate) can be locked or unlocked, door mir-
• A three switches keyless operation key with lock, rors can be retracted or opened <Vehicles with
unlock and electric tailgate switches is adopted electric-folding door mirrors>.
<Vehicles with electric tailgate>. NOTE: Using the customisation function, a change
• The power door locks with selective unlocking for multi-mode function (door mirrors) can be set.
has been adopted. (Refer to P.42B-31.)
• The KOS-ECU incorporates a receiver and a • Keyless entry timer lock
receiving antenna.
NOTE: Timer of the keyless entry timer lock can be
• Up to 4 security codes can be registered using
enabled/disabled using a customisation function
M.U.T.-III.
(Refer to P.42B-31).
• Answerback functions

SYSTEM OPERATION
DESCRIPTION OF CONSTRUCTION AND • The two switches <vehicles without electric tail-
OPERATION gate> and three switches <vehicles with electric
tailgate> have been adopted for keyless opera-
KEYLESS OPERATION KEY tion key, and the specific encrypted code is trans-
<Keyless operation key> mitted as radio wave signal.
<Front view> • A shining three-diamond mark on the back of the
Lock switch
Unlock switch keyless operation key gives it a classy look.
• Matt-plating is adopted for switches to improve
appearance.
• An indicator lamp, which illuminates when signals
are received, is added on the keyless operation
Indicator lamp key. This indicator lamp informs you of the signal
Electric tailgate switch transmission status and warns you of flat battery.
<Vehicles with electric tailgate> • The switch operation of the keyless operation key
AC608093
Emergency key allows the system to operate as follows:
<Rear view>
Emergency key
Three-diamond mark
AC608094
<Emergency key>
AC610747
ACB05934 AB

SYSTEM OPERATION
Function Keyless operation key operation System operation

Standard function Press the lock switch once. All doors (including the tailgate) are
(lock/unlock/electri locked.
c tailgate <vehicles NOTE: If the retracting function of the
with electric electric folding mirrors is added using a
tailgate>) customisation function, it can be retracted
in synchronisation with a lock operation.
Press the unlock switch once. All doors (including the tailgate) are
unlocked.
NOTE: If the opening function of the
electrical folding mirrors is added as an
adjustment function, it can be opened in
synchronisation with an unlock operation.
While the tailgate is unlocked, press the The electric tailgate is opened or closed.
electric tailgate switch twice within two (Refer to GROUP 42A − Electric Tailgate
seconds. P.42A-17.)
Multi mode Press the lock switch once to lock all doors The door mirrors are retracted.
function <Vehicles (including the tailgate), and within 30
with seconds press the lock switch twice
electric-folding consecutively.
door mirrors> Press the unlock switch once to unlock all The door mirrors return from the retracted
doors (including the tailgate), and within position.
30 seconds press the unlock switch twice
consecutively.
Power door locks Press the unlock switch once to unlock the Power door locks with selective unlocking.
with selective driver’s door, and within 2 seconds, press NOTE: Using a customisation function, the
unlocking the unlock switch again to unlock the front power door locks with selective unlocking
passenger’s door, rear doors and tailgate. can be enabled or disabled.
POWER DOOR LOCKS WITH SELECTIVE • When the unlock switch on the keyless operation
UNLOCKING key is pressed once, only the driver's door is
unlocked. When the keyless operation key unlock
• Responding to the adoption of power door locks
switch is pressed once again within 2 seconds
with selective unlocking, the anti-theft feature has
after the driver's door is unlocked, the front pas-
been improved.
senger's door, rear doors, and the tailgate are
• When the lock/unlock switch of front door
unlocked.
door is unlocked. When the lock/unlock switch of NOTE: When the keyless operation key unlock
front door (driver's side) is pressed once again switch is pressed once, only the driver's door is
within 2 seconds after the driver's door is unlocked. When the keyless operation key unlock
unlocked, the front passenger's door, rear doors, switch is pressed once again more than 2 sec-
and the tailgate are unlocked. onds after the driver's door is unlocked, the
driver's door only is unlocked.
NOTE: When the lock/unlock switch of front door
• Using a customisation function, the power door
locks with selective unlocking can be enabled or
door is unlocked. When the lock/unlock switch of
disabled (Refer to P.42B-31).
front door (driver's side) is pressed once again
more than 2 seconds after the driver's door is
unlocked, the driver's door only is unlocked.
ENCRYPTED CODE

SYSTEM OPERATION
KEYLESS ENTRY HAZARD LAMP

Transmitter lock or unlock button
ANSWERBACK FUNCTION
ON
OFF Keyless entry LOCK

transmitter OFF
switch
UNLOCK
ON
Data Lock relay output
code OFF
ON
Unlock relay output
OFF
AC508281AB
Hazard Illuminate
Four data codes are transmitted when a switch is warning lamp Extinguish
operated once. The encrypted code for user identifi-
cation is a combination of 0 and 1, and more than 1 AC207001AB
million different combinations are available. To pre- The hazard answerback function that allows check-
vent theft by copying signal codes, the data code ing the lock/unlock state of the door easily even in
includes a rolling code with the encrypted code. The the daytime is installed. When the LOCK signal from
rolling code changes each time a signal is sent. the keyless operation key is input to ETACS-ECU, all
doors (including tailgate) are locked and the hazard
RECEIVER warning lamp flashes once. When UNLOCK signal is
The receiver is incorporated into the KOS-ECU input, all doors (including tailgate) are unlocked and
together with the receiving antenna. The receiver the hazard warning lamp flashes twice. Using a cus-
compares the signal which the antenna received tomisation function, the hazard answerback can be
from the keyless operation key with the registered enabled/disabled (Refer to P.42B-31).
encrypted code and the stored code of the receiver,
and when they coincided, outputs a signal from the
KOS-ECU. By connecting M.U.T.-III to the diagnosis
connector, up to four encrypted codes of keyless
operation keys can be registered.
KEYLESS ENTRY ROOM LAMP ANSWER-BACK FUNCTION
ON
Lock relay output a
OFF
ON
Unlock relay output a
OFF
ON
Lock switch output
OFF
ON
Unlock switch output
OFF
Illuminate
Hazard
warning lamp b b b
Extinguish
Illuminate
Room lamp
Extinguish
d c d
a: 0.25 second d: 3 seconds
b: 0.72 second e: 15 seconds e
c: 2 seconds AC612545AB

SYSTEM OPERATION
When the LOCK signal from the keyless operation OPERATION INHIBITION CONDITIONS
key is input to ETACS-ECU, all doors (including tail- The operation of the system is inhibited when:
gate) are locked, and the room lamp is turned off in • Any door or the tailgate is open (door switch is
synchronisation with hazard lamp answerback (when ON). (including door ajar) <Lock function only>
the room lamp is illuminated, the lamp is turned off).
Also, when the UNLOCK signal from the keyless OSS (ONE-TOUCH START SYSTEM)
operation key is input to ETACS-ECU, all doors M2421001200027
(including tailgate) are unlocked, and the room lamp With the one-touch start system, when the engine
is illuminated for 15 seconds in synchronisation with switch mounted inside the vehicle is operated,
hazard lamp answerback. OSS-ECU receives the stop lamp switch input signal
from the brake pedal, the P range detection switch
KEYLESS ENTRY TIMER LOCK TIME input signal from the selector lever assembly, and
When none of the doors is opened within 30 seconds performs the certification communication with key-
after the doors are unlocked by the keyless entry less operation key using KOS-ECU, the certification
system, ETACS-ECU automatically outputs the door communication with electric steering lock, and the
lock signal to lock the doors. This function prevents engine start certification communication with
the doors (including the tailgate) from being unlocked engine-ECU. Only when the input signals and certifi-
unexpectedly by operation errors. Using a customi- cation communications are valid, the one-touch start
sation function, the timer lock period can be changed system performs the power supply changeover con-
(Refer to P.42B-31). trol, the electric steering lock locking/unlocking con-
trol, and the engine start control.

SYSTEM OPERATION
ONE-TOUCH START SYSTEM

CONFIGURATION
Key slot KOS-ECU
CAN-C-Mid
Interior/Exterior Receiver antenna
transmitter antenna
assembly
Frequency Frequency Permission

signal signal signal for
actuator
activation
CAN-C-Mid
Keyless operation key Combination meter
Electric
steering lock
Back-up Power supply

power supply LIN for electric
for KOS-ECU (Local) steering lock unit
activation
OSS-ECU CAN-C-Mid
Engine switch
ETACS-ECU Engine-ECU
CAN-C
(ACC Output)
Brake pedal
(Stop lamp switch) (IG1 Output) IG1 relay
(Starter Output)
(P range detection switch) Starter relay
drive circuit
ACB05954AB
ONE-TOUCH START SYSTEM VALID

AREA
The one-touch start system can be activated by the
pressing of engine switch only when the keyless
operation key is located within the interior antenna
receiving area.

SYSTEM OPERATION
Interior transmitter antenna assembly (Front) Interior transmitter antenna assembly (Rear)
Antenna receiving area

ACB05584 AB
NOTE:
Centre panel box
Key slot
ACB05527AB
If the keyless operation key battery is discharged, the

one-touch start system (power supply changeover,
engine start/stop) becomes available when the key-
less operation key is inserted into the key slot
located in the floor console. When inserting the key-
less operation key to the key slot, easy locking of the
key can be performed by inserting the key from the
emergency key side.
Power supply changeover control (Operation description)
Keyless
operation
key
<3> <2> <2>
or KOS-ECU OSS-ECU Electric steering lock
<4> <5>
Keyless
Key slot operation
key <1> <7> <8> <8> <6> <7> <8> ETACS-ECU
Engine switch Selector lever

assembly
AC905170AD

SYSTEM OPERATION
Flow of power supply changeover control

<1> Under the power OFF status, operate the engine switch without depressing the brake pedal.
<2> By the operation of engine switch, OSS-ECU sends KOS-ECU the certification request via CAN,
and at the same time, supplies the electric steering lock unit power to the electric steering lock.
<3> In accordance with the certification request from OSS-ECU, KOS-ECU performs the certification
communication with the keyless operation key.
<4> KOS-ECU sends the key certification result to OSS-ECU via CAN. OSS-ECU compares its
certification result with the KOS-ECU certification result, and goes to <5> when the results agree
with each other.
<5> OSS-ECU performs the certification communication with the electric steering lock via LIN (local
LIN). The electric steering lock compares the certification result with that of OSS-ECU, and
unlocks the steering lock when the results agree with each other.
<6> After the certification communication with the electric steering lock, OSS-ECU sends the ACC
output to ETACS-ECU. Then, ETACS-ECU drives the internal ACC relay to turn the power to
ACC.
<7> With the power supply set to ACC, when the engine switch is operated again without depressing
the brake pedal <CVT vehicle>, OSS-ECU sends the IG1 output. Then, the current is supplied to
the IG1 relay in ETACS-ECU, thus driving the IG1 relay and turning the power ON. (At this time,
OSS-ECU also communicates with engine-ECU to certify the engine start.)
<8> With the power supply set to ON, when the engine switch is operated again without depressing
the brake pedal, the power of the CVT vehicle is turned OFF when the selector lever is in the P
position, or the power is turned to ACC when in other than the P position. When the vehicle
speed information, which is received via CAN, cannot be received or when the vehicle speed is 3
km/h or more, any standard engine switch operations will not be accepted. However, the power
can be turned to ACC by the emergency stop operation*.
NOTE: *: The emergency stop operation refers to the operation to press and hold the engine
switch for 3 seconds or longer, or to repeatedly press the engine switch 3 times or more within 1
second. After the emergency stop operation, OSS-ECU will not accept the engine switch
operation for 2 seconds.
Electric steering lock locking/unlocking control (Operation description)
<2> <4>
KOS-ECU OSS-ECU Electric steering lock
<3>
<1> <5>
AC905172 AC
Flow of electric steering lock unlocking control

• Lock status of electric steering lock
<1> KOS-ECU outputs the actuator driving permission signal to the electric steering lock.

SYSTEM OPERATION
Flow of electric steering lock unlocking control

<2> By the operation of engine switch, OSS-ECU sends KOS-ECU the certification request via CAN,
and at the same time, supplies the electric steering lock unit power to the electric steering lock.
• Matching of certification results with KOS-ECU (Refer to Step <1> to <4> of power supply
changeover control.)
<3> OSS-ECU performs the certification communication with the electric steering lock via LIN (local
LIN). The electric steering lock compares the certification result with that of OSS-ECU, and
unlocks the electric steering lock by driving the internal actuator when the results agree with each
other.
<4> After the electric steering lock is unlocked, OSS-ECU stops the supplying of electric steering lock
unit power to the electric steering lock. (Subsequently, OSS-ECU sends the ACC output to
ETACS-ECU. Then, ETACS-ECU drives the internal ACC relay to turn the power to ACC.)
<5> After the engine is started, KOS-ECU stops the actuator driving permission signal for the electric
steering lock.
<2> <3>
KOS-ECU OSS-ECU Electric steering lock
<2>
<1>
<2>
ETACS-ECU
AC905174AB
Flow of electric steering lock locking control

• Unlock status of electric steering lock
<1> KOS-ECU supplies the actuator driving power to the electric steering lock.
<2> With the power supply set to OFF, OSS-ECU receives the door status change (excluding tailgate)
from ETACS-ECU via CAN. Using the door status change from "Open to Close to Open" as a
trigger*, OSS-ECU supplies the electric steering lock unit power to the electric steering lock, and
then performs the certification communication via LIN (local LIN). The electric steering lock
compares the certification result with that of OSS-ECU, and locks the steering lock by driving the
internal actuator when the results agree with each other.
NOTE: *: The trigger also includes the operation of lock/unlock button on keyless operation key
as well as the door locking/unlocking by the operation of keyless operation switch.
<3> After the electric steering lock is locked, OSS-ECU stops the supplying of electric steering lock
unit power to the electric steering lock.

SYSTEM OPERATION
Engine start control (Operation description.)
<2> <3>
OSS-ECU <2> <4> ETACS-ECU Engine-ECU <3>
<1> <1>
Engine switch Brake pedal
AC905173AD
Flow of engine start control

<1> With the power supply set to OFF, operate the engine switch while depressing the brake pedal.
• Matching of certification results with KOS-ECU and electric steering lock (Refer to Step <2> to
<5> of power supply changeover control.)
<2> At the same time with the transmission of certification request to engine-ECU via CAN, OSS-ECU
also sends the starter output to engine-ECU.
<3> Engine-ECU supplies current to the starter relay to perform cranking. Also, engine-ECU
compares its own certification result with the OSS-ECU certification result, and starts the engine
when the results agree with each other. (If the certification results do not agree with each other,
engine-ECU stops the supplying of current to the starter relay and injector. Also, OSS-ECU stops
the starter output.)
<4> After the engine start is complete, OSS-ECU stops the starter output.
WARNINGS/ALARMS <Standard meter>

M2421009300426
KOS WARNING AND WARNING INDICATOR LIST

When the KOS fails or operates improperly, the
KOS-ECU warns the driver of this by setting off the
outer buzzer and by displaying the keyless operation
warning by the indicator lamp in the combination
meter.
Item Indicator State Warning operation Warning cancellation
condition (when any of
the condition met)
Keyless The keyless operation Warning indicator • Power supply mode
operation key key with low battery flashes for 30 OFF is detected.
battery low voltage is detected seconds. • 30 seconds have
voltage AC809615 when the engine passed after the
warning switch is pressed. warning output started.

SYSTEM OPERATION

the condition met)
Keyless The keyless operation • The warning • Power supply mode
operation key key is carried out of indicator flashes OFF is detected.
take out the vehicle when the for 5 minutes. • KOS-ECU has
warning AC809615 power supply mode is • Outer buzzer detected a keyless
in other than OFF, sounds for 5.69 operation key inside
and the door is seconds in the vehicle.
closed. pattern 2. • 5 minutes have passed
when the power supply
mode is in ACC.
Door lock The lock/unlock • Warning • The lock/unlock switch
does not switch on the front indicator flashes on the front door
operate door outside handle for 5 seconds. outside handle (driver's
(keyless AC809615 (driver's side, front • Outer buzzer side, front passenger's
operation key passenger's side) or sounds for 2.96 side) or tailgate lock
is located the tailgate lock seconds in release handle (tailgate
inside the release handle pattern 1. open switch, tailgate
vehicle). (tailgate open switch, lock switch) are
tailgate lock switch) pressed again.
are pressed when the • 5 seconds have passed
keyless operation key after the warning output
is still located inside started.
the car.
Door lock The lock/unlock • Warning • All doors are closed.
does not switch on the front indicator flashes • 5 seconds have passed
operate (door door outside handle for 5 seconds. after the warning output
open). AC809615 (driver's side, front • Outer buzzer started.
passenger's side) or sounds for 2.96
the tailgate lock seconds in
release handle pattern 1.
(tailgate open switch,
tailgate lock switch)
are pressed when the
door is ajar.

SYSTEM OPERATION

the condition met)
System error Engine switch is The warning 5 minutes have passed
pressed when an indicator illuminates after the alarm is output,
error has been for 5 minutes. also the power supply
AC809615 detected in EEPROM mode is OFF
of KOS-ECU.
Engine switch is
pressed when a
transmission antenna
has an open circuit or
short to power supply.
Open circuit or short
to earth is detected in
the key slot.
An error is detected,
and the power supply
mode is other than
OFF.
No keyless No keyless operation The warning • Power supply mode
operation key key is detected inside indicator flashes for OFF is detected.
detected the car when the 5 seconds. • 5 seconds have passed
inside the car AC809615 engine switch is after the warning output
pressed. started.
Key reminder With the driver's door • The warning • Key is removed from
kept open, the indicator flashes the key slot in the floor
keyless operation key for 1 minute. console.
AC809615 is not removed from • Outer buzzer • 1 minutes have passed
the key slot located in sounds for 2.96 after the warning output
the floor console. seconds in started.
pattern 1.
Engine switch The lock/unlock • Warning • Power supply mode
reminder switch on the front indicator flashes OFF is detected.
door outside handle for 5 seconds. • 5 seconds have passed
AC809615 (driver's side, front • Outer buzzer after the warning output
passenger's side) or sounds for 2.96 started.
the tailgate lock seconds in
release handle pattern 1.
(tailgate open switch,
tailgate lock switch)
are pressed when the
power supply mode is
other than OFF.

SYSTEM OPERATION
<Sound pattern 1> <Sound pattern 2>

T7
T3 T3 T3 T3
T1 T4 T4 T4
T1
T2 T3 : 1.01 seconds
T4 : 0.55 second
T1 : 0.08 ± 0.01 second T5 : 0.17 ± 0.01 second
T2 : 2.96 seconds T6 : 0.11 ± 0.01 second
T5 T5 T5 T5
T6 T6 T6 T7 : 5.69 seconds
AC501053AE
OSS WARNING AND WARNING INDICATOR LIST

When the OSS fails or operates improperly, the
OSS-ECU warns the driver of this by displaying the
one-touch start system warning by the indicator lamp
in the combination meter.
Item Indicator Factor Warning operation
Immobilizer error • Displayed when the • The warning indicator
certification illuminates.
communication fails with
KOS, electrical steering
AC904253 lock, or engine-ECU.
• Displayed when the power
supply mode is turned ON
while the keyless operation
key is judged to be brought
outside the vehicle with the
power supply mode in
ACC, or when the engine
starting operation is
performed after such a
status.
• Displayed when the
electrical steering lock
cannot be locked because
there is a P detection
switch malfunction.
Steering turn Displayed when the steering • The warning indicator
indication lock is not unlocked because flashes.
the steering force is applied. • Buzzer sounds.
AC904253

SYSTEM OPERATION
Item Indicator Factor Warning operation

Electrical steering Displayed when a malfunction • The warning indicator
lock malfunction occurs to the steering lock illuminates.
system. • Buzzer sounds.
AC809615
Steering lock not − The door is open with the Buzzer sounds.
locked steering lock not locked.
Power supply Displayed when an error • The warning indicator
system error occurs to the power supply illuminates.
system. • Buzzer sounds.
AC809615
Power OFF − The door is open with the Buzzer sounds.

indication power supply mode in ON or
in ACC.
WARNINGS/ALARMS <High contrast meter>

M2421009300415
KOS WARNING AND WARNING INDICATOR LIST

When KOS failed or operated improperly, KOS-ECU
warns the driver of this by setting off the outer buzzer
and the keyless operation warning indicator on the
multi information display in the combination meter.
Item Display content State Warning Warning cancellation
operation condition (when any
of the condition met)
Keyless KEY The keyless Warning • Power supply mode
operation BATTERY operation key with indicator display OFF is detected.
key battery LOW low battery voltage for 30 seconds. • 30 seconds have
AC809614
low voltage is detected when passed after the
warning the engine switch warning output
is pressed. started.
Keyless KEY NOT The keyless • The warning • Power supply mode
operation DETECTED operation key is indicator OFF is detected.
key take out carried out of the display for 5 • KOS-ECU has
AC809615
warning vehicle when the minutes. detected a keyless
power supply • Outer buzzer operation key
mode is in other sounds for inside the vehicle.
than OFF, and the 5.69 seconds • 5 minutes have
door is closed. in pattern 2. passed when the
power supply mode
is in ACC.

SYSTEM OPERATION

Door lock KEY STILL The lock/unlock • Warning • Lock/unlock switch
does not IN VEHICLE switch of the front indicator of the front door
operate door outside display for 5 outside handle is
AC809615
(keyless handle is pressed seconds. pressed again.
operation when the keyless • Outer buzzer • 5 seconds have
key is operation key is sounds for passed after the
located still located inside 2.96 seconds warning output
inside the the car. in pattern 1. started.
vehicle).
Door lock CHECK The lock/unlock • Warning • All doors are
does not DOORS switch on the front indicator closed.
operate door outside display for 5 • 5 seconds have
AC809615
(door open). handle is pressed seconds. passed after the
when the door is • Outer buzzer warning output
ajar. sounds for started.
2.96 seconds
in pattern 1.
System KEYLESS Engine switch is The warning 5 minutes have
error OPERATIO pressed when an indicator display passed after the
N SYSTEM error has been for 5 minutes. engine switch is
AC809615
SERVICE detected in pressed, also the
REQUIRED EEPROM of power supply mode is
KOS-ECU. OFF.
Engine switch is
pressed when a
transmission
antenna has an
open circuit or
short to power
supply.
Open circuit or
short to earth is
detected in the key
slot.
An error is
detected, and the
power supply
mode is other than
OFF.
No keyless KEY NOT No keyless The warning • Power supply mode
operation DETECTED operation key is indicator display OFF is detected.
key detected INSERT detected inside the for 5 seconds. • 5 seconds have
AC904250
inside the KEY INTO car when the passed after the
car KEY SLOT engine switch is warning output
pressed. started.

SYSTEM OPERATION

Key REMOVE With the driver's • The warning • Key is removed
reminder KEY FROM door kept open, indicator from the key slot.
KEY SLOT the keyless display for 1 • 1 minutes have
AC904251
operation key is minute. passed after the
not removed from • Outer buzzer warning output
the key slot. sounds for started.
2.96 seconds
in pattern 1.
Engine − The lock/unlock • Warning 5 minutes have
switch switch on the front indicator passed after the
reminder door outside display for 5 engine switch is
AC904252
handle (driver's seconds. pressed, also the
side, front • Outer buzzer power supply mode is
passenger's side) sounds for OFF.
or the tailgate lock 2.96 seconds
release handle in pattern 1.
(tailgate open
switch, tailgate
lock switch) are
pressed when the
power supply
mode is other than
OFF.
<Sound pattern 1> <Sound pattern 2>
T7
T3 T3 T3 T3
T1 T4 T4 T4
T1
T2 T3 : 1.01 seconds
T4 : 0.55 seconds
T1 : 0.08 ± 0.01 seconds T5 : 0.17 ± 0.01 seconds
T2 : 2.96 seconds T6 : 0.11 ± 0.01 seconds
T5 T5 T5 T5
T6 T6 T6 T7 : 5.69 seconds
AC501053AC
OSS WARNING AND WARNING INDICATOR LIST

When OSS failed or operated improperly, KOS-ECU
warns the driver to that effect by displaying the
one-touch start system warning on the multi informa-
tion display in the combination meter.

SYSTEM OPERATION
Item Display contents Factor

Immobilizer error IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM • Displayed when the
SERVICE REQUIRED certification communication
fails with KOS, electrical
steering lock, or
AC904253
engine-ECU.
• Displayed when the power
supply mode is turned ON
while the keyless operation
key is judged to be brought
outside the vehicle with the
power supply mode in ACC,
or when the engine starting
operation is performed after
such a status.
• Displayed when the
electrical steering lock
cannot be locked because
there is a P detection switch
malfunction.
Steering turn PUSH ENGINE SWITCH Displayed when the steering
indication WHILE TURNING lock is not unlocked because
STEERING WHEEL the steering force is applied.
AC904254
Electrical steering STEERING LOCK Displayed when a malfunction

lock malfunction SERVICE REQUIRED occurs to the steering lock
system.
AC904255
Shift P indication SHIFT TO P POSITION Displayed if the shift lever is in

other than "P" range when the
engine is not running.
AC904256
Steering lock not STEERING WHEEL Displayed when the door is

locked UNLOCKED open with the steering lock not
locked.
AC904257
Power supply ELECTRICAL SYSTEM Displayed when an error occurs

system error SERVICE REQUIRED to the power supply system.
AC904260

Item Display contents Factor

Engine starting PRESS BRAKE PEDAL Displayed when the shift lever
method TO START ENGINE is in other than "P" range or "N"
range at the engine start, or
when the engine switch is
AC904258
pressed without the brake
pedal depressed.
Power OFF − Displayed when the door is
indication open with the power supply
mode in ON or in ACC.
AC904252
M2421000300559
is disconnected.
display)
lamp answer back
unfolding function
door mirrors>


display)
<Vehicles with
remote controlled
door mirrors>
KOS key detect With/without KOS Enable No function
out from window key exterior Disable With function (initial condition)
detection function
<Vehicles with
KOS>
KOS feature KOS function Both enable All KOS functions are enabled (initial
adjustment condition).
<Vehicles with Door Entry enable Only door entry function is enabled.
KOS>
ENG start enable Only engine starting function is enabled.
Both disable All KOS functions are disabled.
KOS unlock Adjusts the door 0 sec. 0 second
disable time unlock inhibition 3 sec. 3 seconds (Initial condition)
period after door
lock is activated. 5 sec. 5 seconds
<Vehicles with
KOS>
Outer buzzer KOS outer buzzer Volume 1 Quieter than the standard
volume volume adjustment Volume 2 Standard volume (Initial condition)
<Vehicles with
KOS> Volume 3 Louder than the standard

51-1
GROUP 51
EXTERIOR
CONTENTS
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . 51-2 WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER . . . . 51-7

REAR WIPER AND WASHER . . . . . . . . . . 51-14
BUMPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51-3
HEADLAMP WASHER <OPTIONAL> 51-16
AERO PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51-5
WIPER DEICER <OPTIONAL> . . . . . 51-17
GARNISHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51-6
OUTSIDE MIRROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51-17
WIPER AND WASHER . . . . . . . . . . . 51-7
CUSTOMISATION FUNCTION. . . . . . 51-20

51-2 EXTERIOR
GENERAL INFORMATION
GENERAL INFORMATION
M2510000103171
FEATURES 11 Roof rails <Optional>
BETTER APPEARANCE BETTER PRODUCT PACKAGE

1. Newly designed front bumper and radiator grille 12. Front bumper to reduce the severity of an injury
2. The windshield washer nozzles are located at the in an accident with pedestrians. (Refer to P.42A-37)
rear end under the hood. 13. Vehicle speed sensitive intermittent windshield
wiper system
BETTER AERODYNAMIC CHARACTERISTICS 14. Rain sensitive AUTO wiper <Optional >
3. Aerodynamic front bumper 15. Wiper deicer <Optional >
4. Front side air dam (Refer to P.51-3) 16. Rear intermittent wiper with an initial continuous
5. Overfender operation and reverse gear-linked operation func-
6. Roof drip moulding (Refer to P.51-5) tions
7. Resin-made arm for the rear wiper 17.Headlamp washer <Optional>
BETTER USER-FRIENDLINESS
8. Electric folding remote-controlled door mirrors SUPPORT RECYCLING OF RESOURCES
<Some models> Aggressively uses PP (polypropylene) materials that
9. Heated door mirrors are easy to recycle and easy to stamp material sym-
10. Door mirrors with built-in side turn-signal lamps bols on the plastic (resin) parts.
<Some models>
6
2,13,14,15
8,9,10
11 6
7,16
3
12 5
4
17
5
ACB05806 AD

EXTERIOR 51-3
BUMPER
BUMPER
M2510001300566
FRONT BUMPER
Front bumper
reinforcement
Front bumper face
Front bumper
side bracket
Splash shield
front
Bulge
ACC00353AB
• Impact-absorbing structure • front side air dam

The front bumper reinforcement has been installed The front side air dams have been adopted in front of
behind the front bumper assembly and the left and right tyres to suppress the airflow
energy-absorbing material has been adopted to against the tyres.
reduce a risk of injury to pedestrian's legs upon a • Resin-made front bumper side brackets have
collision. been adopted to improve the alignment with the
• With the front bumper reinforcement remaining body.
on the body, the front bumper can be removed as
a unit.

51-4 EXTERIOR
BUMPER
REAR BUMPER
Rear bumper face

support bracket
Rear bumper face
ACB05705AB
• Resin-made rear bumper face support brackets

have been adopted to improve the alignment with
the body.

EXTERIOR 51-5
AERO PARTS
AERO PARTS
M2510003001348
Roof drip moulding
Door mirror
Front side air dam

Overfender
shape
Overfender
shape
ACC00450AB
Aerodynamic performance has been improved by the • Roof drip moulding: Groove in the roof moulding
optimised shape of the following parts. is eliminated in order to reduce wind noise and
• Front side air dam: Refer to P.51-3. aerodynamic drag.
• Overfender shape: Overfender shape from the • Door mirror
front bumper to the fender and from the quarter
panel to the rear bumper keeps the off-road vehi-
cle image as an SUV, at the same time the opti-
mised shape of the related parts improves
aerodynamic performance.

51-6 EXTERIOR
GARNISHES
GARNISHES
M2510008300675
Tailgate garnish
ACB05464AB
The following tailgate garnish have been installed on

the body to improve the appearance and marketabil-
ity.

EXTERIOR 51-7
WIPER AND WASHER
WIPER AND WASHER

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER
M2510007001469
Lighting control sensor (rain sensor)

<Optional>
Windshield wiper
blade
Windshield washer hose
Windshield wiper
arm
Windshield
washer nozzle
Wiper link Windshield

assembly wiper motor
Windshield washer tank

<Vehicles with Headlamp washer>

<Vehicles without Headlamp washer>
ACC01033 AB
• 2-speed (low/high speed) windshield wiper has • The mist wiper is turned ON by operating the mist
been adopted. switch in the opposite direction of the wiper
• The intermittent wiper features a vehicle switch for easy operation. The mist wiper is
speed-dependent variable intermittent time func- equipped with the function that quickly wipes
tion*. raindrops away at high speed when the mist
• For the windshield auto wiper, the rain sensitive switch is ON, and when the mist switch is OFF, at
AUTO wiper function* has been low speed until the stop position is reached.
adopted.<Optional> When the mist switch is briefly turned ON, the
• Wiper motor torque has been increased to wiper operates once at low speed.
improve kinetic performance of the wiper in the • The windshield washer nozzles are located at the
snowfall. Wiper blade pressure has been rear end under the hood in order to improve
increased to improve the wiping performance appearance.
while driving at high speed.

51-8 EXTERIOR
WIPER AND WASHER
• The windshield washer is a 2-nozzle and 6-jet • The delayed finishing wipe function* has been
type. adopted to the windshield wiper. When the wiper
• The windshield washer nozzle with the integral operation is stopped after spraying the washer
check valve has been adopted to prevent the fluid, the wiper operates once to wipe out the
washer fluid from running down, and to improve washer fluid ran down.
the response to switch operation. NOTE: *: Using the customise function, the vehicle
• The washer motor for both of a windshield speed-dependent variable intermittent time function,
washer motor and a rear washer motor has been rain sensitive AUTO wiper function, washer-linked
installed to reduce the weight. wiper function and the delayed finishing wipe func-
• Washer-linked wiper function* has been adopted. tion can be selected (Refer to P.51-20).
The washer fluid can be injected without operat-
ing the wiper. When the ignition switch is turned
ON while the washer switch is ON, the washer
motor operates but the wiper does not.
Intermittent control (Vehicle 2. When ETACS receives the ON signal of the wind-
speed-dependent variable type) <Initial shield intermittent wiper switch, it turns the wind-
shield wiper relay ON. When the wiper reaches
condition: with function>
the stop position, the windshield wiper auto-stop
Change in intermittent time by variable signal turns OFF, and the windshield wiper relay
intermittent wiper control switch turns OFF. When the intermittent time T1 calcu-
(when vehicle is stationary)
30 lated by step 1 has elapsed after the windshield
wiper relay ON, the windshield wiper relay turns
ON again, and the above-mentioned operation is
Intermittent
time T1 repeated.
(seconds)
0
FAST SLOW Windshield ON
Variable intermittent wiper wiper auto-
control switch position stop signal
OFF
Change in intermittent time according ON
to vehicle speed Windshield
30 wiper relay T1 T1 T1
When at SLOW position
Intermittent
time T1
(seconds) When at FAST position AC101493AH
0 100 Mist wiper control

Vehicle speed (km/h)
Windshield mist ON
AC101502 AC
wiper switch
OFF
1. ETACS calculates the windshield intermittent
wiper interval T1 from the position of the wind- Windshield wiper ON
auto-stop signal
shield intermittent wiper switch on the column OFF
switch and the vehicle speed signal (sent from Windshield wiper ON
the combination meter to ETACS via CAN com- relay
OFF
munication).
Windshield wiper ON (HIGH)
NOTE: Using the customise function, the vehicle speed switching
OFF (LOW)
relay
speed-dependent variable intermittent time func-
AC207004AH
tion can be invalidated (Refer to P.51-20).

EXTERIOR 51-9
WIPER AND WASHER
When the windshield wiper mist switch on the col-

umn switch is turned ON while the ignition switch is
in ACC or ON position, the column switch turns the
windshield wiper relay ON. At the same time, the
wiper speed switching relay turns ON (HI). When the
windshield mist wiper switch is ON, the windshield
wiper operates at high speed.
Low speed wiper and high speed wiper control
ON
Windshield low-speed
wiper switch OFF
ON
Windshield high-speed
wiper switch
OFF
ON
Windshield wiper auto-stop
signal
OFF
ON
Windshield wiper
relay
OFF
(HI) ON
Windshield wiper speed
switching relay
(LO) OFF
Low speed operations High speed operations
AC506610AF
When the windshield low speed wiper switch on the When the windshield high speed wiper switch is
column switch is turned ON while the ignition switch turned ON, the windshield wiper relay turns ON.
is in ACC or ON position, the column switch turns the Also, the wiper speed switching relay turns ON (HI),
windshield wiper relay ON. Also, the wiper speed and the windshield wiper operates at high speed.
switching relay turns OFF (LO), and the windshield
wiper operates at low speed.

51-10 EXTERIOR
WIPER AND WASHER
Windshield wiper linked with washer function <Initial condition: with function>
ON
Windshield washer switch
OFF
t
ON
Windshield washer relay
OFF
Windshield wiper ON
auto stop signal OFF
ON
Windshield wiper relay
OFF
T T
Windshield wiper Windshield wiper switch in

switch in off position intermittent operation position AC802704 AE
t: Less than 0.35 seconds

T: Windshield wiper operation time
Wiper switch Washer switch ON time (t) Windshield wiper operation time
(T)
OFF position Less than 0.35 second 0 second
0.35 second to less than 0.5 1 second
second
0.5 second or more 3 seconds
INT position Less than 0.35 second 1 second
second
AUTO position Less than 0.35 second 1 second
second
second
LO, HI, MIST position - 3 seconds
When the windshield washer switch on the column Even when the windshield washer switch is turned
switch is turned ON while the ignition switch is in ON while the windshield wiper is operating intermit-
ACC or ON position, ETACS turns the windshield tently, the intermittent action starts again after the
washer relay ON. linked operation is finished.
When the windshield washer switch is kept ON for If the ignition switch is turned to ACC position while
0.35 second or longer, the windshield wiper relay the windshield washer switch is ON, the windshield
(the wiper relay output time varies depending on the washer relay turns ON, but the windshield wiper
conditions. For details, see the table.) is turned ON, does not perform the linked operation. When the
and the windshield wiper operates at high speed. windshield washer switch is turned OFF and then
The windshield wiper is turned OFF with 3 seconds ON, the windshield wiper starts the linked operation.
delay after the windshield washer switch is turned
OFF.

EXTERIOR 51-11
WIPER AND WASHER
NOTE: .
• Using the customise function, the washer linked
windshield wiper function can be invalidated
(Refer to P.51-20).
• Using the customise function, when the washer
linked windshield wiper function is invalidated,
only the washer operates. It is useful to melt ice
from the frozen windshield.
Comfort washer function <Initial condition: without function>

The table below shows the switch operations of the
comfort washer.
Wiper Washer-linked wiper: Enable Washer-linked wiper: Disable
switch
Vehicle speed less Vehicle speed Vehicle speed less Vehicle speed
than 130km/h 130km/h or more than 130km/h 130km/h or more
OFF Intermittent washer 1-second washer and 1-second washer 1-second washer
and wiping wiping
INT Intermittent washer 1-second washer and 1-second washer 1-second washer
and wiping wiping
AUTO Intermittent washer 1-second washer and Intermittent washer 1-second washer and
and wiping wiping and wiping wiping
LO Intermittent washer 0.5-second washer Intermittent washer 0.5-second washer
and wiping and wiping
HI or MIST 1-second washer 1-second washer 1-second washer 1-second washer
NOTE: .
• The comfort washer function can be enable by
the customise function.(Refer to P.51-20.)
• When the windshield wiper switch is operated
while the comfort washer function is activated,
the comfort washer function will be suspended.
Intermittent washer and wiping
ON
OFF
t
Windshield wiper auto ON
stop signal OFF
ON
OFF
T
ON
OFF
T1
T: 1.0 second AC802531AC
T1: 3.0 second
The intermittent washer and wiping operate as follows:

51-12 EXTERIOR
WIPER AND WASHER
1. Turn on the windshield washer switch for less NOTE: .

than 0.35 second. • If the windshield washer switch is turned ON for
2. The windshield washer operates for 0.5 seconds. less than 0.35 second when the windshield
3. The windshield washer operates intermittently 4 washer is injecting washer fluid for 0.5 seconds
to 6 times, and the windshield wipers operate, and when the windshield washer is injecting
linked with the windshield washer operation. washer fluid intermittently 4 to 6 times, the inter-
mittent washer and wiping will stop.
4. The windshield wipers operate for 3 seconds.
• If the windshield washer switch is turned ON for
less than 0.35 second when the windshield wip-
ers are operating for 3 seconds, the windshield
washer operates intermittently 4 to 6 times again.
1-second washer and wiping
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
T
ON
OFF
T1

AC802442 AC
T: 1.0 second
T1: 3.0 second
When the windshield washer switch is turned ON for When the windshield washer switch is turned ON for
less than 0.35 second, the windshield washer oper- less than 0.35 second, the windshield washer oper-
ates for 1 second. The windshield washer operates ates for 0.5 second.
for 1 second, and then the windshield wipers operate
for 3 seconds. 1-second washer
NOTE: .
• If the windshield washer switch is turned ON for
less than 0.35 second when the windshield wip- Windshield ON
ers are operating for 3 seconds, the windshield washer switch OFF
washer operates for 1 second again. t
0.5-second washer Windshield ON

washer relay OFF T
Windshield washer ON
switch OFF T: 1.0 second AC802443AC
t When the windshield washer switch is turned ON for

Windshield washer ON
less than 0.35 second, the windshield washer oper-
relay OFF T ates for 1 second.

T: 0.5 second AC802444 AC

EXTERIOR 51-13
WIPER AND WASHER
Rain sensitive AUTO wiper function <Optional>
Dry windshield
Windshield
Lighting control sensor
Optical
element
High
intensity
Infrared rays
Emitter diode Receiver diode
Wet windshield
Raindrop Windshield
Optical
element
Reduced
intensity
Windshield
Emitter diode Infrared rays
Receiver diode
ACB05683AB
• Lighting control sensor (rain sensor) has been • Dry windshield: All infrared rays emitted from the
installed in the upper part of the windshield to emitter diode are reflected by the windshield and
sense the raindrops and windshield wiper can be directed to the receiver diode as they are.
operated when the ignition switch is at ON and • Wet windshield: Part of the infrared rays emitted
wiper switch is at AUTO position. from the emitter diode are transmitted to outside
• The lighting control sensor detects the raindrops of the windshield through the raindrops, and the
on the windshield surface using the optical ele- infrared rays with reduced intensity are directed
ment, and it automatically switches the wind- to the receiver diode.
shield wiper operation, depending on the amount NOTE: Using the customise function, the rain sensi-
of rainfall, to the intermittent or LO/HI operation. tive AUTO wiper function can be invalidated (Refer to
• The lighting control sensor detects the raindrops P.51-20).
using the reflections of infrared rays, and
depending on the amount of rainfall, it automati-
cally adjusts the wiping speed.
Delayed finishing wipe function <Initial condition: with function>

1. When the washer lever of the column switch is NOTE: Using the customise function, the delayed fin-
operated for 0.5 seconds or longer with the igni- ishing wipe function can be invalidated (Refer to
tion switch in the ACC or ON position, or when P.51-20).
the comfort washer function is enable, the
washer fluid is sprayed and the wiper is operated.
6 seconds after stopping the wiper operation, the
wiper operates once to wipe out the washer fluid
ran down.

51-14 EXTERIOR
WIPER AND WASHER
REAR WIPER AND WASHER

M2510008000759
Rear washer
nozzle
Rear washer hose
Rear wiper blade
Rear wiper arm
Rear wiper
motor
ACC00126 AC
• Resin wiper arm has been adopted to achieve • Reverse gear-linked rear wiper function (auto-
weight reduction and integration of the arm and matic rear window wiper operation with reverse
blade. gear engaged)* has been adopted. In this func-
• Fixed interval type intermittent wiper* has been tion, the rear wiper performs continuous
adopted to provide a clear rear view in rainy low-speed operation for 3 cycles approximately 1
weather. second after the selector lever is shifted to "R"
• The washer tank is shared with the windshield position while the front or rear wiper switch is in
washer. the intermittent position, and then proceed with
• Washer-linked wiper function* has been adopted. the intermittent operation.
Washer fluid can be optionally injected without NOTE: *: Using the customise function, the fixed
operating the wiper optionally. When the ignition interval type intermittent wiper, reverse gear-linked
switch is turned ON while the washer switch is rear wiper function and the washer-linked wiper func-
ON, the washer motor operates but the wiper tion can be adjusted (Refer to P.51-20).
does not.

EXTERIOR 51-15
WIPER AND WASHER

Rear wiper control <Initial condition: Front or rear wiper switch ON>
ON
Rear wiper switch
OFF
Inhibitor switch ON
"R" position
OFF
T2 T3 t T2 T3 T3
ON
Rear wiper relay
OFF
AC207474AO
T1 T4 T2 T4 T1 T4 T2 T4 T2 T4
t: 1.0 second T2: 7.4 seconds T4: 0.6 second

T1: 3.0 seconds T3: 8.0 seconds
When the rear wiper switch on the column switch is When the selector lever is moved to R (reverse)
turned ON while the ignition switch is in ACC or ON position during the front or rear wiper operation, the
position, ETACS turns the rear wiper relay ON for 3 inhibitor switch R (reverse) turns ON, and 1 second
seconds (for approximately 2 cycles) and operates after that, ETACS turns the rear wiper relay ON for 3
the intermittent action in 8 seconds interval. seconds (for approximately 3 cycles), and operates
the intermittent action in 8 seconds interval again.
NOTE: Using the customise function, the operation
with front/rear wiper ON can be switched to the oper-
ation with the rear wiper only ON. (Refer to P.51-20.)
Washer-linked rear wiper function <Initial condition: with function>

ON
Rear washer switch
OFF
ON
Rear washer relay
OFF
T2 T3
t t t
ON
Rear wiper relay
OFF
T1 T1 T1
T4 T4
Rear wiper switch Rear wiper switch in on position
t : 0.3 second AC507498AE
in off position
T1 : 3 seconds
T2 : 7.4 seconds
T3 : 8 seconds
T4 : 0.6 second
When the rear washer switch on the column switch is If the rear washer switch is turned ON during the rear
turned ON while the ignition switch is in ACC or ON wiper operation, 7.4 seconds after turning OFF the
position, ETACS turns the rear washer relay ON. rear wiper relay turns OFF, the intermittent action is
The rear washer relay turns ON after the rear washer resumed in 8 seconds interval.
switch has been ON for 0.3 seconds, then turns the NOTE: Using the customise function, the washer
rear wiper relay ON to operate the rear wiper simul- linked rear wiper function can be invalidated (Refer
taneously. When the rear washer switch is turned to P.51-20).
OFF, after 3 seconds the rear wiper is turned OFF.

51-16 EXTERIOR
HEADLAMP WASHER <OPTIONAL>
HEADLAMP WASHER <OPTIONAL>

M2510000500448
Headlamp washer cover
Headlamp washer
cover A
Headlamp washer motor
Headlamp washer hose
Section A – A Section A – A <Headlamp washer operated>
Headlamp
Headlamp
washer
nozzle
Headlamp washer
actuator assembly
Front bumper
ACC00343 AC
• The headlamp washer can be operated with the • A headlamp washer mechanism that thrusts out
ignition switch at the ON or ACC position and the and retracts nozzles, utilizing the water pressure
headlamp switch at the ON position. Push the produced by motors has been adopted as an
headlamp washer button located at the end of the option. This mechanism contributes to better
lighting lever once and the washer will be appearances of vehicles when their washer noz-
sprayed onto the headlamps. zles are not in use.
• The headlamp washer tank used for this mecha-
nism is also used for the windshield and rear win-
dow washers.

EXTERIOR 51-17
WIPER DEICER <OPTIONAL>
WIPER DEICER <OPTIONAL>

M2510008200184
Windshield glass
Heated print
ACB05706AB
For the prevention measures for the wiper freeze-up

at the stop position, the wiper deicer has been
installed. The wiper is deiced by the heater element
integrated in the windshield to perform its operation.
In addition, the wiper deicer is linked with the rear
window defogger.
OUTSIDE MIRROR
M2510008101005
Door mirror assembly
Mirror glass
Side turn-signal
lamp Remote controlled Mirror folding/
mirror switch unfolding switch
ACC00012 AB
Door mirrors have the following features: • Door mirrors with built-in side turn-signal lamps
• Electric folding remote-controlled door mirrors have been adopted <Some models>.
have been adopted <Some models>. • Low air resistance door mirror shape has been
• Heated mirrors have been adopted. introduced.

51-18 EXTERIOR
OUTSIDE MIRROR
• One of the optional functions, such as the vehicle NOTE: *: Using the customise function, the vehicle
speed-dependent automatic unfolding function*, speed-dependent automatic unfolding function, igni-
ignition switch-linked function* or keyless tion switch-linked function or the keyless entry-linked
entry-linked function*, can be selected. function can be selected (Refer to P.51-20).

Electric retractable remote controlled door mirror
ON
Ignition switch T1 T1
(ACC) OFF
Remote controlled ON
mirror switch (folding/ OFF
unfolding switch)
Electric retractable remote ON
T2 T2 T2
controlled mirror
(Unfolding) OFF
t t t
Electric retractable remote ON
controlled mirror T2 T2 T2
(Folding) OFF
t: 0.1 second
T1: 30 seconds
T2: 16 seconds
AC506503AB
When the folding/unfolding switch on the electric NOTE: Whether the door mirrors are at the folding or
remote control mirror switch is turned ON while the unfolding position is determined by ETACS accord-
ignition switch is in ACC or ON position, ETACS ing to the memory of the door mirror relay position
turns either of the door mirror fold relay or unfold (fold/unfold) operated previously. For this reason, if
relay ON for 16 seconds to fold or unfold the door the mirrors are manually folded, they may not move
mirrors. Even after the ignition switch is turned OFF, when the folding/unfolding switch is pressed next
the door mirrors remain operable for 30 seconds. time.
If the folding/unfolding switch on the remote control
mirror switch is turned ON while one of the door mir-
ror relays (fold/unfold) is in operation, the other oper-
ating relay is turned ON after 0.1 second.
Automatic unfolding function <Initial condition: Keyless entry-linked

folding/unfolding function)
1. Vehicle speed-dependent unfolding
1.
30 km/h
Vehicle speed
0 km/h
ON
Ignition switch
OFF
Remote controlled mirror switch ON

(folding/unfolding switch) OFF
ON
Door mirror unfold relay T
OFF
ON
Door mirror fold relay T
OFF
Unfolding
Door mirror position
Folding
T : 16 seconds AC207002AB

EXTERIOR 51-19
OUTSIDE MIRROR
When the vehicle speed reaches 30 km/h with the

ignition switch ON and the mirrors folded, ETACS
turns the door mirror unfold relay (ON) for 16 sec-
onds to unfold the door mirrors. However, the door
mirrors do not return to their unfolded positions auto-
matically if the ignition switch is turned from OFF to
ON, and then the folding/unfolding switch on the
remote control mirror switch is operated.
2. Ignition switch-linked folding/unfolding function

1.
ON
Ignition switch
OFF
ON
Driver's door switch
OFF
ON
Door mirror unfold relay T T
OFF
ON
Door mirror fold relay T T
OFF
Unfolding
Folding
T: 16 seconds AC707463AB
When the ignition switch is turned ON with the mir-

rors folded, ETACS turns the door mirror unfold relay
(ON) to unfold the door mirrors. When the door is
opened with the ignition switch OFF (LOCK), ETACS
turns the door mirror fold relay (ON) to fold the door
mirrors.
3. Keyless entry-linked folding/unfolding function

1.
Keyless entry transmitter ON

unlock switch OFF
Keyless entry transmitter ON

lock switch OFF
ON
Door mirror unfold relay T T
OFF
ON
Door mirror fold relay T T
OFF
Unfolding
Folding
T: 16 seconds
AC707464 AB
Linked with the keyless entry transmitter locking

operation,* ETACS turns the door mirror fold relay
ON to fold the door mirrors, and linked with the key-
less entry transmitter unlocking operation, ETACS
turns the door mirror unfold relay ON to unfold the
door mirrors.

51-20 EXTERIOR
NOTE: .
• *: For vehicles with KOS, the door mirrors are
folded linked with lock operation of KOS, and
unfolded linked with unlock operation.
• Using the customise, the functions 1, 2, and 3
can be selected or disabled (Refer to P.51-20).
• Whether the door mirrors are at the folding or
unfolding position is memorised and determined
by the previously operated door mirror relay
(fold/unfold). For this reason, if the mirrors are
manually folded, they are not unfolded automati-
cally.
M2510001400820
is disconnected.
display)
Front wiper Adjustment of the Normal INT Intermittent wiper interval is fixed to 4
operation intermittent seconds.
windshield wiper Variable INT Intermittent wiper interval is calculated only
operation <vehicles by the wiper volume control.
without lighting
control sensor> Speed Sensitive Intermittent wiper interval is calculated
according to the intermittent wiper volume
control and vehicle speed (initial
condition).
Adjustment of the Normal INT Intermittent wiper interval is fixed to 4
intermittent seconds.
with lighting control
sensor> Speed Sensitive Intermittent wiper interval is calculated
control and vehicle speed.
Rain Sensitive Intermittent wiper interval is calculated
control and lighting control sensor (initial
condition).
Front /rear Disabling or Only Washer No function
wiper washer enabling Washer & Wiper With function: Without delayed finishing
washer-linked wiper wipe function <Initial condition>
function
With after wipe With function: With delayed finishing wipe
function

EXTERIOR 51-21

display)
Intelligent/Comf With/without Disable No function (Initial condition)
ort washer Comfort washer Enable With function
function
Intermittent time Adjustment of rear 0 sec No wiper interval
of rear wiper wiper interval 4 sec 4 seconds
8 sec 8 seconds (initial condition)
16 sec 16 seconds
Rear wiper Low Disabling or Disable No function
speed mode enabling rear wiper Enable With function (initial condition)
continuous
operation
Rear wiper Adjustment of Enable(R wip.ON) Operates only when the rear wiper switch
(linked reverse automatic rear is ON.
gear) window wiper Enable(R/F wip.) Operates only when the front or rear wiper
operation with switch is ON (initial condition).
reverse gear
engaged
unfolding function
door mirrors>

NOTES

52-1
GROUP 52
INTERIOR AND
SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT
SYSTEM (SRS)
CONTENTS
INTERIOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52A
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 52B

NOTES

52A-1
GROUP 52A
INTERIOR
CONTENTS
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . 52A-2 SEAT BELT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52A-7
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND FLOOR TRIMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52A-8

CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52A-3 INTERIOR TRIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52A-8
DOOR TRIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52A-9
SEAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52A-4
FRONT SEAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52A-4 LUGGAGE ROOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52A-10
SECOND SEAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52A-6
HEADLINING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52A-11

52A-2 INTERIOR
GENERAL INFORMATION
GENERAL INFORMATION
M2520000101767
Functionality, interior comfort, and safety have been 5. Rear console tray
emphasized, giving interior design for elegance and 6. Rear floor console box
relaxation space. Various measures have been taken 7. Rear side box (lower quarter trim RH)
actively to protect the environment and recycle
8. Door pocket (front door trim, rear door trim)
resources.
FEATURES Safety enhancement
1. Front and rear collision protection seat mecha-
Quality improvement nism (front seat)
1. Full interior trim 2. ISO-FIX child seat fixing bar (second seat out-
2. The double-action folding mechanism of the sec- side)
ond seat allows to flip up the seat cushion and 3. Tether anchorage (second seat outside)
then fold the seatback with easy operation. Due 4. ELR 3-point seat belt
to this, a lowered flat cargo space can be 5. Seat belt retractor with a driver's side pre-ten-
achieved without any compromise to seating sioner and force limiter
comfort.
6. Seat belt retractor with a passenger’s side
Usability improvement pre-tensioner and force limiter
1. Armrest (rear floor console, second seat, front Consideration for the optimum driving position
door trim, rear door trim)
1. Seat height adjustment (driver’s seat)
2. Cup holder (front floor console, second seat arm-
2. Headrestraint with height adjustment (front seat)
rest)
3. Seat slide adjustment (front seat)
3. Bottle holder
4. Tonneau cover <Vehicles with tonneau cover> Measures for resource recycling
5. Luggage hook 1. Aggressively use PP materials that are easy to
recycle and easy to stamp material symbols on
Convenient boxes the plastic (resin) parts.
1. Glove box
2. Reduction of chemical material (formaldehyde*,
2. Card holder (glove box) organic solvent)
3. Seatback pocket (front seat)
NOTE: *: Clear and colourless, toxic, irritating odour
4. Centre lower tray

INTERIOR 52A-3
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND FLOOR CONSOLE
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND FLOOR CONSOLE

M2520001001473
Key box
Glove box assembly
Instrument centre panel

Decoration panel
Key box
Armrest
Console cup holder
Front floor console
Rear floor console
Console cup holder

USB adapter Accessory
socket
ACC00967AB
The instrument panel offers the following features: • The division unit of each part has been enlarged,
also the gap and level difference between the
instrument panel has been minimised to achieve
the delicate quality.

52A-4 INTERIOR
SEAT
• A lamp has been added to the large-sized glove • Soft pads attached around the upper part, thus
box with card holder have been installed for the improving the sense of touch.
improved convenience. • Ergonomic layout where controls are arranged at
• To the lower part of centre panel, a centre lower the centre of the dash board and face towards
tray that can store up to 6 CDs has been installed the driver.
with which jumping out or dropping of stored • High grossed black finish on the instrument cen-
items during abrupt start is prevented. tre panel.
• A console cup holder that can store two plastic • Decoration panels, which underline sportiness
bottles or brick packs has been installed in the (silver carbon) or luxury (wood grain tone), are
front floor console. arranged optimally in the vicinity of front passen-
• Rear console tray that can store a mobile phone, ger. <wood grain tone: optional equipment>
cards, pens, and others has been installed to the • The engine can be started and power supply to
rear floor console, and additionally, rear floor con- accessories can be turned on and off in the con-
sole box that can store 10 CDs or 7 DVDs has ventional manner by inserting a keyless operation
been installed to under the rear floor console. key into the key slot on the instrument panel cen-
• Simple and clear form by reducing separations on tre lower (upper part of the front floor console).
the instrument panel.
SEAT
FRONT SEAT
M2520004001513
Seatback pocket
Headrestraint
adjustment
Reclining adjustment
<Front/rear collision protection seat

mechanism>
Headrestraint
Seatback
frame Cross frame
Height adjustment
Slide adjustment
ACB05051AB
The front seat offers the following advantages: • The seat height adjustment function has been
• The seats are designed to be adjustable in the introduced to the driver’s seat. This function
reclining and sliding directions. raises and lowers the seat cushion together with
• Headrestraints with a vertical adjustment mecha- the seatback, thus the driver's waist position in
nism have been adopted. relation to the seatback is always kept constant,

INTERIOR 52A-5
SEAT
resulting in the improved riding comfort. By the • Glared fabric has been newly developed based
height adjustment amount up to 45 mm, the more on fine and high-quality fabric has been adopted,
optimised driving position can be adjusted. The thus offering tailor-made smoothness.
pump type seat height adjustment lever has been • Lateral holding of the seatback has been
adopted for convenient use. improved.
• For the driver's seat, 4 WAY power seat has been • The head restraints is in height than the prede-
adopted for better convenience. <Vehicles with cessor, thus enhancing safety.
power seat> • The heated seat switch is relocated from the seat
• The driver's seat and passenger's seat have to the front floor console, thus improving ease of
seatback pockets for better convenience. operation. <Vehicles with heated seats>
• The frontal and rear-end collision protection seat
structure (backward layout of seatback frame and
optimisation of headrestraint position) has been
adopted to enhance safety during a collision at
lower vehicle speed. The cross frame has been
installed below the seat cushion to reduce the for-
ward travel distance of the passengers during a
frontal collision and has enhance safety.

52A-6 INTERIOR
SEAT
SECOND SEAT
M2520005000364
Reclining
adjustment
Double-action
folding structure
Cup holder
<Double-action folding structure>

: ISO-FIX child seat fixing bar positions
: Tether anchorage positions
ACC00464AB
The second seats offer the following features. • Headrestraints have been installed to the second
• The double-action folding mechanism of the sec- seats.
ond seat allows to flip up the seat cushion and • The ISO-FIX child seat fixing bar is installed as
then fold the seatback with easy operation. Due standard on the outer seats, and the tether
to this, a lowered flat cargo space can be anchorage on outer seats, improving the versatil-
achieved without any compromise to seating ity of child seat installation.
comfort. • The structure of the second seat frame has been
• Reclining adjustment mechanisms have been optimised and the centre seat belt retractor is
adopted to improve comfort. mounted on the roof, thus reducing its weight.
• Armrests with a cup holder have been installed to
improve convenience.

INTERIOR 52A-7
SEAT BELT
SEAT BELT
M2520010001299
Seat belt warning lamp
Seat belt warning lamp

(passenger's side)
Seat belt retractor

ELR 3-point seat belt
incorporated in seat
ELR 3-point seat belt (RH/LH)
ELR 3-point seat belt (RH/LH)
Seat belt retractor

with a pre-tensioner
and force limiter
(driver's side)
Seat belt retractor
(RH/LH)
Seat belt retractor

with a pre-tensioner
and force limiter (passenger's side)
ACC01032 AB
The seat belts offer the following features: <Front seat belt>
• The 3-point seat belt with ELR has been adopted
together with a pre-tensioner and force limiter.

52A-8 INTERIOR
TRIMS
• A seat belt warning lamp has been included on <Second seat belt>
the combination meter to encourage the driver to • 3-point seat belt with ELR has been installed.
fasten the seat belt when the belt is not con- • The seat belt tongue can be inserted into the
nected. buckle easily as the self-standing buckles are
• A seat belt warning lamp has been included on used for all seating positions.
the centre panel to encourage the passenger to
fasten the seat belt when the belt is not con-
nected.
TRIMS
INTERIOR TRIM
M2520012000883
Quarter trim upper

Upper centre pillar trim
Quarter trim
cover
Front pillar trim
Cowl side trim
Rear end trim
Rear scuff plate

Lower centre pillar trim Lower quarter trim
Front scuff plate
ACB05046AB
• The interior trim is a full trim to improve quality. • Material codes are shown on trim to facilitate
• The collision energy absorbing structure that is recycling.
integrated with a trim has been adopted to the pil-
lar trim. With the structure that reduces head inju-
ries upon the secondary impact against the cabin
during a collision, the safety has been improved.

INTERIOR 52A-9
TRIMS
DOOR TRIM
M2520012300828
<Rear door trim> <Front door trim>
Armrest
Armrest
Door pocket
Door pocket
Bottle holder
ACB05049 AB
The door trims offer the following features. • Soft pads are attached to the front door trim
• Break-proof resin material has been used for trim upper panels.
panels, improving safety. • Two types of decoration panels on the instrument
• Bottle holders which can store a 500-ml plastic panel passenger side and the front door trim pro-
bottle have been installed to the front door trim vide a continuous appearance. A luxurious but
and rear door trim to improve convenience. Also, moderate wood decoration panel is available for
the bottle holding capability has been improved to high grade models. Carbon silver decoration
accommodate bottles with shapes that are diffi- panel underlining sporty appearance quality
cult to keep upright. • To prevent your fingers from being slipped off
• Door pockets have been installed to the front and during door closing, the pull handle recess has
rear door trim panels. The front door pockets been modified.
have a large capacity that can hold A4-size • To accommodate various types of bottles, the
maps. bottle holders are larger but clear in design.
• For the armrests, the energy absorbing structure
has been adopted which reduces the mid section
injuries to passengers by collapsing. Also, with
one-piece forming of the cloth with a soft layer
added, the quality has been improved.

52A-10 INTERIOR
LUGGAGE ROOM
LUGGAGE ROOM
M2520013000422
Tonneau cover
Rear side box
Luggage floor board
Luggage floor board
Luggage floor box
ACC00099AB
• The rear side box has been equipped to improve • The luggage floor board is divided into two pieces
usability. via hinges. This structure allows the driver to gain
• Luggage floor box has been equipped to the lug- access to the luggage floor box by opening a
gage room floor to improve usability. respective separate lid only even when large
• Adding a luggage floor box allows virtually flat object is being stowed.
flooring from the second seat to the rear end. The • The rear side box between the quarter trim and
customer can load and unload even long object the luggage floor box is useful for stowing a small
much easier. object. The customer can accommodate soft
• The luggage floor box is approx. 100 cm long, objects such as plastic bags in the rear side box.
approx. 100 cm wide and approx. 15 cm deep Furthermore, the customer can take out them
(total capacity: approx. 68 litre). It can accommo- easily as the box has no lid.
date the tonneau cover or a flat tyre repair kit
tidily by partitions.

INTERIOR 52A-11
HEADLINING
HEADLINING
M2520014000674
Headlining
ACB05042AB
Interior design with safe material has been adopted, • Chemical substances such as formaldehyde and
achieving more safe and comfortable interior. organic solvent generated from the interior parts
• Headlining which absorbs and dissolves chemi- have been minimised by the refined material and
cal substances has been adopted. This headlin- method, improving amenity.
ing efficiently absorbs and dissolves a smoking NOTE: *: Clear and colourless, toxic, irritating odour
smell, a life-smell, and formaldehyde*.

NOTES

52B-1
GROUP 52B
SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT
SYSTEM (SRS)
CONTENTS
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . 52B-2 SIDE-AIRBAG MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52B-10

CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE. . . . . . . . . . . 52B-11
SYSTEM OPERATION. . . . . . . . . . . . 52B-7 FRONT IMPACT SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52B-11
DUAL STAGE AIR BAGS AND SEAT BELT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52B-11
PRE-TENSIONER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52B-7 SEAT BELT WITH PRE-TENSIONER. . . . . 52B-12
SIDE AND CURTAIN AIR BAGS . . . . . . . . 52B-8 PASSENGER'S AIR BAG CUT OFF
SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52B-13
SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . 52B-8 PASSENGER'S AIR BAG ON/OFF
DRIVER'S AIR BAG MODULE . . . . . . . . . . 52B-8 INDICATOR LAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52B-13
PASSENGER'S (FRONT) AIR BAG SRS-ECU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52B-14
MODULE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52B-9 SRS AIR BAG SPECIAL CONNECTOR . . . 52B-15
KNEE AIR BAG MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52B-9

52B-2 SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
GENERAL INFORMATION
GENERAL INFORMATION
M2521000102031
• To provide a better safety upon impact, the • The curtain air bag is activated simultaneously
driver's and front passenger's air bags have been with the side-airbag upon a side collision to pro-
installed to all vehicles as standard. Furthermore, tect the heads of the front seat and second seat
the driver's SRS knee airbag, the SRS side air- passengers.
bags or the SRS curtain airbags have been • For the inflator, the gas which is harmless to the
installed as standard or optional equipment human body has been adopted.
depending on model type. • The seat belt pre-tensioner is activated simulta-
• The SRS* air bag is a system that is effective with neously with the deployment of driver's and pas-
the seat belt fastened, and it is designed as a senger's (front) air bags in case of a frontal
supplemental system of the seat belt. collision. Seat belts are pulled in to eliminate the
• The driver's and front passenger's SRS air bag slack upon a collision, thus improving the initial
are activated when an impact exceeding the occupant restraint, and reducing the travel dis-
threshold is applied upon a frontal collision, and tance of the occupants. For the driver's seat, in
the cushion air bag is instantaneously inflated to addition to the seat belt pre-tensioner for the
protect the head and chest areas of the front seat shoulder side, the lap pre-tensioner has been
passengers. installed on the outer seat belt lower anchor side
• The passenger’s air bag cut off switch which can in order to improve the restraining performance
enable and disable the passenger’s (front) air around the waist in addition to the chest area.
bag has been equipped in the instrument panel of CAUTION
passenger’s side. Do not disassemble the SRS air bag components
• The side-airbag is activated when an impact or seat belt with pre-tensioner. Also, do not apply
exceeds the threshold upon a side collision, and an impact.
the cushion air bag is instantaneously inflated to
NOTE: *: SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)
protect the chest area of the front seat passen-
gers.

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) 52B-3
GENERAL INFORMATION
SRS warning lamp ACB05440 ACB05441

SRS warning lamp
Passenger's (front)
air bag module
Driver's air bag module
Clock spring
Passenger's air bag ON indicator lamp
Passenger's air bag OFF indicator lamp Passenger's air bag

ACB05561 cut off switch
SRS-ECU
ACB05560
Knee air bag module
Curtain air bag module

Side-airbag module
Seat belt
pre-tensioner
Side impact sensor

Front impact sensor
Seat belt
ACB05423
pre-tensioner
ACC00250 AB

GENERAL INFORMATION
CAUTION LABELS
The labels indicating the precautions for handling and maintenance of SRS air bags and seat belt with
pre-tensioner are attached to the locations shown in the figure. If the label is damaged or is dirty, replace with
the new label.
Driver's air bag module Passenger's (front) air bag module SRS-ECU
ACB03681 ACB05535 ACB05614
Sunvisor Seat belt pre-tensioner (right and left)
Side-airbag module (right and left) Curtain air bag module (right and left)
ACC00035
AC506241
ACB05525
Knee air bag module Passenger's air bag cut off switch
ACB05536
ACB05526
ACC00073AB

GENERAL INFORMATION
SRS SYSTEM CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
Ignition switch (IG1) Fusible link
IG1
relay SRS-ECU
ON OFF
ETACS-ECU 17
No.
16 Front impact sensor (LH)
7.5A
27
22
OFF OFF *
* * OFF 18
Clock spring
ON ON 6
Driver's air bag module ON Front impact sensor (RH)
OFF OFF
OFF
ON 28
ON
ON
5
OFF
OFF
ON
*
Passenger's (front) ON 8
air bag module OFF OFF
41
ON ON
7 Side impact sensor (LH)
OFF OFF 42
ON
* 40
Side-airbag module (LH) ON
OFF OFF
ON 39 64
ON
OFF OFF Side impact sensor (RH)
ON * ON 56 65
Side-airbag module (RH) OFF OFF
ON ON
57
OFF
OFF 23 Diagnosis connector
* 35
ON ON
Lap pre-tensioner
OFF OFF Diagnosis connector
ON ON 34
OFF OFF CAN bus
* 29
Seat belt pre-tensioner ON 55 line
ON 30
(Driver's side) OFF OFF
ON 54
ON Combination meter
OFF OFF (SRS warning lamp)
Seat belt pre-tensioner
* 31
ON ON
(Passenger's side) OFF OFF Air bag OFF indicator lamp
13
ON 32
OFF ON
OFF OFF
ON
* 36 15 Air bag ON indicator lamp
Curtain air bag module ON ON
OFF OFF OFF
(LH)
ON ON 37
OFF ON 25
OFF
* OFF Passenger's air bag
Curtain air bag module ON ON 60 cut off switch
ON
(RH) OFF OFF 26
OFF
ON ON 59
ON
Note 17
* : Connector lock switch
Connector connected: ON
Connector disconnected: OFF SRS-ECU Connector
ACB05977 AB

GENERAL INFORMATION
Number in system Circuit name Universal harness

circuit diagram Wire size and
colour
1 Driver’s knee air bag (squib) (-) L
2 Driver’s knee air bag (squib) (+) R
5 Driver's air bag squib (-) GR
6 Driver's air bag squib (+) W-B
7 Passenger's (front) air bag squib (+) P
8 Passenger's (front) air bag squib (-) LG
13 Passenger’s air bag OFF indicator lamp V
15 Passenger's air bag ON indicator lamp BR
17 Left-side front impact sensor (+) W
18 Right-side front impact sensor (+) G
22 Ignition switch (IG1) power supply (fuse No. 16) Y
23 Diagnosis connector B-W
24 Earth B
25 Passenger's air bag cut off switch (-) B-L
26 Passenger's air bag cut off switch (+) GR-G
27 Left-side front impact sensor (-) R
28 Right-side front impact sensor (-) Y
29 CAN-C_L L
30 CAN-C_H G
31 Passenger's seat belt pre-tensioner squib (+) W-B
32 Passenger's seat belt pre-tensioner squib (-) B-W
34 Passenger's seat belt lap pre-tensioner squib (-) G
35 Passenger's seat belt lap pre-tensioner squib (+) R
36 Left-side curtain air bag squib (+) Y
37 Left-side curtain air bag squib (-) BR
39 Left-side side-airbag squib (-) P
40 Left-side side-airbag squib (+) V
41 Left-side side impact sensor (+) W
42 Left-side side impact sensor (-) B
54 Driver's seat belt pre-tensioner squib (-) Y
55 Driver's seat belt pre-tensioner squib (+) BR
56 Right-side side-airbag squib (+) L
57 Right-side side-airbag squib (-) GR
59 Right-side curtain air bag squib (-) G
60 Right-side curtain air bag squib (+) R
64 Right-side side impact sensor (-) P
65 Right-side side impact sensor (+) V
NOTE: For how to read the harness wire diameter and wire colour, refer to the Electrical Wiring Diagram.

SYSTEM OPERATION
SYSTEM OPERATION
DUAL STAGE AIR BAGS AND SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER
M2521000700781
Front impact Front impact

sensor (LH) sensor (RH) Air bags
Frontal collision against

another vehicle
Shock
SRS-ECU
above a
certain
G-sensor (Front air bag) Ignition signal
level
or
Frontal collision against a
solid surface
Ignition judgment
Passenger's air bag

cut off switch
Passenger's air bag

OFF indicator lamp
ACC00043AB
SRS-ECU uses data of the front impact sensor (in engine compartment) and G-sensor (in SRS-ECU) to cal-
culate collision severity during frontal collision. SRS-ECU judges necessity of air bag based on the calculated
collision severity. In addition, the SRS-ECU also judges the operation of seat belt pre-tensioner after calculat-
ing collision severity. Alternatively, when the passenger’s air bag cut off switch is set to the air bag off position,
the SRS-ECU illuminates the passenger’s air bag OFF indicator lamp by disabling the deployment of passen-
ger’s (front) air bag.

SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION
SIDE AND CURTAIN AIR BAGS

M2521000800573
Side-airbag modules
Side impact Side impact
sensor (RH) sensor (LH)
Side impact against another Shock

vehicle above a
certain
level Ignition signal
Ignition judgment
G-sensor (Side-airbag,
curtain air bag)
AC802080
SRS-ECU
Curtain air bag modules
ACB05593
ACC00075AB
SRS-ECU uses data of the side impact sensor and

G-sensor (in SRS-ECU) to calculate collision sever-
ity, during side collision. SRS-ECU judges necessity
of side-airbag and curtain air bag based on the cal-
culated collision severity.
SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION
DRIVER'S AIR BAG MODULE
M2521002000766
For items other than below, refer to GROUP 37 -
Steering Wheel P.37-3.
Squib
connectors
Inflator
ACB03701AC
It incorporates an SRS airbag to protect the driver in

the event of a frontal collision.

SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION
The airbag module is equipped with an inflator that The air bag is made of nylon and is inflated by the
does not contain sodium azide. gas from the inflator. Then, as the air bag contacts
the passenger, the gas is discharged through two
openings of backside of air bag, thus deflating the air
bag to reduce the impact on the passenger.
PASSENGER'S (FRONT) AIR BAG MODULE

M2521003000628
Squib
Passenger's (front) Inflator connectors
ACB05537
air bag module
ACB05622
ACC00265 AB
The passenger’s (front) air bag module consists of For the inflator, the gas which is harmless to the
an air bag, and their fasteners. human body has been used.
The air bag is made from nylon and inflates by the
gas from the inflator. As a passenger is being
pressed to the air bag, it deflates, discharging gas
from two vents at the side of the air bag to reduce the
shock from the impact.
KNEE AIR BAG MODULE

M2521002600177
Section A – A
Inflator
Cover
A
Air bag
A ACB05596
Knee air bag module
ACB05623
ACC00159AB

SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION
The knee air bag module consists of a cover, an air For the inflator, the gas which is harmless to the
bag, an inflator, and the fixing gear relating to those human body has been used.
parts, and is installed under the steering column.
Like the driver's and front passenger's air bags, the
knee air bag is inflated upon a frontal collision for
better protection of the driver.
SIDE-AIRBAG MODULE
M2521004000557
Air bag module
AC801674
ACC00074 AB
The side-airbag module consists of an air bag, air The air bags are compactly folded and stored under
bag cover, inflator and their fasteners. The modules the cover. On the side of the air bag, there are holes
are installed in the outer side supports of the driver’s through which gas is partially released to alleviate
and front passenger’s seatbacks. The side-airbags shock to the occupant when the air bag is deployed.
help protect the occupants regardless of the seat For the inflator, the gas which is harmless to the
position and seatback angle. human body has been used.

SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION
CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE

M2521000500431
Curtain air bag module Inflator
ACB05422
ACC00251AB
The curtain air bag module consists of an air bag, an • The front impact sensor transmits the coded
inflator, and the fixing gear relating to those parts, acceleration data to SRS-ECU. Based on the
and is installed in the roof side sections (from the data, SRS-ECU determines the deployment
driver's and the passenger's front pillars to the rear stage of the front air bag, then energises appro-
pillars). priate squib.
An inflator that does not contain sodium azide is • SRS-ECU performs the diagnostics of the front
used. impact sensor internal components. If a malfunc-
tion occurs, it sets the diagnosis code.
FRONT IMPACT SENSOR
M2521005000646 SIDE IMPACT SENSOR
M2521006000575
Headlamp support
panel upper Side impact
sensor
Front impact
sensor
Front seat belt
ACB05523AB
ACB05524AB
• The front impact sensor is installed on the head-
lamp support panel upper in the engine room, • The side impact sensors are installed to the lower
and the analogue G-sensor is housed in the front part of the centre pillars on both sides, and the
impact sensor. analogue G-sensor is housed in the side impact
sensor.

SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION
• The front impact sensor transmits the coded • SRS-ECU performs the diagnostics of the side
acceleration data to SRS-ECU. Based on the impact sensor internal components. If a malfunc-
data, SRS-ECU determines the deployment of tion occurs, it sets the diagnosis code.
the side-airbags and curtain air bags, then ener-
gises appropriate squib(s).
SEAT BELT WITH PRE-TENSIONER

M2521008000786
Gas generator Pipe

Ball
ACC00046
ACC00081 Pinion
Ring gear
Spool
ACC00504 ACC00505
ACC00555 AB
The seat belt incorporating the pretensioner auto- The seat belt pre-tensioner ignites the gas generator
matically winds the seatbelt upon front impact to and emits gas with the electric current supplied from
reduce forward shifting of the passenger. SRS-ECU. The gas pressure shifts the ball in the
pipe and the balls comes in contact with the protru-
sion of the ring gear, which is inserted in the ring
gear and then interlocked with the pinion is inserted
in the ring gear The ring gear rotation forces the pin-
ion to turn the spool toward the belt wind direction to
wind the belt.

SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION
PASSENGER'S AIR BAG CUT OFF SWITCH

M2521001700278
Instrument panel
Passenger's air bag

cut OFF switch
Front view
ACB05631 ACB05632
ACC00118 AB
Passenger’s air bag cut off switch is located in the 3. Insert the key into the ignition switch, and turn
instrument panel passenger’s side. The passenger’s the ignition to "ON" position.
air bag cut off switch can be used to disable the pas- • To turn an air bag on, follow these steps:
senger's (front) air bag. 1. Insert the key into the key opening of the
• To turn an air bag off, follow these steps: appropriate air bag cut off switch, and turn
1. Insert the ignition key into the key opening of that air bag cut off switch to "ON" position.
the appropriate air bag cut off switch, and turn 2. Remove the key from the key opening of that
that air bag cut off switch to the "OFF" posi- air bag cut off switch.
tion. 3. Insert the key into the ignition switch, and turn
2. Remove the key from the key opening of that the ignition to "ON" position.
air bag cut off switch.
PASSENGER'S AIR BAG ON/OFF INDICATOR LAMP

M2521001600196
Hazard indicator assembly Passenger's air bag

OFF indicator lamp
Passenger's air bag
ON indicator lamp
ACB05034 ACB05561
ACC00116AB
The passenger’s air bag ON/OFF indicator lamp is When passenger’s air bag cut off switch is turned
installed in centre air outlet. OFF, the indicator will stay on to show that the pas-
senger’s (front) air bag is not operational.

SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION
When passenger’s air bag cut off switch is turned DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
ON, the indicator goes off to show that the passen- To improve the system reliability, SRS-ECU performs
ger’s (front) air bag is operational. the diagnostics of each part. If a malfunction is
detected, it lights up the SRS warning lamp, and
SRS-ECU stores the contents as the corresponding diagnosis
M2521007001054
In addition to the analogue G-sensor and safing code. Also, to facilitate the system check, it has the
G-sensor for the frontal collision, the SRS-ECU following functions, and the check can be performed
incorporates the analogue G-sensor and safing using M.U.T.-III.
G-sensor for the side collision. Upon a frontal colli- • Diagnosis code set
sion, when the impact G is simultaneously detected • Service data output
by the front impact sensor in the engine room, ana- • Actuator test
logue G-sensor, and safing G-sensor for the frontal
DIAGNOSIS CODE SET
collision in SRS-ECU, SRS-ECU outputs the ignition
signal to the driver's and passenger's (front) air bag SRS-ECU performs a self-diagnosis on the following
modules (squibs). items. If a malfunction is detected, its content (diag-
Upon a side collision, when the lateral impact G is nosis code) is stored in the involatile memory (EEP-
simultaneously detected by the analogue G-sensor ROM*). Therefore, the diagnosis code will not be
of side impact sensor and the safing G-sensor for erased even when the battery terminal is discon-
side collision in SRS-ECU, the SRS-ECU outputs the nected. The diagnosis code can be erased using
ignition signal to the side-airbag module (squib) and M.U.T.-III.
the curtain air bag module (squib) of the relevant NOTE: .
side that is subjected to the impact. • *: EEPROM (Electrical Erasable & Programmable
Also, SRS-ECU has the following functions that Read Only Memory): ROM that can be pro-
improve the system reliability. grammed or erased electrically
• Power supply back-up function (back-up con- • For each diagnosis item, refer to Workshop Man-
denser) in preparation for the power supply mal- ual.
function upon a collision
• Booster function (DC-DC converter) in prepara- DATA LIST OUTPUT
tion for the battery voltage drop Using M.U.T.-III, the service data can be read.
• Diagnosis function that performs a system check
NOTE: For service data items, refer to Workshop
Manual.
ACTUATOR TEST
Using M.U.T.-III, the actuator can be forcibly oper-
ated. For the actuator test specification, refer to
Workshop Manual.

SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION
SRS AIR BAG SPECIAL CONNECTOR

M2521009001027
A A
A
Curtain air bag module (RH)
A Side-airbag module (RH)
A
A
Seat belt pre-tensioner (RH)
Passenger's (front) air bag module
Clock spring
SRS-ECU
Driver's air bag module
Seat belt pre-tensioner (LH)

A
A
Lap pre-tensioner
A
Side-airbag module (LH)
Curtain air bag module (LH)

A
A A AC607646 AI
To enhance the system reliability, a connector short

circuiting mechanism is integrated in the SRS-ECU
connector, air bag module connectors, clock spring
connector, and pre-tensioner connectors (black con-
nector "A" shown in the figure).
CONNECTOR SHORT-CIRCUIT MECHANISM

SRS-ECU connector Wiring harness-side connector Connector connected
Wiring harness-side connector
(terminal to short-circuit) Terminal to short-circuit
Short spring Partition panel Short spring

Partition panel (SRS-ECU-side (wiring harness-side
connector) connector)
AC507316 AB
This mechanism prevents the improper deployment disconnected, the short spring short circuits the (+)
of air bag module because of the current application and (-) of squibs, and prevents the static electricity
to the squib due to the static electricity when connec- from generating the potential difference. This con-
tors between SRS-ECU and air bag modules nector mechanism is adopted for the following con-
(squibs) are disconnected. When the connector is nectors.
• SRS-ECU connector

SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION
• Connector between the clock spring and • Intermediate connector between curtain air bag
body-side wiring harness module and SRS-ECU
• Each air bag module connector

54-1
GROUP 54
CHASSIS
ELECTRICAL
CONTENTS
CHASSIS ELECTRICAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A
LOCAL INTERCONNECT NETWORK (LIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54B
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (CAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54C

NOTES

54A-1
GROUP 54A
CHASSIS
ELECTRICAL
CONTENTS
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-3 AUDIO AND NAVIGATION

GENERAL INFORMATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-3 SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-36
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-36
BATTERY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-4 RADIO AND CD PLAYER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-38
GENERAL INFORMATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-4 MITSUBISHI MULTI COMMUNICATION
SYSTEM (MMCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-40
LIGHTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-5 REAR VIEW CAMERA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-42
EXTERIOR LAMPS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-5 STEERING WHEEL REMOTE CONTROL
SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-43
INTERIOR LAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-11
USB ADAPTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-44
FUNCTION AND CONTROL BY
ETACS-ECU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-12 HANDS-FREE INTERFACE SYSTEM . . . . 54A-44
CUSTOMISATION FUNCTION. . . . . . . . . . 54A-20 SPEAKER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-44
ANTENNA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-45
COMBINATION METER . . . . . . . . . . 54A-22 ROCKFORD FOSGATE PREMIUM
GENERAL INFORMATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-22 SOUND SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-45
MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-45
<STANDARD METER>. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-24 AUDIO AMPLIFIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-46
MULTI INFORMATION DISPLAY SPEAKER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-47
<HIGH CONTRAST METER>. . . . . . . . . . . 54A-26 DIGITAL RADIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-48
BUZZER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-30 DC/DC CONVERTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-48
REVERSING SENSOR (CORNER IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM <Vehicles

SENSOR AND BACK SENSOR) . . . . 54A-32 without keyless operation system> . 54A-50
GENERAL INFORMATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-32 GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-50
ACCESSORY SOCKET . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-35 ETACS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-53

GENERAL INFORMATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-35 GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-53
FUNCTION AND CONTROL BY
COLUMN SWITCH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-36 ETACS-ECU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-53
GENERAL INFORMATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-36 CUSTOMISATION FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . 54A-54
Continued on next page

54A-2
SECURITY ALARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-59 LANE DEPARTURE WARNING

GENERAL INFORMATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-59 SYSTEM (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-64
ETACS-ECU FUNCTIONS AND CONTROLS General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-64
<Vehicles without security alarm sensor>. . 54A-62 SYSTEM OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-66
ETACS-ECU FUNCTIONS AND CONTROLS Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-66
<Vehicles with security alarm sensor> . . . . 54A-63
CUSTOMISATION FUNCTION. . . . . . . . . . 54A-63

CHASSIS ELECTRICAL 54A-3
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM
GENERAL INFORMATION
M2544100200740
For improved serviceability, a diagnosis connecter
for inspection of M.U.T.-III is built into the instrument
panel, near the position of the driver's left foot.
System name Diagnosis Output of Actuator Erasure of Freeze Special Coding
code set service test diagnosis frame function
data code by the data
M.U.T.-III
MPI • • • • • • •
Diesel • • • • • • •
A/T, CVT • • − • • • −
Electric power • • • • • • −
steering (EPS)
ABS, ASC • • • • • • −
SRS air bag • • • • • • •
Air conditioner • • • • • • −
LDW • • • • • • −
ETACS ECU • • • • • • •
KOS • • • • • • •
IMMO/Keyless • • − • • • •
LIN • • − • − • −
ACC • • − • • • −
Combination • • • • • • −
meter
Steering angle − − − − − • −
sensor
AND (CAN box • − − • • • −
unit)
Audio • − − • • • −
ETG • • • • • • •
4WD • • − • • • −
AS&G • • − • • • −
OSS • • • • • • •
Corner sensor • • − • − • −
NOTE: .
1. •: Indicates that the diagnosis function is set.
2. −: Indicates that the diagnosis function is not set.

54A-4 CHASSIS ELECTRICAL
BATTERY
DIAGNOSIS CONNECTOR Diagnosis connector

Terminal Connecting contents
No.
2, 3 −
4 Earth
5 Earth
6 CAN communication line (CAN_H)
7, 8 MPI
Diagnosis connector ACB05016AB 9 to 13 −
14 CAN communication line (CAN_L)
Diagnosis connector
Terminal Connecting contents
15 −
No. 16 Battery power supply
1 Diagnosis control
BATTERY
GENERAL INFORMATION
M2544200200855
<Except vehicles for Russia> • The Q-85 battery has been adopted. <4J11 (vehi-
• The 75D23L battery has been adopted. <4J11 cles with AS&G system)>
(vehicles without AS&G system)> • The T-105 battery has been adopted. <4N14
• The 95D31L battery has been adopted. <4N14 (vehicles with AS&G system)>
(vehicles without AS&G system)>
<Vehicles for Russia>
• The 75D23L battery has been adopted.
Item 75D23L 95D31L Q-85 T-105
Voltage V 12 12 12 12
Capacity (5-hour rate) Ah 52 64 52 64
Electrolytic fluid specific gravity 1.220 − 1.290
(fully charged state at 20°C)

LIGHTING
LIGHTING
EXTERIOR LAMPS
M2544300301131
Construction diagram
<Halogen type headlamp assembly>

Front turn-signal lamp Low-beam
Side turn-signal lamp
(Door mirror type)
(Fender panel type)
High-beam Position lamp
<Discharge type headlamp assembly>
Front turn-signal lamp Low-beam
Front fog lamp (vehicles without daytime running lamp),

Front fog lamp (vehicles with daytime running lamp),
Daytime running lamp High-beam Position lamp
ACC00151AC
High-mounted stop lamp
Licence plate lamp
Rear fog lamp <LHD>,

Back-up lamp <RHD>,
or Reflector
Stop/tail lamp
Rear
Rear combination
Rear fog lamp <RHD>, turn-signal lamp
Back-up lamp <LHD>, lamp
or Reflector
ACC00150AC
• There are two types of headlamp assemblies: • The newly adopted discharge headlamp for low
halogen type and discharge type (optional). beam provides a much better view than ordinary
• The headlamp assembly employs the four-lamp halogen lamps. <Vehicles with discharge type
integrated with the headlamp (low-beam), head- headlamp>
lamp (high-beam), front turn-signal lamp, and • Switching of the high-beam and low-beam illumi-
position lamp. nation of the discharge type headlamp is control-
led by moving the lightproof board in the projector
unit according to the signal from the column
switch (lighting switch).

LIGHTING
• For the low-beam of the headlamp, the headlamp • The rear combination lamp are integrated with
manual levelling system <Vehicles with halogen the stop/tail lamp and rear turn-signal lamp.
type headlamp> (Refer to .) and the headlamp • The LED-type high-mounted stop lamp have
automatic levelling system <Vehicles with dis- been integrated into the tailgate.
charge type headlamp> (Refer to .) have been • The licence plate lamp have been installed to
adopted so that the height adjustment of the opti- above the licence plate.
cal axis can be performed depending on the vehi- • The lighting system is provided with headlamp
cle load status. automatic-shutdown function, auto lamp function,
• There are three types of front fog lamps; front fog welcome light function and coming home light
lamp (vehicles without daytime running lamp), function (Refer to P.54A-12).
front fog lamp (vehicles with daytime running • For the flasher timer function of turn-signal lamp,
lamp) and daytime running lamp. These are the comfort flasher function has been adopted to
installed on the front bumper. improve the operability when changing the lane.
• The rear fog lamp and back-up lamp have been When the turn-signal lamp switch (lighting switch)
installed to the rear bumper. is operated for a short time, this function flashes
• Two types of the side turn-signal lamp have been the turn-signal lamp of the operated direction
established: the one attached to the fender panel three times (Refer to P.54A-12).
and the one integrated into the door mirror.
Specifications
Item
Headlamp assembly <Vehicles with High-beam W 60 (HB3)
halogen type headlamp> Low-beam W 55 (H7)
Position lamp W 5 (W5W)
Front turn-signal lamp W 21 (PY21W)
Headlamp assembly <Vehicles with High-beam W 60 (HB3)
discharge type headlamp> Low-beam W 35 (D4S)
Position lamp W 5 (W5W)
Front turn-signal lamp W 21 (PY21W)
Front fog lamp Front fog lamp (vehicles without daytime 55 (H11)
running lamp) W
Front fog lamp (vehicles with daytime 35 (H8)
running lamp) W
Daytime running lamp Daytime running lamp W 13 (P13W)
Rear fog lamp W 21 (W21W)
Back-up lamp W 21 (W21W)
Side turn-signal lamp Fender panel type W 5
Door mirror type LED type
Rear combination lamp Stop/tail W 21 (P21/5W)
Rear turn-signal W 21 (PY21W)
High-mounted stop lamp Integrated in tailgate spoiler LED type
Licence plate lamp W 5 (W5W)
NOTE: The brackets ( ) show the bulb type.

LIGHTING
Headlamp manual levelling system

The beam direction of the headlamps changes
according to the number of passengers and the
amount of load. The headlamp manual levelling func-
tion is a system that allows the driver to change the
direction of headlamp beam so that the drivers of
oncoming cars are not dazzled by the headlamps.
The headlamp levelling switch allows changing the
Headlamp levelling direction in five steps: 0 to 4.
switch
ACC00006AB
Relationship between the switch positions and the number of passengers/loads

<5-seating>
Passenger and
load
AC607611 AC607612 AC607613 AC607614
One or two Five passengers Five passengers Driver and

passengers and heavy loads heavy loads
Switch position 0 1 2 or 3 4
<7-seating>
Passenger and
load
AC607615 AC607616 AC607617 AC607618 AC704413
One or two Four Seven Seven Driver and

passengers passengers passengers passengers and heavy loads
(front seat and heavy loads
third seat)
Switch position 0 1 2 3 4
NOTE: Each switch position is for reference. In each switch position, when the headlamp beam is too high,
turn the switch to one-level higher position.

LIGHTING
Operation
AC302836
Fuse
Headlamp Headlamp
levelling levelling
unit (LH) unit (RH)
Headlamp
Variable resistor B Variable resistor B levelling
switch
Motor Voltage Motor Voltage 1 23

drive comparison drive comparison
ILL
circuit circuit circuit circuit 4
0
CPU CPU
A A
AC314086AB
1. The headlamp levelling switch increases the 2. Turning the headlamp levelling switch from 4 to 0
resistance as it is turned from 0 to 4. Turning the increases the voltage at point A, and then the
headlamp levelling switch changes the voltage at headlamp levelling unit turns the motor in the
point A. When the headlamp levelling switch is direction opposite to that mentioned in Item 1,
turned from 0 to 4, the voltage at point A increasing the voltage at point B. When the
decreases. Upon detection of this voltage change, voltages at points A and B become equal, the
the headlamp levelling unit turns the motor to headlamp levelling unit stops the motor.
lower the beam direction. At this time, the 3. The headlamp levelling unit detects voltage
resistance of the variable resistor in the headlamp changes caused by headlamp levelling switch
assembly changes, and the voltage at point B operation, and turns the motor to change the
decreases gradually. When the voltages at points directions of the headlamp reflectors for the
A and B become equal, the headlamp levelling adjustment of the headlamp beam direction.
unit stops the motor.
Headlamp automatic levelling system

The beam direction of the headlamps (vertical angle) Operational Description
changes according to the number of passengers and The beam direction of headlamps is automatically
the amount of load. The headlamp automatic level- controlled according to driving conditions as
ling system is a system that automatically controls described in the table below.
the beam direction of headlamps (up and down
angle) when parking or travelling with stable vehicle
attitude so that the drivers of oncoming cars and of
cars driving in front are not dazzled by the headlamp
beam that is directed upwards.

LIGHTING
Vehicle condition Control content

When parking When the engine is stopped with the headlamp (low-beam) ON or
when the vehicle is stopped with the headlamp (low-beam) ON and
the accelerator pedal is released, the ETACS-ECU controls the beam
direction according to the height sensor values of the change in load
resulting from getting on/off of passengers or loading/unloading of
loads.
When driving at a constant speed When a vehicle starts on curb, the travelling vehicle posture changes
from the posture during parking, so that the beam direction changes.
To control the improper beam direction caused by such vehicle
attitude change, the ETACS-ECU controls the beam direction while
travelling with stable vehicle attitude. This beam direction control
while travelling with stable vehicle attitude is performed only once
between a vehicle stop and the next stop. When driving is started on a
gravel or rough road, the beam direction control is activated after the
vehicle attitude becomes stable on a paved road.
System component and function
ETACS-ECU
Rear height
sensor
ACB04436
ACB04414
Front height
sensor
ACB04435 Headlamp assembly

(integrating headlamp
automatic levelling motor)
ACC00005AB

Ignition switch Supplies power to the ETACS-ECU when the ignition switch is in
the ON position.
Height sensor (front) Detects the elongation/contraction of the front suspension and
transmits the signal to the ETACS-ECU.

LIGHTING

Height sensor (rear) Detects the elongation/contraction of the rear suspension and
transmits the signal to the ETACS-ECU.
Headlamp assembly (integrating Drives the headlamp reflector by receiving signals from the
headlamp automatic levelling motor) ETACS-ECU.
Combination meter Send an odometer indication value to the ETACS-ECU.
ABS-ECU or ASC-ECU Transfers the vehicle travel distance information to the
ETACS-ECU.
Engine-ECU Transfers engine speed signals and accelerator pedal position
signals to the ETACS-ECU.
ETACS-ECU • Transfers lighting switch position signals, all door switch
ON/OFF signals, tailgate latch switch ON/OFF signals,
hazard warning lamp switch ON/OFF signals, headlamp
(low-beam) ON/OFF status signals.
• Controls the headlamp automatic levelling motor integrated in
the headlamp assembly based on the signals form switches
and sensors to control the beam direction according to the
vehicle posture.
Diagnosis connector Outputs diagnosis codes.
System block diagram
Ignition switch (IG1)
Headlamp assembly (LH)

(integrating headlamp
(CAN-C
communication)
Engine-ECU
Headlamp assembly (RH)
ETACS-ECU (integrating headlamp
ABS-ECU or
ASC-ECU
Height sensor (front)
Diagnosis connector
Height sensor (rear)
(CAN-C-Mid
communication)
Combination meter
ACB05989AB

LIGHTING
INTERIOR LAMP
M2544300400823
Front room lamp

(map and room lamp)
Rear room lamp
Luggage compartment lamp
Downlight
ACB05572 ACB05571
Glove box lamp

Ignition key cylinder
illumination lamp
Vanity mirror lamp

ACB05573
ACC00330AB
• A front room lamp, installed to the front part of the • A glove box lamp has been added to the glove
roof, has been equipped with the lens-push type box.
map & room lamp which can be operated easily • A ignition key cylinder illumination lamp has been
from the driver's and front passenger's seat, added to the ignition key cylinder. <Vehicles with-
offering an excellent operability for turning on and out KOS>
off the lamp. • The vanity mirror lamps have been installed on
• The front room lamp incorporates a downlight. the sun visors of driver's and front passenger's
• The rear room lamp which illuminates the rear seats.
passenger's seat is installed to above the second • The interior lamp dimmer control function, interior
seat. lamp automatic-shutoff function and ignition key
• The luggage room lamp which illuminates the cylinder illumination lamp control function have
luggage room is installed to the upper part of the been adopted for the interior lamp (Refer to Func-
luggage room. tion and Control by ETACS-ECU P.54A-12).

LIGHTING
Specifications
Item Specification
Front room lamp (map and room lamp) W × quantity 8×2
Downlight LED type
rear room lamp W 8
Luggage compartment lamp W 8
Glove box lamp W 1.4
Ignition key cylinder illumination lamp W <Vehicles without KOS> 1.4
Vanity mirror lamp W 2
FUNCTION AND CONTROL BY ETACS-ECU.

M2544300600980
Following functions are controlled by ETACS-ECU.
Function Function
description
Headlamp Headlamp automatic-shutdown function
Auto lamp function <vehicles with lighting control sensor or
vehicles with LDW>
Auto lamp function <vehicles with photo sensor>
Wiper-linked auto lamp function <vehicles with photo sensor>
Daytime running lamp function
Welcome light function
Coming home light function
Flasher timer function Turn-signal lamp
Comfort flasher function
Hazard warning lamp
ESS (Emergency Stop signal System)
Fog lamp Front fog lamp function
Rear fog lamp function
Interior lamp Interior lamp dimmer control function
Interior lamp automatic-shutoff function
Ignition key cylinder illumination lamp control function

LIGHTING
HEADLAMP
HEADLAMP AUTOMATIC-SHUTDOWN FUNCTION (INITIAL CONDITION: WITH
FUNCTION)
ON
Ignition switch (IG)
OFF
Driver's (Open) ON
door switch (Closed) OFF
Headlamp
Lighting switch Tail lamp

OFF
ON
Tail lamp output
OFF
ON
Headlamp output
OFF
3 minutes 1 second AC606266 AB
Even when the lighting switch (tail lamp switch or • Auto lamp function automatically turns ON/OFF
headlamp switch) is ON, the headlamp (including the the headlamp and tail lamp according to the sig-
tail lamps) turns off automatically with any of the fol- nal from the lighting control sensor (lamp sensor)
lowing conditions to prevent the battery discharge attached to the windshield when the lighting
caused by unattended operation. switch is in the AUTO position.
• If the ignition switch is turned OFF with the light- • The lamp sensor and the rain sensor are incorpo-
ing switch ON, the lamp turns off automatically rated into the lighting control sensor. The lamp
after 3 minutes. If the driver's door is opened dur- sensor is used for the auto lamp function, and the
ing the 3 minutes, the lamp turns off after 1 sec- rain sensor for the rain sensitive wiper function *.
ond.
NOTE: *: For the rain sensitive wiper function, refer
• If the lighting switch is turned to the tail lamp posi-
to GROUP 51, Windshield Wiper and Washer
tion or headlamp position from OFF with the igni-
P.51-7.
tion switch OFF, the lamps do not turn off
• The lighting control sensor (lamp sensor) detects
automatically.
the front and surrounding brightness of the vehi-
NOTE: This function can be cancelled through cus- cle. With this detection, it is judged that the vehi-
tomisation (Refer to Customisation Function cle enters a tunnel or just drives under a bridge.
P.54A-20). When it is judged that the vehicle drives through
a tunnel, the headlamp and tail lamp are auto-
AUTO LAMP FUNCTION (INITIAL matically turned ON. When it is judged that the
CONDITION: ILLUMINATES IN vehicle drives under a bridge, the headlamp and
STANDARD AMBIENT BRIGHTNESS) tail lamp are not turned ON automatically. When
<vehicles with lighting control sensor or the vehicle surroundings get dark in case such as
evening, the headlamp and tail lamp are auto-
vehicles with LDW> matically turned ON.
• The timing that the headlamp and tail lamp are
Lighting control sensor automatically turned ON when the vehicle sur-
(rain sensor)
roundings get dark in case such as evening can
be adjusted by the customisation function. (Refer
to Customisation Function P.54A-20.)
Lighting control
sensor
(lamp sensor)
Interior mirror AC703843AC

LIGHTING
AUTO LAMP FUNCTION (INITIAL CONDITION: ILLUMINATES IN STANDARD AMBIENT

BRIGHTNESS) <Vehicles with photo sensor>
ON
Ignition switch (IG1)
OFF
AUTO
Lighting switch
OFF
Photo 2.46 V
sensor 1.66 V
voltage 0.9 V
ON
Headlamp and tail lamp
OFF
T1 T1 T1 T2
T1: 15 m driving or 3 seconds
T2: 15 m driving or 1 seconds AC606267 AF
When the lighting switch is turned to the AUTO posi- Tail lamp and headlamp turning OFF condition
tion with the ignition switch turned to the ON position, • With the photo sensor voltage being at the tail
the ETACS-ECU controls the tail lamp relay and lamp OFF voltage or more, when the vehicle is
headlamp relay output depending on the photo sen- driven for 15 m or the status continues for 3 sec-
sor voltage (varies with the ambient brightness) and onds, the headlamp and tail lamp go out.
automatically controls ON/OFF operation of the tail NOTE: .
lamp and headlamp. 1. If a malfunction such as open circuit occurs to the
Headlamp and tail lamp illumination conditions auto-light sensor, the headlamp is kept ON by the
• With the photo sensor voltage being at the tail fail-safe function.
lamp ON voltage or less, when the ignition switch 2. Through customisation, the sensitivity of
is turned to the ON position and the lighting auto-light sensor can be adjusted (Refer to Cus-
switch to the AUTO position, the headlamp and tomisation Function P.54A-20).
tail lamp illuminate. 3. To reduce the electrical load at cranking, head-
• When the ignition switch is in the ON position and lamp illumination is prohibited for 3 seconds after
the lighting switch in the AUTO position, if the the ignition key is turned ON while the engine is
vehicle is driven for 15 m with the photo sensor not running (for the cranking of 3 seconds or less,
voltage being at the tail lamp ON voltage or less, the headlamp is illuminated after the cranking
or the status continues for 3 seconds, the head- operation is completed).
lamp and tail lamp illuminate.
• When the ignition switch is in the ON position and
the lighting switch in the AUTO position, if the
vehicle is driven for 15 m with the photo sensor
voltage being at the headlamp ON voltage or
less, or the status continues for 1 second, the
headlamp and tail lamp illuminate.

LIGHTING
WIPER-LINKED AUTO LAMP FUNCTION (INITIAL CONDITION: WITHOUT FUNCTION)

<Vehicles with photo sensor>
Windshield wiper ON
switch OFF
AUTO
Lighting switch
OFF
Illuminated
Headlight
Extinguished
t T t T
t: 3 seconds AC101630 AB
T: 1 second
When the lighting switch is in AUTO position, the NOTE: Using a customisation function, this function
headlamp will illuminate 3 seconds after the wind- can be enabled or disabled. For more information
shield wiper has been turned on. about the customisation function. (Refer to Customi-
sation Function P.54A-20).
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMP FUNCTION
ON
Passing / Dimmer
switch
OFF
HEAD
Headlamp switch
OFF or TAIL
ON
Ignition switch
(IG2)
OFF
High-beam
Low-beam
Headlamp
OFF
AC311848AB
The ETACS-ECU illuminates the low-beam head- NOTE: Using the customisation function, it is possi-
lamps when the ignition switch is turned "ON" with ble to adjust that either the tail lamp or headlamp
the headlamp switch is at the "OFF" or "TAIL" posi- lights up. For more information about the customisa-
tion. It illuminates the low-beam headlamps at a nor- tion function feature, refer to P.54A-20.
mal brightness when the headlamps are turned on
with the daytime running lamp on. COMING HOME LIGHT FUNCTION
(INITIAL CONDITION: 30 SECONDS)
WELCOME LIGHT FUNCTION (INITIAL When the ignition switch is in the LOCK (OFF) posi-
CONDITION: TAIL LAMP ILLUMINATES) tion, passing operation lights up the headlamp for a
When the lighting switch is in the OFF or AUTO posi- certain period.
tion, unlock operation by the keyless entry system
lights up the tail lamp or headlamp. The lighting con-
trol sensor operates at nighttimes only.

LIGHTING
NOTE: Using the customisation function, the illumi- With the ignition switch in the ON position, when the
nation time can be adjusted to 15 seconds, 30 sec- turn signal switch is turned ON momentarily (0.4 sec-
onds, 60 seconds, or 180 seconds. For more ond or less), ETACS-ECU turns ON the turn signal
information about the customisation function feature, lamp output, and flashes the turn signal lamp three
refer to P.54A-20. times.
NOTE: Using the customisation function, "with func-
FLASHER TIMER FUNCTION tion/without function" of the comfort flasher function
TURN-SIGNAL LAMP (INITIAL CONDI- and the switch acceptance time can be set. For more
TION: TURN SIGNAL LAMP CAN BE information about the customisation function. (Refer
to Customisation Function P.54A-20).
OPERATED WHEN THE IGNITION
SWITCH IS IN THE ON POSITION) HAZARD WARNING LAMP
Ignition ON
switch (IG)
OFF
ON Hazard lamp ON
Turn-signal lamp
switch RH switch
OFF OFF
Turn-signal lamp ON Turn signal ON
switch LH lamp output
OFF OFF
RH
Turn-signal lamp ON ON
Turn signal
output RH OFF lamp output OFF
ON LH
Turn-signal lamp
output LH OFF
AC101508AG
AC101509AH
When the turn-signal lamp switch is ON (LH or RH) ETACS-ECU detects the signal that changes the
with the ignition switch is ON, the turn-signal lamp hazard lamp switch from OFF to ON, and reverses
output (flash signal) is turned ON. the flashing state by the signal (to the flashing state
If the lamp bulb of the front or rear turn-signal lamp when the hazard lamp is not flashing, and to the
has burned out, the flashing speed becomes faster to turned OFF state when flashing).
alert the driver that the lamp bulb has burned out.
NOTE: .
NOTE: Using a customisation function, this function
1. The push-return switch has been adopted for the
becomes available even when the ignition switch is
hazard lamp switch.
in the ACC position. For more information about the
customisation feature. (Refer to Customisation Func- 2. Even if the lamp bulb has burned out, the flashing
tion P.54A-20). speed of the hazard lamp is not changed.
ESS (EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL

COMFORT FLASHER FUNCTION (INITIAL
SYSTEM)*
CONDITION: WITH FUNCTION)
When the ETACS-ECU receives the ESS activation
Ignition
ON request signal from the ABS-ECU or the ASC-ECU, it
switch (IG) OFF flashes the turn-signal lamps at high speed to inform
Turn-signal lamp ON t
the following car that the driver is applying the brake
switch RH OFF suddenly.
Turn-signal lamp ON t NOTE: *: For further details on the ESS, refer to
switch LH OFF
GROUP 35B − ABS-ECU P.35B-8 <vehicles without
Turn-signal lamp ON ASC> or GROUP 35C − ASC-ECU P.35C-9 <vehi-
output RH OFF
cles with ASC>.
Turn-signal lamp ON
output LH OFF
t: 0.4 seconds or less AC311800AE

LIGHTING
FOG LAMP
FRONT FOG LAMP FUNCTION
Headlamp
Lighting switch Tail lamp
OFF
ON
Fog lamp switch Neutral
OFF
Headlamp automatic shutdown (Switched off) ON
output
(Illuminated) OFF
Illuminated
Front fog lamps
Extinguished
AC804207AB
When the fog lamp switch is turned to ON with the If the tail lamp is turned off by the headlamp auto-
tail lamp or the headlamp lit (the tail lamp switch or matic-shutdown function, the front fog lamps turn off
the headlamp switch is ON), the front fog lamp relay at the same time. However, if the tail lamps turn on
turns ON, and the front fog lamps turn on. again, the front fog lamps do not.
If the tail lamp or the headlamp is turned off with the
lighting switch OFF while the front fog lamps lit, the
front fog lamps turn off the same time to prevent
unattended operation.
REAR FOG LAMP FUNCTION
Headlamp
Lighting switch
Tail lamp
OFF
ON
Fog lamp switch Neutral
OFF
Illuminated
Front fog lamps
Extinguished
Illuminated
Rear fog lamp
Extinguished
AC804208 AB
If the fog lamp switch is turned ON while the front fog If the tail lamp is turned OFF, the front fog lamp and
lamp is ON, the rear fog lamp illuminates. The rear the rear fog lamp are turned OFF at the same time.
fog lamp is switched ON or OFF by turning on or off
the fog lamp switch.

LIGHTING
INTERIOR LAMP
INTERIOR LAMP DIMMER CONTROL FUNCTION (INITIAL CONDITION: 15 SECONDS)
ON
ACC
Ignition switch
OFF
Key removed
Door switch (Any one open) ON
(All closed) OFF
(Lock) ON
Driver's door lock
actuator switch (lock switch) (Unlock) OFF
LOCK
Keyless entry
lock or unlock signal OFF
UNLOCK
100%
50%
Interior lamp brightness
0%
15 seconds 15 seconds
AC607916AB
When the interior lamp switch is on the door position, With all the doors closed, when the ignition key is
ETACS-ECU controls the interior lamp as follows. removed, the lamp turns ON (100%) after approx-
1. When the ignition switch is OFF: imately 1 second (after the engine is stopped),
By opening any door or tailgate, the lamp turns ON and then gradually dims down to OFF after 15
(100%), and dims (50%) when the door or tail- seconds.
gate is closed, then and turns off after 15 sec- By inserting the ignition key again or operating the
onds. door lock with the lamp lit, the lamps turns off.
However, when the ignition switch is turned ON or NOTE: .
the door lock is operated, the lamps turn off at • *: For the vehicles with KOS, it is operated the
that time. same way when the steering lock is locked or
2. When the ignition switch is ON: when the emergency key is removed from the
By opening any door or tailgate, the lamp (100%) key cylinder.
turns ON and OFF when the door or tailgate is • For the vehicles with the keyless entry system,
closed. the delayed lamp-off time and the operation times
3. When all doors and the tailgate are closed, and of the keyless entry interior lamp answer back
the ignition key is removed*: can be changed by the customisation function.
(Refer to Customisation Function P.54A-20).

LIGHTING
INTERIOR LAMP AUTOMATIC-SHUTOFF FUNCTION (INITIAL CONDITION: 30

MINUTES)
ON
Ignition switch ACC

OFF
(Any one open) ON
Door switch
(All closed) OFF
(Illuminated) ON
Interior lamp
(Extinguished) OFF
T T t t t
T: 30 minutes
t: Within 30 minutes AC302243AB
When the interior lamp such as the room lamp [all • After the auto-turn OFF, the interior lamp returns
interior lamps connecting to the room lamp fuse (the to the illumination state when the doors are
front room lamp, the rear room lamp, the luggage opened/closed, keyless entry transmitter switch
compartment lamp, and the ignition key cylinder illu- is operated, or ignition switch is turned to ACC
mination lamps)] is lit, but either one of the conditions position. After returning, the lamp turns OFF after
is met, the interior lamp is turned off automatically for 30 minutes, when the interior lamp auto turn off
preventing the battery discharge caused by the unat- condition is met.
tended operation or the door-ajar. NOTE: The interior lamp automatic shut-off time can
• After 30 minutes with the interior lamp lit while the be adjusted by the customisation function. (Refer to
ignition switch is OFF, the lamp turns off automat- Customisation Function P.54A-20).
ically.
• After 30 minutes with any door opened while the
ignition switch is OFF, the lamp turns off automat-
ically.
IGNITION KEY CYLINDER ILLUMINATION LAMP CONTROL FUNCTION
ON
Ignition switch (IG)
OFF
(Key removed) ON
Key reminder switch
(Key inserted) OFF
(Opened) ON
Driver's seat door switch
(Closed) OFF
LOCK
Driver's seat door
UNLOCK
Ignition key cylinder (Illuminated) ON

illumination lamp output
(Extinguished) OFF
T T T T
T: 30 seconds
AC710753 AC
The ETACS-ECU controls the ignition key cylinder • When the ignition key is removed from the igni-
illumination lamp as described below. tion key cylinder, the lamp illuminates for 30 sec-
• With the ignition switch OFF, the lamp is illumi- onds after approximately 1 second (after the
nated when the driver's door is opened, and it is engine is stopped).*
turned off 30 seconds after the driver's door is
closed. However, the lamp is turned off if the igni-
tion switch is turned ON or doors are locked
within 30 seconds.

LIGHTING
M2544300700891
is disconnected.
display)
Turn power Adjustment of ACC or IG1 Operable with ACC or ON position
source turn-signal lamp IG1 Operable with ON position (initial
operation condition condition)
Comfort flasher With/without Disable No function
comfort flasher Enable With function (initial condition)
function
Comfort flasher Switch operation Normal 0.4 second (initial condition)
switch time time to activate the Long 0.8 second
comfort flasher
function
lamp answer back
Sensitivity for Photo sensor Level 1 bright High ambient brightness
auto lamp sensitivity Level 2 bright Standard ambient brightness (initial
(illumination condition)
intensity) <vehicles
with photo sensor> Level 3 Low ambient brightness
Level 4 dark Low-low ambient brightness
Lighting control Level 1 bright High-high ambient brightness
sensor sensitivity Level 2 bright High ambient brightness
(illumination
intensity) <vehicles Level 3 Standard ambient brightness (initial
with lighting control condition)
sensor or vehicles Level 4 dark Low ambient brightness
with LDW> Level 5 dark Low-low ambient brightness
Auto lamp Presence of Disable No function (initial condition)
linked wiper wiper-linked auto Enable With function
lamp function
<vehicles with
photo sensor>

LIGHTING

display)
Room lamp Adjustment of 0 sec 0 second (no delay shutdown time)
delay timer with interior lamp delay 7.5 sec 7.5 seconds
door shutdown time
15 sec 15 seconds (initial condition)
30 sec 30 seconds
60 sec 60 seconds
120 sec 120 seconds
180 sec 180 seconds
Head lamp auto Adjustment of Disable No function
cut customise headlamp Enable (B-spec.) With function (initial condition)
automatic shutdown
function
Interior lamp Adjustment of Disable No function
auto cut timer interior lamp 3 min 3 minutes
automatic shutdown
function operation 30 min 30 minutes (initial condition)
time 60 min 60 minutes
Coming home Disabling or Disabled No function
light enabling coming 15 sec The headlamps illuminate for 15 seconds.
home light function
30sec The headlamps illuminate for 30 seconds.
(initial condition)
60 sec The headlamps illuminate for 60 seconds.
180 sec The headlamps illuminate for 180 seconds.
Welcome light Disabling or Disabled No function
enabling welcome Small lamp The tail lamps illuminate. <initial condition>
light function
Head lamp The headlamps illuminate.

COMBINATION METER
COMBINATION METER
GENERAL INFORMATION • An ECO drive assist indicator makes the driver
M2545500201078 aware of economical driving to reduce fuel con-
There are two types of the combination meter; stand- sumption.
ard meter and high contrast meter. A speedometer is • Pressing an ECO mode switch illuminates an
located at the right, a liquid crystal display at the cen- ECO indicator in the meter.
tre lower part, a tachometer at the left, and a meter
information switch <Standard meter> or rheostat illu- High contrast meter
mination switch <High contrast meter> at the right • A colour liquid crystal display has been adopted.
lower part. The combination meter has the following For details refer to P.54A-26.
features: • A navigation indicator has been adopted. <Vehi-
cles with MMCS>
Standard meter • A meter information switch is located in the
• A segment-type LCD is adopted. For details refer instrument panel.
to P.54A-24. • Pressing an ECO mode switch illuminates an
ECO indicator in the multi-information display in
the meter.
5 6 24 25
4 7 8
3 9
2
10
1
23 Speedometer (km)
Tachometer
11
30
12
29
Meter information
switch
22
13
21
28 18, 19 26
20 27 14
17 15
Multi-information display 16
Tachometer <diesel powered vehicles> Speedometer (mile and km)

ACC00843AB

COMBINATION METER
<High contrast meter>

2 3 4 5 Speedometer (km)
1 6
Tachometer
Meter information switch ACB05980
Rheostat illumination
7
14 switch
15 8
Multi-information display 13 9
12 11 10
Tachometer <diesel powered vehicles> Speedometer (mile and km)

ACC01604AB
Standard meter 20. Coolant temperature warning lamp

1. Position lamp indicator lamp 21. Oil pressure warning lamp
2. Front fog lamp indicator lamp 22. Charging warning lamp
3. Turn-signal lamp indicator/hazard warning indica- 23. Cruise control system indicator lamp
tor lamp (LH side) 24. Auto stop & Go (AS&G) system indicator lamp
4. Door-ajar warning lamp 25. Auto stop & Go (AS&G) system OFF indicator
5. Immobilizer/electric steering lock/security alarm lamp
warning lamp 26. ECO mode indicator lamp
6. Keyless operation system indicator lamp 27. Diesel preheat indicator lamp
7. Electric power steering system warning lamp 28. Fuel filter indicator lamp
8. Turn-signal lamp indicator/hazard warning indica- 29. Diesel particulate filter (DPF) warning lamp*
tor lamp (RH side) 30. ECO drive assist indicator
9. Rear fog lamp indicator lamp
High contrast meter
10. High-beam indicator lamp
1. Position lamp indicator lamp
11. Brake warning lamp
2. Front fog lamp indicator lamp
12. Supplemental restraint system warning lamp
3. Turn-signal lamp indicator/hazard warning indica-
13. Driver’s seat belt warning lamp
tor lamp (LH side)
14. Check engine warning lamp
4. Turn-signal lamp indicator/hazard warning indica-
15. Active stability control system OFF indicator lamp
tor lamp (RH side)
16. Anti-skid braking system warning lamp
5. Rear fog lamp indicator lamp
17. Active stability control system ON indicator lamp
6. High-beam indicator lamp
18. 4WD-ECO indicator lamp
7. Brake warning lamp
19. 4WD-lock indicator lamp
8. Driver’s seat belt warning lamp

COMBINATION METER
9. Supplemental restraint system warning lamp MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY

10. Check engine warning lamp <STANDARD METER>
11. Anti-skid braking system warning lamp M2545500500537
12. Active stability control system OFF indicator lamp In the multi-information display, the followings are
displayed; "Odometer", "TRIP A", "TRIP B", "Meter
13. Active stability control system ON indicator lamp
illumination control", "Driving range", "Average fuel
14. Charging warning lamp consumption", "AS&G status", "Outside temperature
15. Diesel preheat indicator lamp
and frost warning", "Service reminder*".
NOTE: .
• *: Is not displayed during driving.
METER ILLUMINATION CONTROL

The brightness of the combination meter can be
adjusted in eight stages (LEVEL 1 to LEVEL 8) by
pushing the meter information switch when the meter
is illuminated. Current illumination level will be dis-
played each time the meter information switch is
pushed. The illumination level can be changed by
operating the meter information switch according to
specified procedure *. The brightness of each bright-
ness level is as described in the table below.
NOTE: The brightness can be set separately for the
Current brightness level
daytime and nighttime. The configured information is
stored in the RAM. In the initial setting of brightness,
Display Brightness level the daytime is set at LEVEL 8 and the nighttime is
set at LEVEL 7.
Level 7, 8
Level 5, 6
Level 3, 4
Level 1, 2
ACB06035AB
BRIGHTNESS LEVEL TABLE

Brightness Dial brightness Pointer brightness LCD display brightness
level Day Night Day Night Day Night
LEVEL 8 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 35%
LEVEL 7 90% 58.8% 90% 58.8% 90% 19%
LEVEL 6 81% 34.3% 81% 34.3% 81% 10.4%
LEVEL 5 71% 20.3% 71% 20.3% 71% 5.5%
LEVEL 4 61% 11.8% 61% 11.8% 61% 3.1%
LEVEL 3 51% 6.8% 51% 6.8% 51% 1.6%
LEVEL 2 42% 3.8% 42% 3.8% 42% 0.7%
LEVEL 1 32% 2.3% 32% 2.3% 32% 0.3%

COMBINATION METER
DRIVING RANGE DISPLAY A long press of the meter information switch will
change unit displayed while the average fuel con-
sumption is displayed.
Possible cruising
distance
AS&G STATUS <VEHICLES WITH AS&G
SYSTEM>
AS&G status
ACB06037AB
Calculates current driving range possible on the

remaining fuel and displays it on the multi-informa-
tion display.
NOTE: Possible driving range displayed is only for
ACC01702AB
guide.
Displays the time from the engine stop, which the
AVERAGE FUEL CONSUMPTION DIS- AS&G system activates, until the engine restarts.
PLAY
OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE AND FROST
Average fuel consumption
Auto reset mode WARNING
Frost warning indicator
Outside temperature
Manual reset mode ACB06038AB
Calculates average fuel consumption since the last

ACB06040AB
reset and displays it on the multi-information display.
RESET MODE Informs the driver how the road condition is. While
There are two reset modes; manual reset mode and the frost warning is being triggered, the buzzer will
auto reset mode. In the manual reset mode, the sound and the indicator will illuminate or flash to alert
driver can reset it at any time by operating the meter the driver.
information switch. In the auto reset mode, the calcu- Change unit for outside temperature
lation will be reset without operating the meter infor-
mation switch when four hours elapse since the last
ignition switch turning off.
Change unit for trip computer
ACB06042AB
Displayed unit (Celsius and Fahrenheit) can be

switched over by pressing and holding the meter
information switch while the outside temperature and
frost warning screen is being displayed.
ACC02130AB

COMBINATION METER
SERVICE REMINDER ing condition is met, the indicator does not display
immediately. It illuminates next time when the ignition
Service reminder indicator switch is turned ON. The impending inspection inter-
val can be displayed by changing the LCD section by
the meter information switch. The service reminder
indicator will go off when it is reset by operating the
meter information switch according to the specified
procedure *, or the warning criteria (end point) shown
in the table below is satisfied.
NOTE: .
ACC01997AB • *: For details about the meter information switch
When the inspection interval (alert start point in table special operation, refer to the Workshop Manual.
below) is due in accordance with the predetermined
schedule (see table below), the service reminder
indicator will be displayed when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position. However, even if the warn-
SCHEDULE TABLE
Schedule Warning type Warning criteria
Normal Elapsed time (month) Every 12 elapsed months
Driving distance (miles) Every 12,500 miles of driving distance
Driving distance (km) Every 20,000 km of driving distance
WARNING CRITERIA (WARNING START AND END POINTS)

Elapsed time Driving distance (km) Driving distance (miles)
Warning start Warning end Warning start Warning end Warning start Warning end
point point point point point point
−30 days +30 days − 500 km +500 km − 300 miles +300 miles
MULTI INFORMATION DISPLAY <HIGH cator", "Service reminder*", "Function setting*",

CONTRAST METER> "Selector lever position", "Engine coolant tempera-
M2545500500548 ture", "Fuel remaining", "AS&G status display
In the multi-information display, followings are dis- screen", "Odometer", "Outside temperature". Dis-
played; "Drive mode indicator", "Caution mark", played contents can be switched by operating the
"FCM OFF", "LDW indicator", "ECO mode indicator", meter information switch.
"Cruise control", "TRIP A", "TRIP B", "Meter illumina- NOTE: .
tion control", "Driving range" and "ECO drive assist",
"Average fuel consumption", "Average speed/Instant • *: Is not displayed during driving.
fuel consumption", "AS&G status", "ECO score indi-

COMBINATION METER
When the ignition switch is LOCK (OFF), ACC position When the ignition switch is ON position
1 6
5 7
8 10
9 13
2
10
11 SET
15
120
km/h
SET
16
17 11 14 12
3
OVER
LIMIT
120
km/h
18 19
11
10 12
20
21 22
4 ACC01940AB
WHEN THE IGNITION SWITCH IS IN THE LOCK (OFF) POSITION (DISPLAYED WHEN A DOOR IS OPEN
OR THE MULTI INFORMATION METER SWITCH IS OPERATED.)
Item Content
1 Caution mark display It indicates when some warnings have occurred or existence of warning
screen on background. Except for frost warning and service interval indication.
2 Information screen/interrupt • When the meter information switch is operated, the displayed
display screen information contents are changed in the following order.
1. TRIP A (To reset the trip meter, press and hold the switch.)
2. TRIP B (To reset the trip meter, press and hold the switch.)
3. AS&G status (To reset the AS&G status, press and hold the switch.)
4. Service reminder (When service reminder function is enabled.)
5. Warning screen display (When a warning is present.)
• An interrupt display of appropriate contents is performed when a
warning is issued.
3 Door-ajar warning display Displays the door or tailgate that is open.
screen
4 Odometer display screen Displays the odometer.
WHEN THE IGNITION SWITCH IS ON POSITION
Item Content
5 Drive mode indicator Displays which driving mode is selected.
display screen
6 Caution mark display It indicates when some warnings have occurred or existence of warning
screen on background. Except for frost warning and service interval indication.
7 FCM OFF display screen Is displayed when the FCM is turned off.
8 LDW indicator display Changes according to the LDW status.
screen
9 ECO mode indicator Displayed when the ECO mode switch is on.
display screen
10 ACC/Cruise control/speed Displayed when the ACC/cruise control/speed limiter system is on.
limiter symbol display
screen

COMBINATION METER
Item Content
11 ACC main/cruise Displays a ACC/cruise control system/speed limiter status.
control/speed limiter status
display screen
12 Display screen for ACC set Displays the vehicle speed which the driver sets.
speed/speed limiter set
speed
13 Display screen for Displays when the ACC system detects a vehicle travelling ahead. The
recognising a vehicle graphic icon is outlined on a coloured background when the system is
travelling ahead for ACC READY. When the system becomes active, that icon will be highlighted.
system
14 Display screen for set Changes according to the vehicle distance which is set by using "Vehicle
vehicle distance from a distance set switch" of the cruise control switch.
vehicle travelling ahead for
ACC system
15 ECO lamp indicator display Displayed when the ECO lamp indicator makes the driver aware of
screen economical driving to reduce fuel consumption.
16 Information screen/interrupt • When the meter information switch is operated, the displayed
display screen information contents are changed in the following order.
1. Trip meter (A) (To reset the trip meter, press and hold the switch.)
2. Trip meter (B) (To reset the trip meter, press and hold the switch.)
3. Driving range and ECO drive assist
4. Average fuel consumption (To reset the average fuel consumption,
press and hold the switch.)
5. Average speed/Instant fuel consumption (To reset the average
speed/Instant fuel consumption, press and hold the switch.)
6. AS&G status/ECO score indicator (To reset the AS&G status, press
and hold the switch.)
7. Service reminder (When service reminder function is enabled.)
8. Function setting screen (Appears when the vehicle is stopped, the
selector lever is in the "P" position, and the parking brake is ON) (To
display the setting screen, press and hold the switch.)
9. Warning screen display (When a warning is present.)
• An interrupt display of appropriate contents is performed when a
warning is issued.
17 Selector lever position Displays the selector lever position.
display screen
18 Engine coolant temperature Displays the engine coolant temperature.
display screen
19 Fuel remaining display Displays the remaining fuel amount.
screen
20 AS&G status display Displays a AS&G system status.
screen
21 Odometer display screen Displays the odometer.
22 Outside temperature Displays the ambient temperature.
display screen

COMBINATION METER
METER ILLUMINATION CONTROL NOTE: The brightness can be set separately for the
The brightness of the combination meter can be daytime and nighttime. The configured information is
adjusted in eight stages (LEVEL 1 to LEVEL 8) by stored in the RAM. In the initial setting of brightness,
pushing the rheostat illumination switch when the the daytime is set at LEVEL 8 and the nighttime is
meter is illuminated. Current illumination level will be set at LEVEL 7.
displayed each time the rheostat illumination switch
is pushed. The illumination level can be changed by
operating the rheostat illumination switch according
to specified procedure *. The brightness of each
brightness level is as described in the table below.
BRIGHTNESS LEVEL TABLE
Brightness Dial brightness Pointer brightness LCD display brightness
level Day Night Day Night Day Night
LEVEL 8 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%
LEVEL 7 90% 22.3% 90% 22.3% 90% 19%
LEVEL 6 81% 10.9% 81% 10.9% 81% 9.3%
LEVEL 5 71% 5.3% 71% 5.3% 71% 4.6%
LEVEL 4 61% 2.5% 61% 2.5% 61% 2.3%
LEVEL 3 51% 1.2% 51% 1.2% 51% 1.1%
LEVEL 2 42% 0.5% 42% 0.5% 42% 0.6%
LEVEL 1 32% 0.2% 32% 0.2% 32% 0.3%
SERVICE REMINDER FUNCTION the meter information switch. The service reminder
When the inspection interval (alert start point in table indicator will go off when it is reset by operating the
below) is due in accordance with the predetermined meter information switch according to the specified
schedule (see table below), the service reminder procedure *, or the warning criteria (end point) shown
indicator will be displayed when the ignition switch is in the table below is satisfied.
turned to the ON position. However, even if the warn- NOTE: *: For details about the meter information
ing condition is met, the indicator does not display switch special operation, refer to the Workshop Man-
immediately. It illuminates next time when the ignition ual.
switch is turned ON. The impending inspection inter-
val can be displayed by changing the LCD section by
SCHEDULE TABLE
Schedule Warning type Warning criteria
Normal Elapsed time (month) Every 12 elapsed months
Driving distance (miles) Every 12,500 miles of driving distance
Driving distance (km) Every 20,000 km of driving distance
WARNING CRITERIA (WARNING START AND END POINTS)

Elapsed time Driving distance (km) Driving distance (miles)
Warning start Warning end Warning start Warning end Warning start Warning end
point point point point point point
−30 days +30 days − 500 km +500 km − 482.80 km +300 miles

COMBINATION METER
BUZZER
M2545500600404
Using its own signal or signal sent via CAN commu-
nication, the combination meter sounds the inte-
grated buzzer.
Item Relating ECU
Front seat belt reminder function Combination meter
FCM collision warning buzzer/FCM approaching warning buzzer ACC/FCM-ECU
ACC approaching warning buzzer ACC/FCM-ECU
ACC automatic cancelling buzzer ACC/FCM-ECU
LDW warning buzzer LDW-ECU
ACC vehicle stop/ACC vehicle-travelling-ahead missing indication buzzer ACC/FCM-ECU
ACC_FCM set/FCM set/ACC_FCM deactivation/cruise control set ACC/FCM-ECU, engine-ECU
indication buzzer
ASLF overspeed buzzer Engine-ECU
AS&G buzzer AS&G-ECU, engine-ECU
Electric steering wheel lock malfunction warning buzzer (vehicles with OSS
OSS)
OSS-related malfunction warning buzzer (vehicles with OSS) OSS
Engine switch reminder buzzer (vehicles with OSS) OSS
A/T shift cancel buzzer CVT-ECU or A/T-ECU
Paddle shift cancel prohibition buzzer <Vehicles with paddle shift>
Security alarm buzzer ETACS-ECU
Lamp reminder buzzer function ETACS-ECU
Keyless operation key reminder buzzer (vehicles with KOS) KOS
Door-ajar warning buzzer function ETACS-ECU
Freeze warning buzzer Combination meter
Parking brake reminder buzzer function Combination meter
Multi-information display interrupt display buzzer Combination meter
ETACS-ECU function customisation buzzer ETACS-ECU
A/C operation buzzer A/C-ECU
Audio operation buzzer Radio and CD player,
Multivision display
Meter information switch or rheostat illumination switch <High contrast Combination meter
meter> operation buzzer
Turn-signal lamp buzzer function ETACS-ECU
Rest reminder buzzer Combination meter
FRONT SEAT BELT REMINDER 2. <Vehicles for Russia> 60 seconds after the igni-
FUNCTION tion switch is turned ON, if the vehicle speed
exceeds 8 km/h, the driver's seat belt warning
When the driver's seat belt is released lamp illuminates and blinks for 90 seconds. The
1. When the ignition switch is turned ON, the buzzer sounds simultaneously with the blinks of
driver's seat belt warning lamp illuminates and the warning lamp.
the buzzer sounds for 6 seconds.

COMBINATION METER
3. <Except vehicles for Russia> If the vehicle speed AS&G BUZZER

exceeds 8 km/h, the driver's seat belt warning The buzzer will sound if any of the following condi-
lamp illuminates and blinks for 90 seconds. The tions is satisfied during the Auto Stop & Go (AS&G)
buzzer sounds simultaneously with the blinks of system operation.
the warning lamp. • In case the hood is opened.
4. On Step 2 or 3 completion, if the seat belt is not • The driver's seat belt is unfastened and the
fastened when the vehicle speed changes from 3 driver's door is opened.
km/h to 8 km/h, the warning lamp illuminates and • When detecting that the gearshift lever is in other
blinks again and the buzzer sounds again. than neutral position. <M/T>
When the front passenger's seat belt is released ELECTRIC STEERING WHEEL LOCK
• Control is the same as when the driver's seat belt
is not fastened. WARNING BUZZER (VEHICLES WITH
OSS)
FCM COLLISION WARNING BUZZER/FCM A buzzer will sound when the steering wheel lock is
APPROACHING WARNING BUZZER not activated/deactivated normally.
Sounds when the FCM activates.
OSS-RELATED MALFUNCTION
ACC APPROACHING WARNING BUZZER WARNING BUZZER (VEHICLES WITH
Sounds when your vehicle is too close to the vehicle OSS)
travelling ahead during ACC operation. A buzzer will sound when an error occurs in the
OSS-ECU power supply system.
ACC AUTOMATIC CANCELLING BUZZER
Sounds when the ACC deactivates. ENGINE SWITCH REMINDER BUZZER
(VEHICLES WITH OSS)
LDW WARNING BUZZER
With the engine switch in the ON position, when the
Sounds when the LDW enters an alert mode.
driver's door is opened, the buzzer sounds.
ACC VEHICLE STOP/ACC A/T SHIFT CANCEL BUZZER/PADDLE
VEHICLE-TRAVELLING-AHEAD MISSING SHIFT CANCEL PROHIBITION BUZZER
INDICATION BUZZER <VEHICLES WITH PADDLE SHIFT>
If the vehicle-travelling-ahead stops during the ACC
The buzzer sounds when the shift change on the
operation, your vehicle will also stop automatically.
transmission side is not made although the downshift
When the driver does not depress the brake pedal
operation is performed with the selector lever or pad-
under this condition, this buzzer will sound. Sounds
dle shift.
when the vehicle-travelling-ahead is missing.
SECURITY ALARM
ACC_FCM SET/FCM SET/ACC_FCM
DEACTIVATION/CRUISE CONTROL SET Previous alarm
INDICATION BUZZER Sounds when the system proceeds to an alarm
standby state.
When the cruise control switch or the FCM ON/OFF
switch is operated, a buzzer request signal will be Main alarm
sent to the combination meter. Then the combination Sounds as prior notice for several seconds before
meter will sound its buzzer. the system proceeds to a alarm state.
ASLF OVER SPEED BUZZER LAMP REMINDER BUZZER FUNCTION

The cruise control system has a speed limiter. If a With the ignition switch in the LOCK (OFF) position,
predetermined speed limit is reached, the buzzer will when the driver's door is opened with the tail lamp
sound. switch remaining ON, the buzzer sounds.

REVERSING SENSOR (CORNER SENSOR AND BACK SENSOR)
KEYLESS OPERATION KEY REMINDER ETACS-ECU FUNCTION CUSTOMIZATION

BUZZER (VEHICLES WITH KOS) BUZZER
With the ignition switch in the LOCK (OFF) position, When entering into the customize mode of
when the driver's door is opened with the keyless ETACS-ECU functions or when the customisation is
operation key left in the vehicle, the buzzer sounds. executed, the buzzer sounds in each case.
DOOR-AJAR WARNING BUZZER A/C OPERATION BUZZER, AUDIO

FUNCTION OPERATION BUZZER
With the ignition switch in the ON position, when any According to the buzzer sounding request signal
of the doors (including the tailgate) is open and the which is received when the A/C, radio and CD player,
vehicle speed information sent via the CAN commu- CD changer or audio visual navigation unit is oper-
nication is 8 km/h or more, the buzzer sounds. ated, the buzzer sounds.
FREEZE WARNING BUZZER METER INFORMATION SWITCH OR

When the ignition switch is in the ON position, if the RHEOSTAT ILLUMINATION SWITCH
ambient temperature is at 3°C or below, the buzzer <HIGH CONTRAST METER> OPERATION
sounds.
BUZZER
PARKING BRAKE REMINDER BUZZER When the meter information switch or rheostat illumi-
FUNCTION nation switch <High contrast meter> is operated, the
buzzer sounds.
With the ignition switch in the ON position, if the
parking brake has not been reset (parking brake TURN-SIGNAL LAMP BUZZER FUNCTION
switch: ON), and when the vehicle speed information
The buzzer sounds in synchronisation with the turn
transmitted via CAN communication is 8 km/h or
signal lamp operation.
more, the buzzer sounds.
REST REMINDER BUZZER
MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY
When the time to take a rest which was set on the
INTERRUPT DISPLAY BUZZER multi-information display is reached, the buzzer
When the interrupt display is displayed on the sounds.
multi-information display because of alarms, the
buzzer sounds.
REVERSING SENSOR (CORNER SENSOR AND BACK

SENSOR)
GENERAL INFORMATION
M2545200200353
The ultrasonic sensors installed on the rear corner
bumper and rear bumper detect obstacles at the
vehicle corners. These sensors have been adopted
to inform the driver of the obstacle distance from the
vehicle using the buzzer in corner sensor/back sen-
sor-ECU, and to improve the safety and vehicle driv-
ability during driving the vehicle into a garage and Back sensor
parking in a narrow space. Rear corner sensor
ACC00225AB

CAUTION
When the illuminated licence plate is installed, the sensors may not operate because of noise from
the plate.Refer to FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION (1)
Approx. 100 cm (MAX 150cm)
Corner sensor detection range Back sensor detection range
Approx.
60 cm
Back sensor detection range Corner sensor detection range

Approx. 50 cm AC808517AB
• Automatically active system by select reverse • Depending on whether the vehicle is equipped
position with a towing bar, you can change sensors
between the standard mode and the towing bar
mode. The towing bar mode changes the system
to exclude in the area in which the towing bar is
mounted from the detection areas.
NOTE: The detection range of the sensor varies with temperature and humidity. Obstacles below the bump-
ers or a curbstone not taller than the sensor position may be hard to be detected.
OPERATION
ACTIVATION/DEACTIVATION OF REVERSING SENSOR SYSTEM
By shifting the gear to the reverse position and oper-
ating the sonar switch (corner sensor switch), the
system can be turned ON (reversing sensor indica-
tor: ON) and OFF (reversing sensor indicator: OFF).
Sonar switch (Corner sensor switch)

ACC00007AB
THE TOWING BAR MODE SWITCHING

By operating the sonar switch (corner sensor switch), 5. The buzzer* sounds and the mode is switched
"TOWING BAR MODE" and "STANDARD MODE" between "TOWING BAR MODE" and "STAND-
can be changed. ARD MODE".
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. NOTE: *: Sounds twice when the mode is switched
2. Move the shift lever or selector lever to the "R" to "TOWING BAR MODE". Sounds once when the
(reverse) position. mode is switched to "STANDARD MODE".
3. Turn off the reversing sensor system by operating
the sonar switch (corner sensor switch).(Revers- BUZZER DURATION
ing sensor indicator: OFF) The buzzer sound of the corner sensor/back sensors
4. Press and hold the sonar switch (corner sensor is the same. The buzzer in the corner sensor/back
switch) for approximately 5 seconds. sensor-ECU sounds based on the closer alarm cycle
having a higher priority.

BACK SENSOR
Distance Buzzer duration
between The standard mode The towing bar mode
back
sensor and
obstacles
Less than Buzzer: ON Buzzer: OFF
approximat
Buzzer: OFF
ely 40 cm Continuity
AC808131AC
Approximat Buzzer: ON Buzzer: ON

ely 40 to 60
Buzzer: OFF
cm 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s
Buzzer: OFF
Continuity
AC808128 AC AC808131AC

ely 60 to 80
Buzzer: OFF
cm Buzzer: OFF
0.2s 0.2s 0.2s 0.2s 0.2s 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s
AC808132 AC AC808128 AC

ely 80 to
Buzzer: OFF
100 cm 0.4s 0.4s 0.4s
Buzzer: OFF
0.2s 0.2s 0.2s 0.2s 0.2s
AC808133AC AC808132 AC

ely 100 to
Buzzer: OFF
120 cm Buzzer: OFF
0.6s 0.4s 0.4s 0.4s
0.6s
AC808134AC AC808133AC

ely 120 to
Buzzer: OFF
150 cm Buzzer: OFF
0.8s 0.8s 0.6s 0.6s
AC808135AC AC808134AC
CORNER SENSOR
between
corner
sensor and
obstacles
Less than Buzzer: ON
approximat
Buzzer: OFF
ely 25 cm Continuity
AC808131AC
Approximat Buzzer: ON
ely 25 to 40
Buzzer: OFF
cm 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s
AC808128 AC

ACCESSORY SOCKET

between
corner
sensor and
obstacles
Approximat Buzzer: ON
ely 40 to 50
cm Buzzer: OFF
0.2s 0.2s 0.2s 0.2s 0.2s
AC808132 AC
FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION 3. When an abnormality occurs in the system, the

1. When the ultrasonic noise is received, the bass reversing sensor indicator keeps flashing with
toned buzzer sound continuously. When the ultra- 0.8-second interval until the system returns to the
sonic noise stops, the normal operation will be normal condition. However, if the system is
resumed immediately. turned OFF by using the switch, the indicator
2. When the abnormality such as the open circuit of stops its flashing.
a sensor occurs, the sensor turns OFF and the
high toned buzzer sounds for 5 seconds. When
the normal signal is received, the normal state
will be resumed.
ACCESSORY SOCKET
GENERAL INFORMATION
M2544400200796
<Instrument centre panel> <Rear floor console>
Accessory socket
Cigarette lighter or
Accessory socket
ACB05420 ACB05500
ACC00868AB
• The instrument centre panel is equipped with a • The rear console contains a plug-in type acces-
accessory socket as standard. <Vehicles for sory socket, which is useful when using a acces-
EUR> sory device
• The instrument centre panel is equipped with a • The maximum load is 120 W when a single
cigarette lighter as option. <Vehicles for EUR> accessory socket is used.
• The instrument centre panel is equipped with a
cigarette lighter as standard. <Vehicles for Rus-
sia>

COLUMN SWITCH
COLUMN SWITCH
GENERAL INFORMATION If the column switch moves to the front of the vehicle
M2546100200166 and hits the instrument panel or meter bezel due to
Column switch has a function to ensure the driver's the impact of frontal collision, the steering wheel
safety upon an impact of frontal collision. moves to the front of the vehicle because the right
FUNCTION and left levers fall down, ensuring the driver's safety.
In addition, the column switch is ensured of the rigid-
Front of vehicle
ity that the levers do not fall down by the normal
Column switch operation, but it cannot be reused after deformation
occurrence.
Collision load Collision load
Column switch
ACB02479 AB
AUDIO AND NAVIGATION SYSTEM

GENERAL INFORMATION • For the speaker system, the following two types
M2547000100596 have been established: the 6 speakers as well as
• For the audio unit (radio and CD player), the fol-
the 9 speakers at 7 positions*.
lowing two types have been established: the 1CD
audio as well as the display audio. NOTE: *Vehicles with Rockford Fosgate® premium
• For Mitsubishi Multi Communication System sound system.
(MMCS), the multivision display with CD drive • A roof antenna has been mounted for receiving
and SD memory card drive is established. radio broadcast.
• A rear view camera has been established to the • The Rockford Fosgate® premium sound system
tailgate. (audio amplifier and 9 speakers at 7 positions)
• On the spoke of steering wheel, the steering has been established.
wheel remote control switch has been installed. • Digital Audio Broadcast (DAB) (digital radio) is
• An USB adapter is equipped in the rear console. supported. <Vehicles with DAB tuner>
• The hands-free interface system has been estab- • A DC/DC converter is installed in order to avoid
lished. the power supply voltage drop when Auto Stop &
Go (AS&G) System starts the engine automati-
cally.<Vehicles with Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) Sys-
tem>

GPS antenna
Microphone unit
Radio and CD player or
multivision display (MMCS)
Roof antenna
CAN box
Hands free ECU
USB adapter
ACB05387AB
ACB05387

DC/DC converter
DAB tuner
Steering wheel
remote control switch Audio amplifier
Tweeter
ETACS-ECU
Front door speaker
Rear door speaker
Rear view camera
Subwoofer ACC00993 AB
RADIO AND CD PLAYER

M2544900400632
For the audio unit, the following two types have been • 2 line bright white letters on VFD (Vacuum Fluo-
established: the 1CD audio as well as the display rescent Display), umber illumination.
audio. To have best acoustical characteristics, inte-
grated amplifier is tuned to the acoustic. Display audio
1CD audio • Harmonized face panel design and colour with
• Harmonized face panel design and colour with around trim parts.
around trim parts. • 6.1 inch QVGA full colour display, with touch
panel, umber illumination.
• Compatible with rear view camera interface.
SPECIFICATIONS
Item 1CD audio Display audio
FM/MW/LW electronic tuning radio Equipped Equipped
DAB function <Vehicles with DAB tuner> Equipped Equipped
RDS function Equipped Equipped
CD player, compatible with MP3 format Equipped −
(CD-R/CD-RW supported)*1

Item 1CD audio Display audio

CD player, compatible with − Equipped
MP3/WMA/AAC format (CD-R/CD-RW
supported)*1
Audio integrated 4 channel power General 140 W General 140 W
amplifier
Supports iPod®/portable music Equipped Equipped
player/USB memory device
(MP3/WMA/AAC compatible)
connection*2
NOTE: .
• *1: Some MP3/WMA/AAC format and
CD-R/CD-RW may not be played.
• *2: A iPod®/portable music player/USB memory
device (MP3/WMA/AAC compatible) can be con-
nected through the USB connection to play its
stored audio file or charge its battery. Some
devices may not be compatible with the hands
free ECU.

SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM
Combination
ETACS-ECU
meter
Radio Radio
antenna (for analog) antenna (for digital)
Sound
Steering wheel DAB
remote control tuner
switch Communication
<Vehicles with
DAB tuner>
Rear view Image

Radio and CD player
camera
<Vehicles without Sound
hands-free interface system> Speaker
Sound
USB USB
device adapter
Audio
control
<Vehicles with Sound Communication

hands-free interface system>
Sound
USB USB
device adapter Hands free ECU BluetoothR device
Audio BluetoothR
control
Sound
Microphone unit
ACC00980AB
MITSUBISHI MULTI COMMUNICATION Refresh Design

SYSTEM (MMCS) Adopt high-definition screen
M2544800100571
For Mitsubishi Multi Communication System • Change WQVGA (480 x 234 dot) display into
(MMCS), the multivision display (7 inch WVGA dis- WVGA (800 x 480 dot) in the same size. So, sup-
play of wide 2 DIN size) with CD drive and SD mem- ply sharper image.
ory card drive is established. Change panel and screen design
Two slots of SD memory card available. One uses • Change the name of panel buttons easy to under-
map data and software program etc., the other uses stand.
music data (MP3, WMA, etc.) playback. • Adopt rotary switches to change volume intui-
Lift customer satisfaction point to improve following tively.
items from current model.

• Group each menu easy to understand (Left side: Improve Usability

AV, Right side: Navigation, Under: Setting).
• Create expensive-looking high gross black and Add map of new countries
plating on the panel. • Add new countries as below.
• Finland
Improve Functions • Baltic States (Latvia, Lithuania, Estonia)
• Belarus
Improve the base feature of MMCS • Moldova
• Add 3D map view and 3D landmarks
• Add highway (motorway) map Enhance AV Functions
• Add junction view
• Display speed limit Display two screen at a time
• Display map screen and other screen (AV, Infor-
Display guidance point in the combination meter mation etc.) at a time
• Displaying guidance information displayed in
MMCS in combination meter, confirm guidance
point safety.
Combination
meter ETACS-ECU
Radio Radio
antenna GPS antenna
(for digital) antenna (for analog)
CAN box
<Vehicles without Rockford Fosgate R
premium sound system>

Sound
<Vehicles Sound
with DAB
Speaker
DAB tuner> tuner
Communication
Multivision display
Steering wheel
(MMCS) <Vehicles with Rockford Fosgate R
remote control
switch premium sound system>
Image Sound Sound

Speaker
Rear view camera
Communication
Sound
Sound
USB USB
device adapter Hands free ECU BluetoothR device
Audio BluetoothR
control
Sound
Microphone unit
ACC00981AB

ETACS FUNCTION CUSTOMISATION REAR VIEW CAMERA

M2544700100198
FUNCTION
A rear view camera has been established to the tail-
The ETACS functions can be customised by select- gate. The rear view camera displays the rear view
ing of the multivision display. image of the vehicle on the display audio or multivi-
sion display for easy confirmation of safety when
driving backward.
Rear view camera
ACB05474 AB
Bottom edge line of direct vision
Display area of rear view camera
ACB05487 AB

OPERATION
When the selector lever is moved to the R (reverse)
position with the ignition switch "ON", the image of
the rear view camera is displayed on the display
audio screen or multivision display screen.
Screen display
Displays rear view camera. <Vehicles with display audio>
Caution message
Approx. 2 m behind the vehicle Directly check the area around the vehicle.
Approx. 3 m behind the vehicle

Extended line of
Approx. 0.5 m behind the vehicle "vehicle width + 0.2 m"
(Displayed in red) (Displayed in green)
Tailgate
AC612475 AG
<Vehicles with multivision display>

Extended line of
Approx. 0.5 m behind the vehicle "vehicle width + 0.2 m"
(Displayed in red) (Displayed in green)
Tailgate
Approx. 0 m behind the vehicle Check surroundings for safety.
Caution message AC612475 AH
STEERING WHEEL REMOTE CONTROL On the spoke of steering wheel, the steering wheel
SWITCH audio remote control switch and steering wheel voice
M2546500000320 control switch have been installed.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO REMOTE
CONTROL SWITCH
Steering wheel
Using the steering wheel audio remote control
audio remote control switch, the volume adjustment of the radio and CD
switch player and the multivision display, mode changeover,
CD track up/down, and others can be performed.
Steering wheel
voice control STEERING WHEEL VOICE CONTROL
switch SWITCH <VEHICLES WITH HANDS-FREE
ACB05490AB
INTERFACE SYSTEM>
Using the steering wheel voice control switch,
hands-free interface system.

USB ADAPTER An USB adapter is equipped in the rear console. A

M2547100100021 iPod®/portable music player can be connected
through the USB connection to play its stored audio
file on the radio and CD player or the multivision dis-
USB adapter
play, or charge its battery.
HANDS-FREE INTERFACE SYSTEM

M2546400300023
The hands-free interface system enables handsfree
talking and playing music by Bluetooth® connection
with Bluetooth® device (mobile phone or music
player). In addition, music can be played by connect-
ACB05492 AB
ing the USB-compatible device to the USB adapter.
Microphone unit
Steering wheel (built in front room lamp)
voice control
switch
ACB05490
AC704935
Hands free ECU
USB adapter
ACB05492
ACB05493 AB
SPEAKER NOTE: For Rockford Fosgate® premium sound sys-

M2545000100426 tem, refer to P.54A-47.
6 speakers (tweeter, front door, rear door) are pro-
vided.

SPECIFICATIONS
Item Allowable input power W Rated input power W
Tweeter 25 3
Front door speaker 35 15
Rear door speaker 35 15
TWEETER
The 3.5 cm balance dome tweeters are incorporated ROCKFORD FOSGATE PREMIUM
in the front door sash trim.
SOUND SYSTEM
DOOR SPEAKER
GENERAL INFORMATION
The 16 cm paper cone speakers are incorporated in M2547000100574
the front door and rear door. The premium sound system applies "Rockford Fos-
gate®", American top car audio brand, as same as
ANTENNA current model. All the electronics devices, circuits,
M2545100100371
At the centre of the roof rear, the roof antenna has like audio unit and premium amplifier, and sound
been mounted for receiving radio broadcast. structures, such as door speakers and subwoofer
are newly developed. And the sound system is tuned
thoroughly by professional Mitsubishi and Rockford
engineers, the Rockford Fosgate® premium sound
system accomplished higher sound quality than the
current model having high reputation at world wide
markets.

Audio amplifier
Tweeter
Front door speaker
Rear door speaker
Subwoofer
ACC00014 AB
FUNCTION Wide stereo technology: PremiDIA-WIDE

Various attractive new sound adjusting functions are Emphasize stereo image more expanded, beyond
added, to select sound setting precisely, according to cabin space.
various user preferences.
Surround technology: DTS Neural Listening Position selector
Sound quality optimization according to the location
Surround
of the listeners.
Multi-channel surround enhancement technology
developed by DTS, surround sound from the rear 3 levels speed compensated volume
speakers, even 2-channel music source.
(SCV)
Media expander: PremiDIA-HD Select from 3 levels of SCV effect (+OFF) accord-
Compensate sound quality of the compressed digital ingly from driving noise (current model: fixed value,
music source. SCV ON or OFF).
Automatic volume control technology: AUDIO AMPLIFIER

M2547000200258
Dolby Volume As a separate amplifier, 8-ch audio amplifier incorpo-
Auto volume level adjusting technology developed by rating digital signal processor (total maximum output
Dolby, reduce volume changes between different vol- of 710 W) has been introduced.
ume level source.

By using AUREUS® 32 bit digital signal processor SPEAKER

and BURR-BROWN® 24 bit D/A converter, system M2545000100437
has higher accretion of digital sound processing, and 9 speakers [tweeter, front door, rear door (2-way),
it makes predominantly clear sound. subwoofer] are provided.
SPECIFICATIONS
Item Allowable input power W Rated input power W
Tweeter 50 25
Front door speaker 80 40
Rear door speaker 80 40
Subwoofer 150/150 75/75
TWEETER
The 3.5 cm soft dome tweeters are incorporated in Vacuum moulded 3D shape cone woofer has advan-
the front door sash trim. tages for lighter weight and higher stiffness. By mak-
By using light weight CCAW (Copper-Clad Alumin- ing horn shaped surrounding of the tweeter, makes
ium Wire) voice coil and Tetoron® diaphragm, mak- sound connection smoothly from low to high fre-
ing much clear and comfortable high frequency quency.
sound.
SUBWOOFER
DOOR SPEAKER The 25 cm dual voice coil subwoofer has been
The 16 cm polypropylene cone speakers (woofer) installed to the quarter trim in the luggage room, ena-
are incorporated in the front door. The 16 cm + 3.5 bling the playback of dynamic deep bass.
cm polypropylene cone 2-way coaxial speakers Gain more power than current model although sub-
(woofer + tweeter) are incorporated in the rear door. woofer unit size is same. Position and direction of it
are decided enthusiastically for excellent sound.

DOOR AS A SPEAKER BOX
Resin cover
Resin plug
Front door
speaker
Resin cover
Resin plug
Resin plug
Sheet metal
cover
Rear door
speaker
Urethane integrated Front door

resin sheet water proof film
Sheet metal
cover
Urethane integrated
resin sheet
Rear door
water proof film
ACB05473 AB
The openings of doors is blocked by using the sheet Features

metal cover, resin cover, resin plug and urethane • CD audio like high-quality sound
integrated resin sheet to make the door into a • Improved radio reception due to digital radio
speaker box, thus improving the sound quality. As an wave
advantage of the sheet metal cover, the rigidity of the • A DAB-DAB link function enables the driver to
areas around the speaker has been increased, and receive multiple radio stations which are broad-
the higher sound pressure, suppression of high har- casting the same contents sequentially.
monic, and suppression of dumping are achieved to • Text information such as song title or artist is dis-
improve sound quality. played.
DIGITAL RADIO DC/DC CONVERTER
M2543900100014 M2546800100016
Digital Audio Broadcast (DAB) (digital radio) is sup- The DC/DC converter has been established which
ported. A DAB tuner is installed in the front inner pil- prevents the reset occurrence and sound jump of
lar lower. radio and CD player, multivision display and hands
free-ECU caused by the power supply voltage drop
at the auto start by Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) System.

General operation of DC/DC converter

IGNITION SWITCH:OFF
<Multivision display> Battery
ACC
DC/DC converter
Battery (+B) output

Boost section
Battery Radio and CD player
Multivision display
Battery (+B) input Hands free-ECU
Ignition switch Relay 1 Relay 2

(OFF)
Control section AS&G-ECU
AC905396 AH
The DC/DC converter outputs the battery voltage input from the battery to each audio device. (Relay 1:
Close, Relay 2: Open)
IGNITION SWITCH: ON or ACC position <except at auto start by Auto Stop & Go
(AS&G) system>
ACC
DC/DC converter
Battery (+B) output

Boost section
Battery Radio and CD player
Multivision display
Battery(+B) input Hands free-ECU
Ignition switch Relay 2 ACC output

Relay 1
(ACC/ON) <Multivision display>
ACC input
AC905398 AF
When there is an ACC input from the ignition switch, the DC/DC converter closes the relay 2, and the ACC
output <multivision display, AUDIO display (instrument panel assembly centre)> is sent from the DC/DC con-
verter to each device. (Relay 1: Close, Relay 2: Close)

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM <Vehicles without keyless operation system>
IGNITION SWITCH: ON position <at auto start by Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) System>
ACC
DC/DC converter
Battery (+B) output
Boost section
Radio and CD player
Battery
Multivision display
Hands free-ECU
Battery (+B) input
Ignition switch ACC output

(ON) Relay 1 Relay 2
<Multivision display>
ACC input

Boost command
from AS&G-ECU
AC905388AG
According to the boost command sent from the AS&G-ECU, the DC/DC converter opens the relay 1. At this
time, the battery voltage decreased by the auto start is boosted to approximately 12V, and is output to each
audio device.(Relay 1: Open, Relay 2: Close)
NOTE: .
DC/DC converter boost stop condition (boost is stopped when any of the following applies)
• Input voltage to DC/DC converter is 12.2 V or more.
• DC/DC converter boost duration is 5 seconds or more.
• Diagnosis code B1302 or B1301 is set in AS&G-ECU.
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM <Vehicles without keyless

operation system>
GENERAL INFORMATION • The ETACS-ECU compares the ID code, which it
M2544600200251 receives from the receiver antenna, with the one
• The immobilizer system consists of the receiver stored in its memory. If the ID codes correspond,
antenna, the ETACS-ECU, the steering lock the ETACS-ECU will permit the keyless operation
(immobiliser antenna) and the ignition key. and the engine starting.
• The receiver antenna communicates with the • The ignition key (transmitter and transponder)
transponder via the steering lock to receive key- incorporates an indicator lamp that enables the
less entry signal, and then sends the signal to the driver to check if the signal is transmitted cor-
ETACS. rectly or if the battery in the key is discharged.
• ID codes (transmitter and transponder) is regis- • Each vehicle is provided with two ignition keys as
tered into ETACS-ECU. standard, and up to eight ignition keys can be
registered.
• Settings of the keyless entry function can be
adjusted using a customisation function.

Immobilizer Receiver
Ignition key antenna antenna ETACS-ECU Engine-ECU
Starter relay
CAN-C CPU
ID
Ignition
Transponder
CAN
Injection
Steering lock
ACB05551 AB
MAIN COMPONENTS
Component name Outline of function
Receiver antenna Receives the operation signals from the lock/unlock switches on the ignition
key (transmitter and transponder), sends them to ETACS-ECU
Sends signal to the transponder in the ignition key and receives the reply data
from the transponder via the steering lock (immobilizer antenna), sends the
reply data to ETACS-ECU.
Communication with transponder is operated by ETACS, Receiver antenna is a
driver module for transponder communication.
Steering lock (immobilizer Wireless communication with ignition key (transponder) receives the ID code
antenna) (key ID) of the ignition key (transponder) needed for starting the engine,
transponder communication is conducted via this antenna and receiver
antenna drives this antenna.
Ignition key (transmitter The ignition key (transponder) receives signals for certification sent from
and transponder) ETACS-ECU via receiver antenna and immobilizer antenna, and sends the
reply data signal to ETACS-ECU via receiver antenna and immobilizer
antenna.
The ignition key (transmitter) also sends signals to receiver antenna when the
lock/unlock switches on it are operated.
ETACS-ECU Conduct certification communication with the engine by using the CAN
communications.
Operate the receiver antenna for the transponder communication, and store
the IDs using the immobilizer communication.
Engine-ECU Communicates with ETACS-ECU via CAN. Permits/inhibits the engine starting
and controls the engine operation.

Ignition key
Lock switch
Unlock switch
Transmitter
Transponder
Door mirror assembly Room lamp,

Ignition key cylinder
Radio Radio illumination lamp
frequency frequency
signal signal (Transmitter)
Door lock actuator
(Transponder)
Tailgate latch
Steering lock assembly
Receiver
(immobilizer ETACS-ECU
antenna
antenna)
Power window switch
Turn-signal lamp
CAN-C
communication
Engine-ECU
ACC00115 AB
OPERATION 4. ETACS-ECU compares the codes (key ID, etc)

1. When the ignition key is inserted to the ignition sent from receiver antenna with the
switch or the ignition switch is turned to the ON already-registered ID code and self calculated
position, ETACS-ECU starts operation of receiver value, and then reflect the result of transponder
antenna, and starts communication with ignition communication to the certification communication
key (transponder) by radio frequency. with engine ECU.
2. When the ignition key receives the request signal NOTE: .
to start the communication from receiver antenna • The transponder integrated in the ignition key
via immobilizer antenna, then transponder starts uses the power supplied from receiver antenna
the communication and send the signal for via immobilizer antenna. Therefore, it can be
communication to receiver antenna via used regardless of the battery in ignition key (for
immobilizer antenna. transmitter).
3. Receiver antenna sends the codes (key ID, etc) • Two ignition keys (transmitter and transponder)
sent from the ignition key to the ETACS-ECU. are provided, and up to eight keys can be regis-
tered to one vehicle as needed.
• When ETACS-ECU is replaced or when the key
is lost or added, the ID codes for all the keys (key
ID) must be registered using M.U.T.-III.

ETACS
ETACS
GENERAL INFORMATION NOTE: *: ETACS (Electronic Time and Alarm Control
M2545400200744 System)
ETACS*-ECU has three main functions (gateway
function, coding function, body electrical equipment
control function).
GATEWAY FUNCTION
LIN-TAS
ETACS-ECU
LIN
CAN-C-Mid CAN-C
ACC01043AB
As a central ECU for the on-vehicle communication CODING FUNCTION

network system established in the vehicle, the gate- By writing the coding data such as vehicle model,
way function is integrated into ETACS-ECU. The destination, and equipment level to ECUs, the func-
gateway function offers the following functions: tions of ECUs can be changed. There are two types
• Data transfer among four networks*1 of coding method, the local coding and global coding.
Transfers the data flowing in a network to another
network in real time. BODY ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
NOTE: *1: CAN*2-C (power train network), CONTROL FUNCTION
CAN*2-C-Mid (middle-speed body network), LIN This function controls the following electrical equip-
*3(low-speed body network) and LIN-TAS ment.
*4(anti-theft alarm system network) • Exterior lamps
• Wiper, washer
NOTE: *2: For details of CAN, refer to GROUP 54C, • Central door locking system
Controller Area Network (CAN) P.54C-2. • Interior lamp
NOTE: *3, *4: For details of LIN, refer to GROUP 54B, • Electric-folding door mirror <vehicles with electric
Local Interconnect Network (LIN) P.54B-2. retractable remote controlled door mirrors>
• Diagnosis of each network communication line • Keyless entry <Vehicles without keyless opera-
Detects and stores an open circuit and short circuit of tion system>
communication line. • Power supply control
• Communication error diagnosis of network ECUs • Immobilizer system <Vehicles without keyless
Detects and stores the ECU that is not properly operation system>
transmitting data. • Headlamp automatic levelling system <vehicles
with headlamp automatic levelling system>
• Security alarm system <Vehicles with security
alarm>
FUNCTION AND CONTROL BY ETACS-ECU.

M2545400300547
POWER SUPPLY CONTROL with the ignition switch in the ACC position.
ACC POWER CUT-OFF FUNCTION <INI- NOTE: Using a customise function, the availability of
ACC power cut-off function and its time to ACC
TIAL CONDITION: 30 MINUTES>
power cut-off can be set. (Refer to Customise Func-
The function has been added that the ACC power tion P.54A-54).
supply is cut-off when 30 or 60 minutes has elapsed

ETACS
M2545400400953
is disconnected.
display)
Turn power Adjustment of ACC or IG1 Operable with ACC or ON position
source turn-signal lamp IG1 Operable with ON position (initial
operation condition condition)
Comfort flasher With/without Disable No function
comfort flasher Enable With function (initial condition)
function
lamp answer back
Front wiper Adjustment of the Normal INT Intermittent wiper interval is fixed to 4
operation intermittent seconds.
without lighting
control sensor or Speed Sensitive Intermittent wiper interval is calculated
vehicles without according to the intermittent wiper volume
LDW> control and vehicle speed (initial
condition).
Adjustment of the Normal INT Intermittent wiper interval is fixed to 4
intermittent seconds.
with lighting control
sensor or vehicles Speed Sensitive Intermittent wiper interval is calculated
with LDW> according to the intermittent wiper volume
control and vehicle speed.
Rain Sensitive Intermittent wiper interval is calculated
control and lighting control sensor (initial
condition).

ETACS

display)
Front/rear wiper Disabling or Only Washer No function
washer enabling Washer & Wiper With function: Without delayed finishing
washer-linked wiper wipe function <Initial condition (vehicles for
function RUSSIA)>
With after wipe With function: With delayed finishing wipe
function <Initial condition (except vehicles
for RUSSIA)>
Intermittent time Adjustment of rear 0 sec. No wiper interval
of rear wiper wiper interval 4 sec. 4 seconds
8 sec. 8 seconds (initial condition)
16 sec. 16 seconds
Rear wiper Low Disabling or Disable No function
speed mode enabling rear wiper Enable With function (initial condition)
continuous
operation
unfolding function
door mirrors>
Sensitivity for Photo sensor Level 1 bright High ambient brightness
auto lamp sensitivity Level 2 bright Standard ambient brightness (initial
(illumination condition)
intensity) <vehicles
with photo sensor> Level 3 Low ambient brightness
Level 4 dark Low-low ambient brightness
Lighting control Level 1 bright High-high ambient brightness
sensor sensitivity Level 2 bright High ambient brightness
(illumination
intensity) <vehicles Level 3 Standard ambient brightness (initial
with lighting control condition)
sensor or vehicles Level 4 dark Low ambient brightness
with LDW> Level 5 dark Low-low ambient brightness
Auto lamp Presence of Disable No function (initial condition)
linked wiper wiper-linked auto Enable With function
lamp function
<vehicles with
photo sensor>

ETACS

display)
Room lamp Adjustment of 0 sec. 0 second (no delay shutdown time)
delay timer with interior lamp delay 7.5 sec. 7.5 seconds
door shutdown time
15 sec. 15 seconds (initial condition)
30 sec. 30 seconds
60 sec. 60 seconds
Head lamp auto Adjustment of Disable No function
cut customise headlamp Enable (B-spec.) With function (initial condition)
automatic shutdown
function
Interior lamp Adjustment of Disable No function
auto cut timer interior lamp 3 min 3 minutes
automatic shutdown
function operation 30 min 30 minutes (initial condition)
time 60 min 60 minutes
Comfort flasher Switch operation Normal 0.4 second (initial condition)
switch time time to activate the Long 0.8 second
comfort flasher
function
Intelligent/Comf With/without Disable No function <Initial condition (vehicles for
ort washer Comfort washer RUSSIA)>
function Enable With function <Initial condition (except
vehicles for RUSSIA)>

ETACS

display)
Alarm Enables/disables Disable Without function
security alarm Enable With function (initial condition)
<Vehicles with
security alarm>
Duration of Adjustment of 10 sec. 10 seconds (initial condition)
pre-alarm pre-alarm (interior 6 sec. 6 seconds
alarm) continue
time <Vehicles with
security alarm
(vehicles without
security alarm
sensor)>
<Vehicles with
remote controlled
door mirrors>
Rear Adjustment of Enable(R wip.ON) Operates only when the rear wiper switch
wiper(linked automatic rear is ON.
reverse gear) window wiper Enable(R/F wip.) Operates only when the front or rear wiper
operation with switch is ON (initial condition).
reverse gear
engaged
KOS key detect With/without KOS Enable No function
out from window key exterior Disable With function (initial condition)
detection function
<Vehicles with
KOS>
KOS feature KOS function Both enable All KOS functions are enabled (initial
adjustment condition).
<Vehicles with Door Entry enable Only door entry function is enabled.
KOS>
ENG start enable Only engine starting function is enabled.
Both disable All KOS functions are disabled.
KOS unlock Adjusts the door 0 sec. 0 second
disable time unlock inhibition 3 sec. 3 seconds (Initial condition)
period after door
lock is activated. 5 sec. 5 seconds
<Vehicles with
KOS>

ETACS

display)
Remote ENG Remote engine Disable No function (Initial condition)
starter answer starter answer back Enable With function
back function adjustment
ACC power Time to ACC power Disable No function
auto cut cut-off when the 30 min 30 minutes (initial condition)
ignition switch is in
the ACC position 60 min 60 minutes
Sensitivity for Sensitivity level Level 1 100% sensitivity of security alarm sensor
security sensor setting of security (initial condition)
alarm sensor Level 2 90% sensitivity of security alarm sensor
<Vehicles with
security alarm Level 3 80% sensitivity of security alarm sensor
(vehicles with Level 4 70% sensitivity of security alarm sensor
security alarm
sensor)>
Coming home Disabling or Disable No function
light enabling coming 15 sec. The headlamps illuminate for 15 seconds.
home light function
30 sec. The headlamps illuminate for 30 seconds.
(initial condition)
Welcome light Disabling or Disable No function
enabling welcome Small lamp The tail lamps illuminate. <initial condition>
light function
Head lamp The headlamps illuminate.
Outer buzzer KOS outer buzzer Volume 1 Quieter than the standard
volume volume adjustment Volume 2 Standard volume (Initial condition)
<Vehicles with
KOS> Volume 3 Louder than the standard
A/C With/without Disable No function

Recirculation inside/outside air Enable With function (Initial condition)
Control automatic control
function
A/C Switch With/without A/C Disable No function
Control automatic control Enable With function (Initial condition)
function
Eco Mode Function to activate Eco Activates the ECO mode.
ECO mode Comfort Deactivates the ECO mode.
air-conditioner

SECURITY ALARM

display)
A/C Sensible Adjusting mean -2 Decreases the control temperature two
temp. value for degrees than the temperature displayed
customize temperature setting on the LCD.
-1 Decreases the control temperature one
degree than the temperature displayed on
the LCD.
0 No change (Initial condition)
1 Increases the control temperature one
the LCD.
2 Increases the control temperature two
degrees than the temperature displayed
on the LCD.
FOOT / DEF Air Changes air Normal D/F2 (Initial condition)
outlet ratio distribution rate for FOOT > DEF D/F1(more to FOOT vent): More air flows
DEF/FOOT vents through FOOT vents.
during manual
operation. FOOT < DEF D/F3(more to DEF vent): More air flows
through DEF vents.
FACE / FOOT Changes air Normal B/L2 (Initial condition)
Air outlet ratio distribution rate for FACE > FOOT B/L1(more to FACE vent): More air flows
FACE/FOOT vents through FACE vents.
during manual
operation. FACE < FOOT B/L3(more to FOOT vent): More air flows
through FOOT vents.
Auto Rear Activates the rear Disable No function (Initial condition)
Defogger(Engin window defogger Enable With function
e Start) when the ambient
temperature is
low.(The rear
window defogger
has never been
activated since the
ignition switch was
turned on last time)
SECURITY ALARM
GENERAL INFORMATION alarm state is notified (Refer to Function and Control
M2545700200659 by ETACS-ECU P.54A-62).
<Vehicles without security alarm sensor>
When the doors are locked using the keyless entry or
KOS (excluding the locking using the key cylinder or
others), the improper opening of door or hood
causes the ETACS-ECU function and control to give
off an alarm with the flashing of hazard warning lamp
(turn-signal lamp) and the intermittent sounding of
horns. Also, with the flashing of security indicator, the

SECURITY ALARM
Hazard indicators assembly
Rear turn-signal lamp
Security alarm indicator
Security alarm horn
Hood latch switch
ETACS-ECU
Front turn-signal lamp

Horns
ACC01584AB
<Vehicles with security alarm sensor> NOTE: The sensor sensitivity can be adjusted by the
The security alarm with the security alarm sensor M.U.T.-III.
and security alarm siren has been adopted. Security alarm siren
• The alarm for door/hood tampering and the alarm • With the "Ready to be triggered" status, the LIN
for vehicle invasion, jack-up, or power line cutoff communication between the security alarm siren
to the ETACS-ECU/security alarm siren are and ETACS-ECU is cut off to suppress the occur-
established. rence of the dark current.
• The security alarm sensor is connected to the • With the "Ready to be triggered" status, if the
ETACS-ECU via the LIN*1. ETACS-ECU detects invasion or irregular action
• The security alarm siren is connected to the by the security alarm sensor or tampering by the
ETACS-ECU by the LIN-TAS*2. (With the "Exte- door switch or hood switch, the LIN communica-
rior protection" status, the horn does not sound.) tion is reactivated.
• If the ETACS-ECU detects irregular action, it
NOTE: LIN *1 (low-speed body network), LIN-TAS *2
sends a sounding request signal to the security
(anti-theft alarm network)
alarm siren by the LIN communication.
Security alarm sensor • When the security alarm is in the "Ready to be
• The ultrasonic wave sensor is incorporated to triggered" status, if the signal transmission to the
judge whether it is invasion or not from the security alarm siren is cut off due to an abnormal-
change of reflected ultrasonic wave. ity in the power supply to the ETACS-ECU, the
• The inclination sensor is incorporated to deter- occurrence of irregular action is detected and the
mine that it is an irregular action if the vehicle is alarm sounds automatically* without the sounding
raised for 3-degree angle or more at the rate of request signal from the ETACS-ECU.
1-degree angle or more per minute.
NOTE: *: The security alarm siren incorporates a
rechargeable battery.

SECURITY ALARM
Hazard indicators assembly

Security alarm sensor
Rear turn-signal lamp
Security alarm indicator
Security alarm siren
Hood latch switch
ETACS-ECU
Front turn-signal lamp
ACC01583 AB

keyless entry function or the keyless operation system
ignition switch, Door switch,
Tailgate latch switch, Hood switch
LIN
Security alarm sensor
ETACS-ECU
LIN-TAS
Security alarm siren
Security alarm indicator, turn-signal lamp
ACC01047 AB

SECURITY ALARM
ETACS-ECU FUNCTIONS AND CONTROLS <Vehicles without security alarm sensor>

M2545700300407
SECURITY ALARM FUNCTION (Default: interior protection 10 seconds)
· Door(s) is unlocked by the System disarmed

keyless entry function
or the keyless operation system.
· Inserting the key in the key cylinder Door(s) is locked by the keyless entry function
or keyless operation key is approved, or the keyless operation system
and (including lock operation by the timer lock).
turning the ignition switch to ACC or ON.
When any operation above is done.
Ready to be armed
All doors, tailgate and

hood remains closed
for 20 seconds.
Ready to be triggered
Hood is opened.
or
NOTE: Door(s) or tailgate is opened in
*: Interior protection and an unauthorized way.
Exterior protection
Warning*
ACC01999AB
OPERATION NOTE: *:Using a customisation function, the shift

1. Operating the door lock with the keyless entry time from the interior protection to the exterior pro-
transmitter or keyless operation key (except for tection can be changed to 6 seconds.(Refer to CUS-
operating the door lock with the key cylinder) TOMISATION FUNCTION P.54A-63).
makes the vehicle ready for the alarm, and "ping"
tone starts.
ALARM HISTORY OUTPUT FUNCTION
If the interior protection or the exterior protection is
2. After 20 seconds, the incorrect door opening
activated between the last OFF operation and the
(opening door or tailgate without unlocking by the
next ON operation of the ignition switch, this function
keyless entry) sounds the room alarm with "Beep"
informs the driver by flashing the security alarm indi-
tone under the alarm state.
cator and by the buzzer.
3. After 10 seconds, in addition to the "Beep" tone,
the hazard lamps blink, and the horns sound
intermittently for 27 seconds to execute exterior
protection. If the hood is opened while the vehicle
is under the alarm state or the interior protection
state, the exterior protection will be executed
immediately.

SECURITY ALARM
ETACS-ECU FUNCTIONS AND CONTROLS <Vehicles with security alarm sensor>

M2545700300399
SECURITY ALARM FUNCTION
· Door(s) is unlocked by the System disarmed

keyless entry function
or the keyless operation system.
· Inserting the key in the key cylinder Door(s) is locked by the keyless entry function
or keyless operation key is approved, or the keyless operation system
and (including lock operation by the timer lock).
turning the ignition switch to ACC or ON.
When any operation above is done.
Ready to be armed
All doors, tailgate and

hood remains closed
for 20 seconds.
Ready to be triggered
Hood is opened.
or
NOTE: Door(s) or tailgate is opened in
*: Exterior protection an unauthorized way.
Warning*
ACC01999AC
OPERATION • Open the hood.

1. Locks the doors by the keyless entry transmitter • Abnormality in ETACS-ECU power supply
or keyless operation key (except for operating the • Abnormality in communication and power
door lock with the key cylinder). supply of the security alarm siren
2. "Ready to be armed" is set, the "Ping" tone NOTE: *1: When turning the ignition switch to the
sounds and the security indicator starts blinking. "OFF" position and the windshield mist switch to ON
(The security alarm sensor is not disabled for 5 seconds or longer (operate the wiper lever
upward), the buzzer incorporated in the combination
temporally*1.)
meter sounds once and the security alarm sensor is
3. After 20 seconds, the status shifts to "Ready to be disabled until the ignition switch is turned to the
triggered". "ACC" or "ON " position. To reactivate the security
4. Irregular door opening or tailgate opening alarm sensor, turn the windshield mist switch to ON
(opening of door or tailgate without unlocking for 5 seconds or longer (operate the wiper lever
using the keyless entry transmitter or keyless upward). When the security alarm is activated, the
operation key) buzzer incorporated in the combination meter
5. After the transferring to the "Warning" status, the sounds twice.
ETACS-ECU generates the "Beep" tone, the
hazard warning lamp flashes, and the security ALARM HISTORY OUTPUT FUNCTION
alarm siren sounds intermittently (Maximum 10 If the exterior protection is activated between the last
times) for 27 seconds. OFF operation and the next ON operation of the igni-
• With the "Ready to be triggered" status, the fol- tion switch, this function informs the driver by flash-
lowing operation or status immediately transfers ing the security alarm indicator and by the buzzer.
the status to "Warning".
M2545700400482
By operating the M.U.T.-III ETACS system, the fol- grammed information is held even when the battery
lowing functions can be customised. The pro- is disconnected.

LANE DEPARTURE WARNING SYSTEM (LDW)
Adjustment item Adjustment item Adjusting content Adjusting content

(M.U.T.-III display) (M.U.T.-III display)
Alarm Enables/disables security Disable Without function
alarm Enable With function (initial
condition)
Duration of pre-alarm Adjustment of pre-alarm 10 sec. 10 seconds (initial
(interior alarm) continue condition)
time <Vehicles without 6 sec. 6 seconds
security alarm sensor>
Sensitivity for security Sensitivity level setting of Level 1 100% sensitivity of
sensor security alarm sensor security alarm sensor
<Vehicles with security (initial condition)
alarm sensor> Level 2 90% sensitivity of security
alarm sensor
Level 3 80% sensitivity of security
alarm sensor
Level 4 70% sensitivity of security
alarm sensor

General NOTE: If there are bad weather or poor road condi-
M2549800100015 tions, the system may not operate correctly.
A lane departure warning system will warn the driver
when the vehicle begins to move out of its lane. The
LDW-ECU (integrating LDW camera), which is
mounted behind the windshield, monitors the road
ahead. If the system recognises that the driver is
about to move out of its lane, the combination meter
will provide a visual warning (on the multi-information
display) and an audible warning (buzzer).

Construction diagram
LDW-ECU
LDW switch
ACC00901
ASC-ECU
Column switch
Combination meter
ETACS-ECU
Engine-ECU
Stop lamp switch
ACC00954 AB
Main components and functions

Component name Functional Description
LDW-ECU (integrating Controls the LDW by using the following inputs/outputs and communications.
LDW camera) • Stores a proper lane recognition and parameter information based on the
variant coding which this ECU receives via CAN communication with the
ETACS-ECU.
• Receives a signal from the stop lamp switch, the side turn-signal lamp and
the LDW switch via CAN communication with the ETACS-ECU.
• Receives signals from the ECUs via CAN communication with the
engine-ECU, the ASC-ECU and the steering wheel sensor.
• Sends status information, a visual and audible LDW indicator/warning
requests to the combination meter via CAN communication.
LDW switch Sends the LDW activation/deactivation status via harness wires.
Ignition switch Supplies power when the ignition switch is turned "ON" or "Start".
Stop lamp switch Sends the brake pedal depression/release status to the ETACS-ECU.
Column switch (Side Sends a turn-signal lamp signal to the ETACS-ECU via LIN communication.
turn-signal lamp switch
(LH) or (RH))
Combination meter Displays the audible and visual LDW indicator and warning according to the
signals which are sent by the LDW-ECU.
Combination meter LDW Displays the LDW status. Also informs the driver that the LDW
(multi-information display) indicator camera is initialised or the LDW camera image is tuned.
LDW Displays if the LDW fails.
warning

Component name Functional Description

Engine-ECU Sends vehicle speed signal to the LDW-ECU via CAN communication.
ASC-ECU Detects the yaw rate and longitudinal and lateral acceleration of the vehicle, and
sends the corresponding signal to the LDW-ECU via CAN communication.
Steering wheel sensor Detects steering angle of the steering wheel, and sends the corresponding
signal to the LDW-ECU via CAN communication.
ETACS-ECU • Relays a signal from the stop lamp switch to the LDW-ECU.
• Sends a turn-signal lamp signal to the LDW-ECU.
• Sends variant coding information to the LDW-ECU.
• Sends the LDW switch on/off status, which is received via wiring harness
wires, to the LDW-ECU via CAN communication. Furthermore, receives the
audible and visual LDW indicator and warning requests from the LDW-ECU
and then sends them via CAN communication.
System Configuration
LDW-ECU
(integrating camera)
LDW switch Steering

Engine-ECU ASC-ECU
wheel sensor
Wiring harness wires

(CAN-C
communication)
ETACS-ECU
(CAN-C-Mid Wiring harness

LIN bus line
Wiring harness wires communication) wires
Combination Column Stop lamp

IG switch
meter switch switch
ACC00798
System fail-safe
If a malfunction is detected, the system will enter a SYSTEM OPERATION
fail-safe mode to protect the system.
NOTE: For details of the fail-safe function, refer to Operation
M2549800500013
Workshop Manual.
The LDW operates in the three stages below:

NOTE: The indicator and warning depend on these 2. Warning monitor status (standby)
stages. If predetermined warning conditions are sat- 3. Warning (WARNING L-LANE or WARNING
isfied, the buzzer will sound. R-LANE)
1. Operation status (LDW: ON)
Operation status Warning monitor status Warning
ACC00941AB
1. Operation status (LDW: ON) 2. Warning monitor status (standby)
LDW indicator LDW indicator LDW indicator
ACC01897AB ACC01898AB
If all of the conditions below are satisfied, the LDW If all of the conditions below are satisfied, the LDW
switch will be active. When the switch is operated will enter the warning monitor status (standby mode).
with it active, the operation status will be switched 1. The operation status is "ON."
between "OFF" (LDW disabled) and "ON" (LDW ena- 2. The LDW is not defective
bled). (LDW operation status switching function) 3. Vehicle speed is 65 km/h or more
1. The ignition switch is turned from "OFF" to "ON" 4. The stop lamp switch is "OFF" (the brake pedal is
or "START" released)
2. The LDW pre-check function is inactive (four sec- 5. Seven seconds or more have elapsed since the
onds or more elapse since the ignition switch is side turn-signal lamp (LH or RH) was turned
turned "ON" for the first time). "OFF".
3. The LDW is not defective 6. The LDW camera has recognised a lane suc-
cessfully or three seconds.
NOTE: If a lane disappears suddenly, the system will
extend the existing lane by 15 m as virtual lane.
(If lane division lines are dotted-lines, the system
also recognises them one continuous line.)
7. Your vehicle is being driven on a road which
radius exceeds 250 m.

3. Warning (WARNING L-LANE or WARN-

ING R-LANE)
ACC01083AB
If your vehicle intrudes a warning range, the LDW will provide visual and audible warnings. The warning will
be activated for 10 seconds in maximum. Even if the vehicle exits from the range soon, the warning will con-
tinue for at least three seconds.
Variable warning range Deactivating the warning
If your vehicle exits from the warning range or the
Warning range predetermined warning time elapses, the system will
deactivate the warning and return to the standby
mode.
Distance Disabling the warning
to the
lane line If a lane width is approximately 2.6 m or less or a
lane is closed due to construction work, the system
will disable the warning to prevent false operation.
Lane line Approaching speed
ACC01084AB
Resuming the warning
The warning range depends on your vehicle's The LDW stores the range where the repeated warn-
approaching speed to the lane line, or the distance ing is inhibited. If a warning is activated once, that
between your vehicle and the lane line as shown. range will become active. When your vehicle exits
from that range, the warning will be permitted again.

54B-1
GROUP 54B
LOCAL
INTERCONNECT
NETWORK (LIN)
CONTENTS
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . 54B-2 SYSTEM OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . 54B-3
STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54B-2

54B-2 LOCAL INTERCONNECT NETWORK (LIN)
GENERAL INFORMATION
GENERAL INFORMATION
M2545600100019
LIN refers to "Local Interconnect Network," which is a NOTE: *: The regulations that have been decided in
serial multiplex communication protocol* adminis- detail, from software matters such as the necessary
trated by LIN consortium. A communication circuit transmission rate for communication, the system,
employing the LIN protocol connects each ECU, and data format, and communication timing control
switch and sensor data can be shared among ECUs, method to hardware matters such as the harness
which enables more reduction in wiring. type and length and the resistance values.
STRUCTURE
M2545600200395
Master ECU Slave ECU
Sunroof-ECU
ETACS-ECU <Vehicles with
sunroof>
LIN bus line
Lighting control sensor

Column switch <Vehicles with
(column-ECU) lighting control sensor>
Slave ECU Slave ECU

AC608956AD
*
Master and slave ECUs are connected to the LIN NOTE: : ETACS (Electronic Time and Alarm Control
bus lines. The master ECU is the ETACS*-ECU, and System)
the slave ECUs are the column switch (col-
umn-ECU), the sunroof-ECU <vehicles with sunroof>
and the lighting control sensor <vehicles with lighting
control sensor>. The master ECU requests these
slave ECUs to communicate each other via commu-
nication lines.

LOCAL INTERCONNECT NETWORK (LIN) 54B-3
SYSTEM OPERATION
SYSTEM OPERATION
M2545600300132
Master ECU LIN bus line Slave ECU

Master task Slave task C
Slave task A
Slave task B Slave ECU

Slave task D
State of message on LIN bus line Byte field
1 byte
1
Logical value:
<Master task> 0
Start bit Data bit Stop bit
Transmits the header
at regular intervals.
Header Response Header Response Header Response Header Response Time

Slave task D Slave task A Slave task C Slave task B
Transmits the response

to suit the header
<Slave task>
AC506324 AE
LIN communication system is described below: • A header and response collectively are called as
• The master ECU performs the master tasks and a message frame, and the communication
slave tasks, and the slave ECUs perform the method that uses the message frame is called as
slave tasks. the frame communication.
• When the master ECU performs a master task, • Basically, the communication data is used with
the header frame which stores information to call some blocks of 10-bit data group which includes
certain slave tasks (ECU) is transmitted at regular one start bit and one stop bit (byte field) arranged
intervals. in order.
• When the master ECU and slave ECU perform a
slave task, the ECU called by the header frame
transmits the response frame which stores data
used for control.

54B-4 LOCAL INTERCONNECT NETWORK (LIN)
SYSTEM OPERATION
VOLTAGE VARIATION OF LIN BUS LINE
Battery voltage
Voltage variation
of LIN bus line:
Earth level
Recessive Dominant Recessive

State:
1
Logical value:
0
AC309813 AF
When each ECU sends or receives signals, LIN bus • When no communication is established, the LIN
line voltage varies as follows: bus line remains recessive (battery voltage).
• The voltage variation of LIN bus line (0 and 1
combination as a logical value) ranging between
battery voltage (recessive) and 0 V (dominant) is
output (transmitted) as a control signal.
MESSAGE FRAME
Message frame
Header Response
1 (Recessive)
Logical value:
0 (Dominant)
a b c d d d e
a: Synchronisation start region c: Identifier region e: Checksum region

b: Synchronisation region d: Data region AC506907 AD
A message frame consists of regions that include a

synchronisation start region, identifier region, data
region, and checksum region. A few bits of recessive
data is used to separate the frame from each region.
Frame Region name Description
Header Synchronisation A region that informs each ECU of the starting of header transmission
start region by sending dominant signals for a given period of time.
Synchronisation A region that synchronises the transmission cycle of each ECU
region connected to the LIN bus line (the slave ECU matches its
communication speed to that of the master ECU).
Identifier region A region that stores an ID to call the slave ECU defined by the LIN
protocol. The number of bytes for the data region is also defined in this
region.

LOCAL INTERCONNECT NETWORK (LIN) 54B-5
SYSTEM OPERATION
Frame Region name Description

Response Data region A region to store the control data used by ECU that is called by the
header
Checksum region A region for checking errors in data content The sending-end ECU
calculates data region value according to the specified computing
equation, and the result is stored in this filed. The receiving-end ECU
detects the transmission error based on the checksum filed value.

NOTES

54C-1
GROUP 54C
CONTROLLER
AREA NETWORK
(CAN)
CONTENTS
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . 54C-2 SELF-DIAGNOSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54C-6
STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54C-3 CAN BUS DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . 54C-7
SYSTEM OPERATION. . . . . . . . . . . . 54C-4

54C-2 CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (CAN)
GENERAL INFORMATION
GENERAL INFORMATION
M2542000100386
CAN, an abbreviation for Controller Area Network, is • Each ECU connected via the CAN communicates
an ISO-certified international standard for a serial independently, therefore if the ECU enters dam-
multiplex communication protocol*1. A communica- aged mode, communications can be continued in
tion circuit employing the CAN protocol connects some cases.
each ECU, and sensor data can be shared among, NOTE: .
which enables more reduction in wiring. • *1: The regulations have been decided in detail,
CAN offers the following advantages. from software matters such as the necessary
• Transmission rates are much faster than those in transmission rate for communication, the system,
conventional communication (up to 1 Mbps*2), data format, and communication timing control
allowing much more data to be sent. method to hardware matters such as the harness
• It is exceptionally immune to noise, and the data type and length and the resistance values.
obtained from each error detection device is more • *2: bps=bit per second
reliable.

CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (CAN) 54C-3
STRUCTURE
STRUCTURE
M2542000201405
Terminal resistor Terminal resistor

ETACS-ECU
CAN_L CAN_H CAN_L CAN_H
Steering
wheel 4WD-ECU OSS-ECU
sensor
ABS-ECU
SRS-ECU or A/C-ECU
ASC-ECU
CVT-ECU EPS-ECU KOS-ECU
Radio and
Diagnosis CD player
connector or CAN box
unit
Main
bus line Electric
M.U.T.-III tailgate
Terminal resistor control unit
Engine-ECU
Corner sensor/
back sensor
CAN-C -ECU
Terminal resistor
CAN-C-Mid Combination meter
: Indicates main bus line
: Indicates sub bus line
ACB05902AC
• A gateway function has been integrated to • The CAN bus line consists of two lines, CAN_L
ETACS-ECU as the network central ECU (Refer and CAN_H (CAN Low and CAN High, respec-
to GROUP 54A − ETACS-ECU P.54A-53). tively), as well as two terminal resistors (A
• The CAN system consists of the following two twisted-pair cable, highly resistant to noise, is
networks: CAN-C (high-speed power train net- used for the communications line).
work) and CAN-C-Mid (middle-speed body net- • The CAN bus line connecting two dominant
work). Each ECU is connected to one of the ECUs is the main bus line, and the CAN bus line
networks depending on its functions. connecting each ECU is the sub-bus line.

SYSTEM OPERATION
• With CAN bus, the terminal resistors are incorpo- • ABS-ECU <vehicles without ASC> or
rated in ECU. Resistors with approximately 120 ASC-ECU <vehicles with ASC>
Ω is used for the dominant ECU. • CVT-ECU
NOTE: . • EPS-ECU
• Dominant ECU: ETACS-ECU, engine ECU • Diagnosis connector
and Combination meter. • Engine-ECU
• Non-dominant ECU: ECU and sensor on CAN CAN-C-Mid
network, excluding ETACS-ECU, engine ECU • ETACS-ECU
and Combination meter. • OSS-ECU <vehicles with OSS>
• To the CAN bus line, ECU, sensor, and diagnosis • A/C-ECU
connector are connected as follows for each net- • KOS-ECU <vehicles with KOS>
work. • Radio and CD player <vehicles with radio and
CAN-C CD player>
• ETACS-ECU • Electric tailgate control unit <vehicles with
• Steering wheel sensor electric tailgate>
• 4WD-ECU <4WD> • CAN box unit <vehicles with MMCS>
• SRS-ECU • Corner sensor/back sensor-ECU <vehicles
with reversing sensor system>
• Combination meter
SYSTEM OPERATION
M2542000300506
Data frames
A A A A
ECU-1
Interval "a"
B B B
ECU-2
Transmission
Interval "b" suspended by
mediation
C C C
ECU-3
Interval "c" Re-

transmission
A B C A B A C B A
CAN bus
AC206267
AC206267AB
The CAN communication system is described below. • The data sent from each ECU conducting CAN
• Each ECU communicating with CAN periodically communication is transmitted at 0.01 − 1 sec
sends several sensors’ information on CAN bus interval depending on necessity of data.
as data frame (called periodical sending data). NOTE: In the figure above, the data frame A is trans-
For further details, consult the data frame section. mitted in "a" intervals, while the data frames B
• ECUs requiring data on CAN bus can receive and C are transmitted at intervals "b" and "c,"
data frames sent from each ECU simultaneously. respectively.
• A single ECU transmits multiple data frames.

SYSTEM OPERATION
• When data frames conflict with one another MEDIATION

(when plural ECUs transmit signals simultane- Because each ECU transmits data independently on
ously), data is prioritised for transmission by the CAN bus, there are cases of data collision when
mediation, therefore, plural data frames are not multiple data frames that ECUs attempt to transmit
sent simultaneously. For further details, consult simultaneously (if multiple ECUs transmit at nearly
the mediation section. the same moment). At this moment, processing of
• Data is transmitted not by the conventional volt- the ECUs attempting transmission is performed in
age-using method but by voltage potential differ- the following way.
ence. For further details, consult the section on 1. Data frame with high priority is transmitted first
CAN bus voltage transformation . according to ID codes memorized in data frames.
• Reliability of each ECU transmitting signals via
2. Transmission of low-priority data (data frames) is
CAN communication is secured by several error
suspended by the issuing ECUs until the bus
detection and recovery processes. For further
clears (when no transmission data exists on the
details, consult the sections on error detection
CAN bus).
and system recovery.
• For major communication signals (transmitting NOTE: If the suspended state continues for a spe-
signals) among ECUs. cific time, new data (data frame content) is cre-
ated and sent.
3. ECU containing suspended data frames trans-
mits the data when the bus becomes available.
NOTE: There is enough capacity on the CAN bus,
which never prevents data frames from being sent.
VOLTAGE TRANSFORMATION ON THE CAN BUS
Voltage 3.5 V
transformation
in CAN_H
2.5 V
Voltage
transformation
in CAN_L 1.5 V
State: Recessive Dominant Recessive
0
Logical value:
1
AC204753AE
Data frame transmission through the CAN bus line CAN_H is under the 3.5 V state and CAN_L is under
involves voltage transformation (for output signals) in the 1.5 V state. By transformation mainly to 2.5 V,
the distinctive CAN profile as follows. The ECU even in cases when voltage is rendered 0 from faulty
transmitting through the CAN_H and CAN_L bus earthing or the like (causing a problem of an approxi-
lines sends 2.5 − 3.5 V signals to the CAN_H side mate 0.5 voltage increase on the communications
and 2.5 − 1.5 V signals to the CAN_L side. The line), communication can be continued uninter-
receiving ECU reads the data from the CAN_H and rupted. Employing dual communications lines
CAN_L potential difference. "Recessive" refers to the improves reliability to prevent the presence of noise,
state where both CAN_H and CAN_L are under the compared to the conventional communication
2.5 V state, and "Dominant" refers to the state where method.

SELF-DIAGNOSIS
DATA FRAMES
Data Frames
SOF ID region Control Data region CRC region ACK EOF

region region
AC404606AB
The data frame, which is sent from each ECU (or ACK (Acknowledge) region
sensor) to the CAN bus line, consists of the fields • Region where to conform the reception of sent
bellow. data
SOF (Start of Frame) EOF (End of Frame)
• Indicates the start of the frame • Indicates the end of the frame
ID (Identifier) region ERROR DETECTION AND RECOVERY
• Identifies the data content while specifying prior-
CAN protocol secures its reliability of communication
ity rank in case of mediation
by providing several error detection function such as
Control region CRC shown in data frame, and the recovery function
• Specifies the frame type, data length, etc. (recovery is performed by resending, from abnormal
Data region state such as transmission errors). If an error is
• Values used for data control, etc. detected but it is not resolved even after recovery,
communication is stopped. This state is called "Bus
CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) region Off."
• Region where to check for errors in sent data.
The transmitting ECU calculates data regions by
applying prescribed operations and stores the
results. The receiving ECU detects erroneous
communication by comparing the CRC region
with the data region.
SELF-DIAGNOSIS
M2542000400428
• CAN self-diagnosis is performed by each ECU TIME-OUT
connected to the CAN bus. Each ECU transmits data frames periodically. If the
• Diagnosis codes related to communication are data frame is not received within the specified period,
named with the capital letter U, and are called the intended receiving ECU transmits a diagnosis
"U-codes." code indicating communication time-out for the ECU
• A summary of the CAN self-diagnosis system is that failed to transmit.
presented below.
FAILURE DATA
When the transmitting ECU detects failure of a sen-
sor directly connected to it, this is the pertinent data
used to inform the ECU.

CAN BUS DIAGNOSTICS
CAN BUS DIAGNOSTICS

M2542000500339
As ECUs are connected via CAN bus (including
M.U.T.-III), always diagnose CAN bus to confirm its
normality when inspecting. When the CAN bus diag-
nosis is carried out, the M.U.T.-III will monitor the
mutual communication status of the ECUs and then
display a current status of the CAN bus on its screen.

NOTES

55-1
GROUP 55
HEATER, AIR
CONDITIONER AND
VENTILATION
CONTENTS
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . 55-2 CUSTOMIZATION FUNCTION . . . . . . 55-13
HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER A/C COMPRESSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-14

SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-7
CONDENSER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-15
HEATER CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-10
DUCT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-16
AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL
SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-11 VENTILATION SYSTEM. . . . . . . . . . . 55-17

55-2 HEATER, AIR CONDITIONER AND VENTILATION
GENERAL INFORMATION
GENERAL INFORMATION
M2551000101826
The new heater unit integrates blower, and evapora- • The idle-up speed is controlled in two steps to
tor, it increases the air flow but reduces air flow secure the air cooling performance during sum-
resistance and air flow noise. mer and to enhance the fuel economy in the
moderate seasons.
FEATURES • The cooling fan control depending on the refriger-
ENHANCEMENTS IN COMFORT ant pressure and on the vehicle speed reduce
alternator load, thus enhancing the fuel economy.
• With the adoption of automatic A/C system, the
inlets (fresh air/recirculation air), the vents, tem- ENHANCEMENT IN SAFETY
perature at the vents and fan speed are automat-
• A/C system will shut down automatically if the air
ically the controlled according to the outside
bags are open.
temperature and cabin temperature so that the
• Crushable space has been adopted into heater
optimum air conditioner is achieved.
unit to reduce the risk of passenger injuries if a
• By the adoption of clean air filter, the air quality in
collision occurred.
the cabin has been kept.
• Improves the cooling performance by optimal GLOBAL ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION
refrigerant line routing and prevents potential
• Refrigerant system (HFC134a) has been
refrigerant leaks by reducing refrigerant line con-
adopted.
nections.
• Clean air filter media and its cover are separated
• Independent air conditioner control function
to reduce waste materials, when replacing the fil-
allows individual temperature adjustment at the
ter.
right and left depending on which the customer
prefers.<Vehicles with DUAL-ZONE AUTO A/C> ENHANCEMENTS IN SERVICE QUALITY
ENHANCEMENTS IN OPERATION • Reduction of refrigerant gas leakage and
enhancement in serviceability by incorporating
PERFORMANCE condenser and receiver
• To enhance luxurious appearance and conven- • Clean air filter is installed to the backside of glove
ience, a liquid crystal display panel has been box to facilitate the filter replacement.
adopted.
• Customize function has been added for the ENHANCEMENTS IN RESPONSIBILITY
enhanced convenience. Reliable information transmission is achieved by
connecting A/C-ECU and each ECU via CAN com-
ENHANCEMENTS IN FUEL ECONOMY munication.
• The 3D-profile high efficiency compressor has
been installed, thus improving the fuel economy.
SPECIFICATIONS
Item Specification
Air conditioner switch type LCD push button
Compressor type QS90
Cooling output kW 5.5
Heating output kW 5.7
Refrigerant Type HFC-134a
Charge quantity g 480 - 520

HEATER, AIR CONDITIONER AND VENTILATION 55-3
GENERAL INFORMATION
Ambient temperature sensor A/C pressure sensor
ACB03811AD
ACB03813AC
Interior temperature sensor
ACB05399AB

GENERAL INFORMATION
A/C compressor
suction hose
High-pressure
side valve
Low-pressure
side valve
Heater unit
A/C compressor
discharge hose
Condenser
A/C compressor
assembly A/C condenser
outlet pipe
ACB05002AB

GENERAL INFORMATION
Heater controller assembly

(A/C-ECU)
ACB05540 AB

GENERAL INFORMATION
COMMUNICATION
ETACS-ECU
·A/C compressor
·Ambient temperature sensor
·Cooling fan
·Engine water temperature sensor
·Idle-Up
·A/C out put
·Rear defogger relay
·Rear defogger
·Status of ignition key
CAN-C-Mid CAN-C
+B (12V)
(ETACS)
CVT
Fin thermo sensor
IG (12V)
(ETACS)
A/C pressure sensor
Outside/Inside air selection

Heater damper control motor
controller
Interior temperature sensor assembly
(A/C-ECU) Audio
Air mixing damper
control motor*
Mode selection damper

control motor
ABS
ILL+, ILL- Power transistor
(Meter)
ILO+, ILO-
(switches)
Display
Blower motor
NOTE
: Interactive communication
*: On vehicles with dual- zone auto A/C, two air mixing Diagnostic
damper control motors are fitted. On vehicles single- zone connector
A/C, one air mixing damper control motor is fitted.
Combination meter
Engine-ECU
-ECU
ACC00036AB

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM

M2551001000896
Front defroster
Side defroster
Side defroster Side
outlet
Centre
outlet
Recirculation
Fresh
Side
outlet
Heater core
Clean air filter

Heater outlet
for 2nd seat
Heater outlet
Evaporator for front seat
Blower motor
AC612039AO
Mode selection damper control motor
Heater unit Outside/Inside air selection

damper control motor
Air mixing damper Air intake duct

2
control motor (LH)*
Power transistor
Fin thermo sensor
Blower case
Air mixing damper

control motor*1 NOTE:
Air mixing damper *1: <SINGLE-ZONE AUTO A/C>
control motor (RH)*
2 *2: <DUAL-ZONE AUTO A/C>
Blower motor
ACB05541AB

<SINGLE-ZONE AUTO A/C>

Heater unit
Evaporator
Air intake duct

Air mixing damper
Outside / inside air

selection damper
Heater core
Clean air filter

Blower case
ACB05542 AB
<DUAL- ZONE AUTO A/C>

Heater unit
Evaporator
Air mixing damper (LH) Air intake duct
Outside / inside air

selection damper
Heater core
Air mixing damper (RH)
Clean air filter

Blower case
ACC00509AB

• The evaporator and heater core has been longi-

Crushable space tudinally installed in the vehicle length, and a
Crushable space crushable space has been ensured so that it
absorbs the impact in case of a collision and
Front side reduces the risk of passenger injuries.
• Inside air recirculation is controlled by driving the
inside/outside damper, thus improving the heat-
ing performance in winter.
Evaporator
• The air temperature of the defroster outlets has
Heater core
Drain port AC506491AB
been set lower than at the foot outlets to prevent
the red glow on face in winter. In order to avoid
The following front heater unit has been adopted. too cool temperature around the torso, the air dis-
• A case of thinner panel thickness, a narrower tribution at the side face and foot outlets is opti-
evaporator and condenser, a smaller expansion mised.
valve, a lighter power transistor are used to save • Clean air filter has been introduced as standard
weight. to prevent the intrusion of foreign materials
• Higher density in the core enhances the cooling including pollen, dust and cigarette smoke to
performance. Internal temperature in the evapo- improve the air quality inside the passenger com-
rator are equalised due to an optimum multi-flow partment.
structure and refrigerant circuit, thus improving • The installation position of clean air filter has
comfort. been set to the backside of glove box to facilitate
• Openings on the dash panel are sealed securely the filter replacement operation. At the same
by adding a cover, etc. to the expansion valve. time, the one-touch tab structure has been
Insulation pads are adhered to the HVAC case adopted for the cover installation to enable the
and the duct, thus improving sound absorption replacement operation without tools.
and insulation against external noise. • The air mixing damper control motors and the air
• A heater/cooling assembly unit is adopted for mixing dampers are installed as shown. The air
greater fan power and reduced noise. mixing dampers can be operated independently
to allow passengers to set temperature each for
the driver and the front passenger. <Vehicles with
DUAL-ZONE AUTO A/C>

HEATER CONTROL
HEATER CONTROL
M2551000900904
WITHOUT DUAL A/C
Temperature set switch Air outlet

A/C switch changeover switch
Fan mode
Outside/inside air
OFF switch changeover switch
changeover switch AUTO switch Rear defogger switch
Defogger switch
ACB05984AB
LCD panel
<WITHOUT DUAL A/C>
Set temperature
Inside/outside Air volume
display
air display display
Illuminates while
the blower motor is on
Illuminates at
Air outlet display
A/C ON mode ACB05986AB

AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL SYSTEM
DUAL A/C
Fan mode Air outlet

Temperature set switch (LH)
A/C switch changeover switch changeover switch
Outside/inside air Temperature set switch (RH)

OFF switch
changeover switch AUTO switch Rear defogger switch
Defogger switch
ACB05404AC
LCD panel <DUAL A/C>

Illuminates
Set temperature Inside/outside Set temperature display
at DUAL mode
display (driver's side) Air volume air display (front passenger's side)
display
Illuminates at Illuminates while

A/C ON mode the blower motor is on Air outlet display ACB05985 AB
The following heater controller has been adopted. • Ergonomic layout of the control panel allows the
• To enhance luxurious appearance and conven- driver to check the current status without less eye
ience, a liquid crystal display panel has been movement.
adopted. • The smoke-shaded LCD screen provides a luxury
• A white character LCD is adopted in order to pro- image.
vide a better visibility.

M2551002800033
General • The heating performance is enhanced by restrict-

The air conditioner system with following features ing minimum air volume at low ambient tempera-
has been adopted. ture (-5°C or less).
• If the heater fan runs at higher stage, the recircu- • The interior temperature sensor can measure
lation ratio of heated air will be increased, thus temperature more precisely due to better sealing
improving heating performance. around it. This improves the response and com-
• The heating performance is enhanced by fort of the automatic air conditioner.
increasing air volume.

CONTROL IDLE-UP CONTROL

FORCED DEF CONTROL A/C-ECU and the engine-ECU communicate with
When air outlet position is switched to DEF, A/C is each other through the CAN communication. The
automatically turned ON, and outside/inside air idle-up speed of the engine is controlled in two steps
selection damper is set to the fresh air position to depending on the A/C load to secure the air cooling
quickly defrost the windshield screen. performance during summer and to enhance fuel
economy in seasons with moderate temperature.
MAX COOL, MAX HOT CONTROL
DETECTION CONTROL FOR
When the set temperature is at MAX COOL (15°C) or
at MAX HOT (29°C) with the air outlet and air volume REFRIGERANT LEAKS
at the AUTO positions, the following controls are A/C-ECU determines if the refrigerant amount is less
made automatically by the A/C-ECU. than specified or refrigerant pressure is abnormal by
using the ambient temperature (ambient temperature
Subject to MAX COOL MAX HOT
sensor to measure refrigerant inflation rate) and
control
refrigerant pressure (measured by the A/C pressure
Air mix MAX COOL MAX HOT sensor). When refrigerant amount or refrigerant pres-
damper position position sure is judged abnormal, the compressor is cut-off to
Air outlet FACE position FOOT position protect the A/C system.
mode
PROTECTION CONTROL AT AIR BAG
Air volume Maximum Maximum
DEPLOYMENT (DURING COLLISION)
Outside/insid Air recirculation Fresh air
When the air bag deployment is detected, the A/C
e air position* position*
system is stopped.
selection
damper
COMMUNICATION
Air ON* OFF* A/C-ECU performs the signal transmission and
conditioner reception with each ECU via CAN (Controller Area
switch Network)*.
NOTE: "*" indicates that when the automatic control NOTE: *: For details of CAN communication, refer to
is not cancelled using the customise function, the GROUP 54C − Controller Area Network P.54C-2.
manual operation is disabled.
DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION
A/C-ECU has the following functions for easier sys-
tem checks.
• DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION
• Actuator test
NOTE: For each item, refer to the Workshop Manual.

CUSTOMIZATION FUNCTION
CUSTOMIZATION FUNCTION
M2551003000018
is disconnected.
display)
A/C With/without Disable No function
Recirculation inside/outside air Enable With function (Initial condition)
Control automatic control
function
A/C Switch With/without A/C Disable No function
Control automatic control Enable With function (Initial condition)
function
A/C Sensible Adjusting mean -2 Decreases the control temperature two
temp. value for degrees than the temperature displayed
customize temperature setting on the LCD.
-1 Decreases the control temperature one
the LCD.
0 No change (Initial condition)
1 Increases the control temperature one
the LCD.
2 Increases the control temperature two
degrees than the temperature displayed
on the LCD.
FOOT / DEF Air Changes air Normal D/F2 (Initial condition)
outlet ratio distribution rate for FOOT > DEF D/F1(more to FOOT vent): More air flows
DEF/FOOT vents through FOOT vents.
during manual
operation. FOOT < DEF D/F3(more to DEF vent): More air flows
through DEF vents.
FACE / FOOT Changes air Normal B/L2 (Initial condition)
Air outlet ratio distribution rate for FACE > FOOT B/L1(more to FACE vent): More air flows
FACE/FOOT vents through FACE vents.
during manual
operation. FACE < FOOT B/L3(more to FOOT vent): More air flows
through FOOT vents.

A/C COMPRESSOR

display)
Auto Rear When ambient Disable No function (Initial condition)
Defogger(Engin temperature is 3 Enable With function
e Start) degree or less, the
rear defogger will
be turned on
automatically. (The
rear window
defogger has never
been activated
since the ignition
switch was turned
on last time)
A/C COMPRESSOR
M2551001100837
HIGH EFFICIENCY COMPRESSOR WITH MAGNETIC CLUTCH WITH THERMAL

INTEGRATED OIL SEPARATOR FUSE
High efficiency compressor with integrated oil sepa- At the compressor lock, the thermal fuse integrated
rator has been adopted to enhance fuel economy by in the magnet clutch is blown due to the frictional
reducing the A/C operating rate. heat against the compressor in order to reduce risk
of the drive belt breakage. The thermal fuse, together
with the coil, is coated with resin to enhance resist-
ance to corrosion.

CONDENSER
3D-PROFILE COMPRESSOR
Refrigerant temperature switch
Discharge valve
(internal relief valve)
AC708240 AC
• The 3D profile improves durability and efficiency, • The refrigerant temperature switch can measure
and shortens the total length. temperature without any openings on the case.
• An internal relief valve allows compressed refrig- This reduces the risk of refrigerant leaks.
erant to escape into the outlet side, thus improv-
ing the reliability of the compressor.
CONDENSER
M2551001400333
The air conditioner compressor with following fea-
Condenser tures has been adopted..
• A sub-cool type is adopted in order to enhance
performance.
• A narrower high-efficiency core and plastic brack-
ets are adopted in order to save weight.
• A condenser is assembled into the radiator as
one module, thus simplifying the structure.
Radiator
ACB05982 AB

DUCT
DUCT
M2551001300842
To windshield (Defroster)
To front door window

(Side defroster)
Side ventilator
Centre ventilator To front door window

(Side defroster)
Side ventilator
To driver seat footwell
To passenger seat footwell
To rear seat footwell
To rear seat footwell ACB05540 AC
The following air outlet system has been adopted to • A rear heater duct is fitted in order to improve
improve comfort. comfort.
• The FACE vents at the driver's side is located so
that air is directed to the driver's face rather than
hands. This improves comfort.

VENTILATION SYSTEM
VENTILATION SYSTEM
M2551002001096
Rear ventilation duct

ACB05000AB
Fresh air is sucked from the front deck and

exhausted through the air outlet behind the rear
bumper. Optimising areas of the outside air induction
hole and the air outlet enhances ventilated air
amount, reducing noise.

NOTES

2013 Outlander

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2013 Outlander

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

00-1

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL. . . . . . 00-2 SPACIOUS CABIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-6

TECHNICAL FEATURES. . . . . . . . . . 00-3 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION . . . . . . . . 00-9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

MODEL INDICATIONS A/T:Indicates the automatic transmission, or models

EVOLVED ORTHODOXY SUV Enhancement of field of vision

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1. FRONT DESIGN • Lighter body due to rich tensioned surfaces

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1. INSTRUMENT PANEL • Good haptic quality with soft upper pad on

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

No. Item Dimension mm

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Front under cover <4N1> Rear under cover

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

PASSIVE SAFETY MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY

seat fixing mechanism)

STEERING SYSTEM WITH TILT AND TEL-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

VEHICLES FOR EUROPE

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

VEHICLES FOR RUSSIA (EASTERN EUROPE COUNTRIES)

No. Item Content

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

No. Item Content

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

VEHICLES FOR EUROPE

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

VEHICLES FOR RUSSIA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . 11-2 BASE ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

CYLINDER HEAD RELATION

Cylinder head cover

Cylinder head gasket

Oil feeder control valve Oil hole

Oil feeder control

1. CYLINDER HEAD COVER • The cylinder head is made of aluminium alloy,

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Crankshaft bearing cap

Crankshaft oil seal

A cylinder block made of an aluminium alloy has Item 4B11 4B12

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Piston ring No.1 Piston ring No.2

Piston ring No.1

Connecting rod bearing

1. PISTON • The connecting rod is made of highly rigid, forged

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1. CRANK SHAFT 4. CRANKSHAFT PULLEY

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

TIMING CHAIN RELATION

Inlet V.V.T. sprocket

Timing chain mark Timing mark